Home

Definity Addendum 1 for DS1-DMI-ISDN-PRI Reference

1. Figure 7 64 Trunk Group Screen Page 3 CBC Usage ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V2 amp RIV3 7 125 CBC Trunk Group Usage Allocation Plan Assignment Schedule Usage Method Fixed y Allocation Plan Number 1 Scheduled n Usage Allocation Plan Activation Schedule Act Pin Act Pln Act Pln Act Pln Act Pln Act Pln Time Time Time Time Time Time Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Figure 7 65 Trunk Group Screen Page 4 CBC Usage Routing Pattern Number 1 Pattern Assignments Enter Up To 6 Grp FRL NPA Prefix Toll No Del Inserted IXC No Mark List Digits Digits Dow wWne Supplemental ISDN Routing Information BCC VALUE Service Feature 01234 Band Band Band Band Band Band Doe w wor Figure 7 66 Routing Pattern Screen ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 126 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 7 127 GENERIC 1 Generic 1 has the same DS1 facility considerations such as framing signaling line coding format as System 75 It also requires the additional clock circuit pack for synchronization The main significant
2. 8 MAINTENANCE AND ALARMS Describes the diagnostic capabilities and alarms provided by DS1 DMI ISDN PRI This part also provides information on methods of alarm analysis and alarm resolution e APPENDIXES A ADMINISTRATION REQUIREMENTS Provides screens showing administration field examples for System 75 R1V2 and R1V3 special access connections B SAMPLE INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE PROBLEMS Describes with examples some of the more typical field problems such as translation based synchronization related and physical interface connection problems C ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURE SUMMARY Describes the administrative procedures used on DEFINITY Generic 2 that relate to the ISDN PRI including how pertinent administrative fields relate to ISDN PRI level 3 message contents and general feature operation D TRUNK TYPE AND SIGNALING TYPE COMPATIBILITY TABLES Provides tables that define trunk type to signaling type compatibility for System 85 R2V1 R2V2 R2V3 R2V4 and Generic 2 E TIE TRUNK SETTING Provides administrative settings for tie trunks used with ISDN PRI e ABBREVIATIONS e GLOSSARY e INDEX NOTE Although this document applies specifically to DS1 DMI and to ISDN PRI the Generic 2 Remote Group Interface RGI is also a DS1 application As such portions of chapter_1 Introduction DSI Transmission and Cabling chapter 4 The Digital Loss Plan and Maintenance and Alarms may also appl
3. Contd primary signaling dial access code tone 2 6 2 14 dialed number identification service DNIS A dialing cut through DID port family 6 10 trunk administration 6 11 trunk and DPO channel units 2 8 trunk group C 6 trunk ports CO 4 6 trunk type on 4ESS 2 6 unit loss 4 6 differences between System 85 R2V1 V2 V3 and V4 7 6 S E digit collection C 8 sending trunk groups digital access and cross connect system DACS 2 6 5 6 communications protocol DCP data modules digital data ports hyperactivit line side cross connects data 9 facilities synchronization of 5 fixed loss 4 1 loss plan definition 4 1 encodes 4 3 external attenuator 2 5 fixed 4 1 implementing 4 low 4 1 port to port losses 4 5 multiplexed interface DMI administration B 1 alternative to DS1 D4 1 1 digital loss plan 4 2 maintenance 8 1 data transmission 7 115 7 131 digital Contd multiplexed interface DMI Contd restrictions Tlearrie 3 J 0 multiplexed interface with bit oriented signaling DMI BOS digital tie trunks 2 3 line only mode restrictions terminating 4 6 multiplexed interface with message oriented signaling DMI MOS 1 2 2 3 multiplexe signal level 1 DS1 administration B connections 2 7 cross connect field A frame 2 10 location assignment C 10 digits assignment NPA NXX Direct Inward Dial DID 4 6 display 32d distributed communication
4. des pata C JF EL Fe FIELD F inpur re cups Figure 7 15 Procedure 116 Word 1 DS1 Trunk Assignments to Equipment Circuit Location System 85 R2V4 The DS1 channels are assigned to slot and circuit locations according to the order in which the module processor scans the equipment carrier The first circuit scanned is circuit 0 of slot 05 or 18 the second is circuit 0 of slot 06 or 19 the third is circuit 0 of slot 7 or 20 and the fourth is circuit 1 of slot 05 or 18 Continue in this way to channel 12 that will be located at circuit 3 of slot 07 or 20 remaining 12 channels are assigned beginning with circuit 0 of slot O or 13 Continue in this way through channels 23 or 24 depending on whether robbed bit or 24th channel signaling is translated refer to table 7 3 DSI ISDN PRI Administration Channel Versus Trunk Assignments ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 38 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 TABLE 7 3 DSI ISDN PRI Administration Channel Versus Trunk Assignments DS1 Channel Slot Circuit DS1 Channel Slot Circuit 4 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 41 9 11 10 23 1 10 12 11 24 1 11 LEGEND Any slot for the TN767 except slot number one in the universal port carrier 1 The slot next to the TN767 or TN555 NOTE Channel 24 is the D channel NOTE When the
5. see table 3 7 System amp 5 Traditional Module Equalizer Settings Metallic Cable TABLE 3 7 System 85 Traditional Module Equalizer Settings Metallic Cable Distance to Midpoint ANN11 ANN35 or Endpoint FT Switch Settings 22 AWG ABAM amp 24 AWG PDS 26 AWG PDS EJ 3 0 to 133 owo on ON OFF 133 to 266 90 to 180 on OFF ON 266 to 399 180 to 270 ON OFF OFF 399 to 532 270 t0360 OFF on ON 532 to 665 360 to 450 l OFF OFF NOTE The ANN11 and ANN35 circuit packs only have three switches Off 1 is away from the switch number on 0 is toward the switch number Generic 1 and Generic 2 Universal Modules For TN722_ and TN767 circuit packs preequalization is provided by properly administering the line compensation field Compensation adjustments are described in the appropriate Generic 1 and Generic 2 administration manuals Pinouts for the cables connecting these circuit packs are given in System85 R2V4 to DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 1 via ISDN PRI Access 555 037 233 DEFINITY Communications System Generic l l to 4ESS via ISDN PRI Access 555 037 234 and DEFINITY Communications System Generic 2 1 to 4ESS via ISDN PRI Access 555 037 237 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 SYNCHRONIZATION OF DIGITAL FACILITIES 5 29 CONCLUSIONS ON SYNCHRONIZATION Make no assumptions regarding synchronization Reverify items such as the availability of a s
6. CDR Variable Timer EJ Pad Group g Tie Toll Trunk Group E3 lies APLT Features Allowed B enter command C_ f amp 3 pata OOOO E HELP Fe FIELD F7 inpuT Fe cups Figure 7 13 Procedure 101 Word 1 Additional Trunk Group Translations System 85 R2V4 Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4 Field 5 Displays the trunk group number such as previously translated in procedure 100 Selects whether the trunk group uses balanced transmission facilities Field encodes and their descriptions are 0 Not provided the required option for ISDN PRI 1 Provided not applicable for ISDN PRI Translates the battery reversal option Field encodes and their descriptions are 0 Not provided the required option for ISDN PRI 1 Provided not applicable for ISDN PRI Depending on how each type of DID service is provisioned it may or may not be necessary for the switch to infer generate a digit to complete the call Field encodes and their descriptions are e Dash is applicable for all ISDN PRI applications except DID trunk types 30 31 and 120 e Any single digit number 0 through 9 Which number is determined by the trunk group and its application NOTE When using System 85 R2V4 1 1 software digits cannot be inferred for ISDN dynamic trunk types Assigns whether the trunk group is 1 orisnot 0 used for DCS applications ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 Fields 6 7 F
7. Contd digital network nodes 5 6 requirements 5 4 slips 5 3 definition translations C 10 reference selection rules 5 19 referenced nodes 5 18 international calls C interworking 30 C 6 Intra LATA calls screening 2 72 14 intra switch connections ISDN PRI 2 16__ S E ISDN administration channel assignments Generic 2 Advantage 2 19 BR 7 3 call processing dynamic trunk Bannel assignments C 9 feature operation Generic 2 incoming call processing inferred digits NSH 7 25 0 private network configurations System 85 R2V4 4 31 S trunk types 6 4 network identifier network service value C 3 pqi 2200 S O PRIS o forerunner of 1 2 intra switch connections private network connections public network connections signaling 7 15 trunk facilities trunk group C 9 routing parameters Generic 2 C 3 System 85 R2V4 C 3 SID ANI 1 37 7 142 C 13 ISL digital low loss plan 4 1 J jitter 5 3 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 INDEX IN 9 L LAPD 3 7 17 S LATA 2 7 layer 1 3 layer 2 LEC SESS 2 7 carrier facilities DS1 connections to DS1 reference B E NXX 7 J9 o synchronization reference B 12 synchronization source 5 28 LFA alarm 8 8 S line coding AMI 1 16 B8ZS 1 17 2 3 2 7 bipolar 7 16 formats 2 1 16 framing 2 14 o O signaling 2 74 o ZCS 1 17 2 5 2 7 compensation settings 7 114 7 130 equalizer and compensation settings 3 3 only
8. Field 1 Translates the trunk group that identifies the ISDN terminating test line The terminating test line is required for B channel maintenance testing NOTE As part of the installation and ISDN PRI services provisioning the terminating test line number assignment must be coordinated with the terminating switch Fields 2 17 Assigns digits for the terminating test line NOTE If B channel signaling control is used on the D channel of another facility you must use NFAS see procedures 260 word 1 262 word 1 262 word 2 and 262 word 3 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V2 amp RIV3 7 113 SYSTEM 75 R1V2 AND R1V3 System 75 has the same facility considerations framing signaling line coding format etc as System 85 or Generic 2 and many similar equipment considerations both require an additional clock circuit pack for synchronization The main differences are in terms of administration methods screens for System 75 versus procedures for System 85 and for some fields a difference in terminology The primary equipment differences are e No synchronization cables are required e Line compensation is translated in software rather than set by DIP switches All screens shown have their fields depicting default or recommended options Service Facility Options The DSi CIRCUIT PACK screen is used to define characteristics of a DS1 facility
9. NOTE This screen requires that the circuit pack TN722 TN722B have been previously assigned to an equipment location carrier and slot by the CIRCUIT PACK ADMINISTRATION screen Figure 7 56 DSI Circuit Pack Screen depicts this procedure DS1 CIRCUIT PACK Page 1 of 1 Location Name Line Compensation 1 Zero Code Suppresion zcs Framing Mode esf Signaling Mode common chan DMI BOS y MAINTENANCE PARAMETERS Slip Detection n Remote Loop Around Test n Figure 7 56 DS1 Circuit Pack Screen ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 114 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V2 amp RIV3 Location Name Line Compensation Zero Code Suppression Framing Mode A display only field specifying the carrier and slot of a DS1 The name as shown on the network diagram Refers to the distance between the switch and the NCTE CDM CEM DSX 1 cross connect T1 office repeater or other equipment The compensation setting is for the total distance between the switch and the endpoint Table 7 13 Line Compensation Settings shows compensation values for various distances TABLE 7 13 Line Compensation Settings Compensation Value Distance Feet 1 000 to 133 2 133 to 266 3 266 to 399 4 399 to 533 5 533 to 655 NOTE Compensation values assume 22 gauge ABAM or 24 gauge PDS cables Two colocated switches can be up to 1310 feet apart with compensation on both systems set to
10. Night Serv Permits the administration of a particular night service extension for each row in the table This entry will override the night service administered for the whole trunk group on page 1 of the TRUNK GRouP screen Field encodes and their descriptions are e An extension number e The attendant e No entry leave the field blank default This will not override night service for the whole trunk group The TRUNK FEATURES screen Page 2 of 11 may have more than one entry for the same Service Feature Frequently multiple entries per Service Feature are used to provide multiple call routes for that Service Feature The route selected will be dependent on the received digits and specific administration details of the digit manipulation fields If an incoming call matches more than one entry then the most restrictive entry is selected This is why it is not CBC specific The following case examples show this point and should clarify how the incoming call handling software functions in this scenario Case 1 e Service Feature field is specified for example mega800 e Called Len field is specified with a requirement of N digits for example N 5 e Called Number field is specified with M leading digits where M is a number of digits less than N for example the three digits 855 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 558 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 7 151 N
11. TRUNK TYPE AND SIGNALING TYPE COMPATIBILITY TABLES D 7 Table D 3 Signaling Type Compatibility provides the compatibility of standard signaling types The first column is the frame of reference for the direction compatibility Compatibility is either 1 way out 1 way in or bidirectional from this entry TABLE D 3 Signaling Type Compatibility N w m A N N N N w Encode 00 01 02 03 04 07 08 10 15 16 17 18 19 20 wo A 24 25 26 27 28 29 0 31 32 BER ER EE aeons T A a E E L L T T f T T 2 f a STL 7 tit T JE T E 1 og ae eli Ps L dyiye 2 E 1 Ue ele 1 4 4 7 7 4 T T T a 25 lt gt gt gt gt l gt gt gt lt 26 gt FRIET fe oye 7 P tT TT TTT T 3 2 Pt tT tT by ET TT e 5 Horee T T TTT i EE EpRTES TST BIT b 32 gt gt e The direction of compatibility is marked by e Two way compatibility One way compatibility outgoing lt One way compatibility incoming ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 D 8 TRUNK TYPE AND SIGNALING TYPE COMPATIBILITY TABLES Table D 4 Signaling Type Definitions provides definitions for the signaling types used in the other three tables in this appendix TABLE D 4 Signaling Type Definitions Procedure Trunk Traditional Univers
12. unrestricted channel 7 18 digital data 1 9 C 3 user to user IE opcodes C 12 information message associated transfer 2 14 7 23 7 85 Vv variable bit robbed VBR signaling 2 17 _ via net loss VNL 4 1 virtual slot visual maintenance and administration panel VMAAP VNL 4 1 voice data 1 8 voiceband analog data 8 voice grade data definition 8 Generic 1 AVD trunk limitations System 75 AVD trunk limitations System 85 AVD trunk limitations ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 INDEX IN 17 W Wide Area Telecommunications Service WATS 2 8 wiring premises distribution system PDS 2 5 X X 25 1 10 Y yellow alarm 8 5 8 9 Z zero code suppression ZCS and B8ZS differences 7 19 line coding 1 17 2 5 restricted channels 8 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 IN 18 INDEX ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4
13. 31 DMI 108 109 FX 21 25 ISDN 120 M S TIE 70 78 Special 2 5 6 50 58 62 65 67 90 93 TIE 32 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 WATS 26 27 28 NOTE Trunk types preceded with an asterisk may be selected by trunk type 120 on an as needed CBC Service Selection basis For ISDN trunk groups as well as other types of trunk groups the entered type defines feature operation for the trunk group For example if a trunk group is assigned the type of 19 incoming calls over this trunk group are routed to the attendant console On DID trunk type groups the switch expects station number digits on all incoming trunks on tie trunk type groups the switch can handle either station number digits or network numbers For an ISDN trunk group a dynamic trunk type 120 can be assigned to the group This trunk type allows the group to process calls with a different trunk type on a call by call CBC basis For example one incoming call over the group may expect station number digits for example a MEGACOM call while the next call over the group may expect a network number for example an SDN call This trunk type allows flexibility in processing calls as opposed to a fixed static trunk type Both an AAR ARS prefix digit procedure 103 and a DID additional digit procedure 101 can be administered for ISDN dynamic trunk groups This cannot be done for any other type of trunk group The dynamic trunk type may be used for C
14. Chapter 2 hapter Replacement 5 29 to 5 32 Q hapter 6 Replacement 6 1 to 6 8 Instructions Remove all pages from document and discard replace with new Table of Contents supplied Remove all pages from document and discard replace with new About This Document supplied Remove pages 1 3 to 1 6 from document and discard replace with those supplied Make corrections by hand on page 1 9 of document Add the following words to the end of the second paragraph in the D Channels heading Up to 479 B Channels may be controlled by a single D channel Remove pages 1 21 to 1 32 from document and discard replace with pages 1 21 to 1 34 supplied Remove pages 2 1 to 2 2 from document and discard replace with those supplied Remove pages 2 11 to 2 16 from document and discard replace with those supplied Remove all pages from document and discard replace new chapter supplied Remove pages 5 29 to 5 32 from document and discard replace with those supplied Remove pages 6 1 to 6 8 from document and discard replace with those supplied ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADDENDUM DESCRIPTION ADD 3 Chapter Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Type of Change Replacement Replacement Replacement Supplement Replacement all pages all pages all pages Remove all pages from document and discard replace new chapter supplied Retain and place sub chapter tabs approp
15. Generic 1 FIELD SETTING REMARKS Line Assign a number from 1 5 depending on the length of the Compensation cable from the TN767 to the ESF T1 CSU as follows 1 0 to 133 feet 2 133 to 266 feet 3 266 to 399 feet 4 399 to 533 feet or 5 533 to 655 feet Note that if you are using the old 551V CSU the maximum distance to the CSU is 85 feet Framing Mode ESF is recommended with all ISDN PRI applications The System 85 R2V4 on the far end must also be optioned for ESF The other option is D4 framing If D4 framing is used the far end must also be D4 framed ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 TABLE E 3 continued FIELD SETTING TIE TRUNK SETTINGS E 17 DS 1 Circuit Pack Screen Settings Generic 1 REMARKS Zero Code Suppression Signaling Mode Connect Interface Slip Detection Synchronization Plan Screen Settings Unless you have requested unrestricted facilities from the local exchange T1 facility you should assign zcs here If you are guaranteed unrestricted facilities all the way from the Generic to the far end System 85 R2V4 then you should assign b8zs_ here The System 85 R2V4 should be administered for the same option as a Generic 1 ZCS causes an inverted D channel B8ZS results in a non inverted D channel The analogous System 85 R2V4 administration is in procedure 260 word 1 field 15 If isdn pri is entered here the Connect field see below a
16. 101 WORD 1 Incoming Prefix Digit 1 2 3 4 a 6 7 8 9 TRUNK GROUP CHARACTERISTICS Trunk Group Balance Battery Reversal DES Touch Tone In Touch Tone Out CDR Active eo a AIOD Billing Number TIMED RECALL 10 y N 16 Disconnect Supervision Time E Level B CDR Variable Timer Pad Group Tie Toll APLT Features Allowed o Connected to CCO ON LINE MAJOR MINOR RUN TAPE BUSY OUT IN USE enter command 7 Figure Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4 Field 5 Fields 6 7 7 43 Procedure 101 Word 1 ISDN Trunk Group CDR and Digital Loss Plan Generic 2 Displays the trunk group number such as previously translated in procedure 100 Assigns whether the trunk group has 1 or does not have 0 balanced transmission facilities Encode 1 is required for ISDN PRI Assigns whether the trunk group has 1 or does not have 0 the battery reversal option Encode 0 is required for ISDN PRI Assigns the number of prefix digits Field encodes and their descriptions are e Dash is always applicable for ISDN PRI applications except for DID trunks trunk types 30 and 31 e Any single digit number 0 through 9 Which number is determined by the trunk group and its application Assigns whether the trunk group is 1 orisnot 0 used for DCS applications This field is ignored for ISDN applications and either encode 0 or 1 may be translated ADDENDUM 1
17. C 1 c 2 E 3 C 4 Character 5 6 C wi C 8 9 haracter E O oO MO ND oH FWD Poe Character 10 EE Connected to CCO ON LINE QY MAJOR MINOR RUN TAPE BUSY OUT IN USE WAIT enter command Figure 7 47 Procedure 012 Word 2 Name Database Generic 2 Field 1 Identifies one of three 10 character fields Field encodes and their descriptions are 1 Characters 1 through 10 2 Characters 11 through 20 3 Characters 21 through 30 There exists 94 different encodes 00 12 14 15 17 96 which correspond to numbers 0 through 9 lower case letters upper case letters and special characters The Manager II help screen or the document DEFINITY Communications System Generic 2 Administration Procedures 555 104 506 may be used for determining the desired encodes Fields 2 11 Each field should be translated with the encode that corresponds to the desired character Procedure 012 Word 3 Name Database Since the name database has the potential to use a large amount of memory it is generally desirable to run the compact operation whenever all names have been added Figure 7 48 Procedure 012 Word 3 Name Database depicts this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 102 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 012 WORD 3 NAME DATABASE COMPACTION 1 Compact E DISPLAY ONLY 2 Names That Can Yet Be Assigned 3 Words Available 4 Words to
18. December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 Field 8 Fields 9 11 Field 12 Field 13 Fields 14 16 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 7 95 Assigns or not assign the trunk group to CDR record keeping Field encodes and their descriptions are O Trunk group usage not applicable for CDR recording 1 Trunk group usage will be recorded by CDR 2 Trunk group usage will be recorded account code is required Not used for ISDN applications This field is only applicable when CDR is being used and then only to change the default CDR timer value Field encodes represent intervals in 1 second increments The range is 1 through 99 with dash being the default timer value of 6 seconds Administers the optional transmission loss assignments The encode translated depends on the network configuration and service application Field encodes and their corresponding loss plan are listed as follows 0 The Digital FIXED Loss Plan 1 ISL Tie Trunk 2 EIA Tie Trunk NOTE This is the recommended option for Speedial Access Connections to a 4ESS 3 ISL Digital Central Office 4 EIA Digital Central Office Digital Toll Office Analog Toll Office AUTOPLEX NETWORK Interface V 8 AUTOPLEX NETWORK Interface Y a HD WwW Refer to chapter 4 The Digital Loss Plan for a description of the digital loss plan and to table 4 2 Digital Loss Plan Port to Port Losses in this same chapter for a list of port to port loss values These
19. Do not enable any links until all other fields in this screen and all fields in the Processor Channel Assignment have been administered After administering these other fields come back to this screen Enter a y next to the link corresponding to the physical channel number assigned in the PROCESSOR DATA MODULE screen to enable that link For ISDN PRI links the correct entry is always y This is a display only field It should display the extension of the processor interface data module assigned in the PROCESSOR INTERFACE DATA screen This field is used to set either ISDN PRI or BX 25 protocol Here ISDN PRI is used Destination Leave the digits field blank In the bra field enter the board address e g 1C19 of the TN767 corresponding to the link The TN767 must have previously been administered as using ISDN signaling in the Ds 1 CIRCUIT PACK screen This address can only appear once in this screen E DCE Leave this field blank It only applies to links using BX 25 signaling Identification Enter a one to fifteen character name for the link identifying the far end System 85 as the destination machine This field is used only for identification and can be left blank Processor Channel Assignment Screen Settings This screen assigns processor channels to interface links The processor channel should not be confused with the physical channel used in the PROCESSOR DATA MODULE screen 64 processor channels
20. Figures Trunk Group Screen Page 2 Tie an 7 74 Trunk Group Screen Page 3 Tie depict this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 7 137 TRUNK GROUP Page 2 of 9 ACA Assignment n Long Holding Time hours 1 Short Holding Time secs 10 Short Holding Threshold 15 MIS Measured n Internal Alert n Used for DCS n PBX ID 1 Data Restriction n Maintenance Tests y Suppress Outpulsing n Figure 7 73 Trunk Group Screen Page 2 Tie GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS Page 3 of 9 Night Mode Ans Delay k Oooo eNe erer N m w m S m a Figure 7 74 Trunk Group Screen Page 3 Tie ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 138 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 Port This field associates each trunk group member to a particular network 1 or 2 carrier A E slot 01 20 and circuit 01 24 To keep things simple try to match trunk group member and DS1 channel assignments for example trunk group member 1 on channel 1 Name Typically this entry is a 7 digit telephone number However another candidate would be the 10 digit trunk circuit identification number which is available from the circuit provider Night This is a new capability with Generic 1 and System 75 R1V3 It permits an individual trunk memb
21. However BCCOS 4 is the recommended option Procedure 107 Word 1 ISDN Trunk Verification by Terminal Attendant and ATMS This procedure must be translated to support the trunk verification by voice terminal and trunk verification by attendant features over ISDN PRI facilities Figure 7 54 Procedure 107 Word 1 ISDN Trunk Verification by Terminal Attendant and ATMS depicts this procedure ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 107 WORD 1 ATMS TERMINATING TEST LINE ASSIGNMENT 1 Trunk Group E 2 Test Line Type E TTL TELEPHONE DIGITS 3 Digit 1 E 11 Digit 9 4 Digit 2 12 Digit 10 H 5 Digit 3 13 Digit 11 E 6 Digit 4 14 Digit 12 7 Digit 5 15 Digit oA 8 Digit 6 5 16 Digit 14 E 9 Digit 7 17 Digit 15 El 10 Digit 8 18 Digit 16 E DISPLAY ONLY 19 Trunk Type E Connected to CCO ON LINE magor MINOR RUN TAPE BUSY ouT IN USE WAIT enter command GS C Eaa i ete Fe FIELD Fy input I re cups Figure 7 54 Procedure 107 Word 1 ATMS TTL Assignment System 85 R2V4 Field 1 Identifies those ISDN PRI trunk groups to be accessed by the trunk verification features Permitted encodes are previously defined trunk group numbers within the range of 18 through 999 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 7 111 Field 2 Dash is appropriate for voice terminal and attendant console applica
22. Networking Restrictions and ISDN PRI Limitations ISDN PRI has the following limitations 1 ISDN PRI facilities cannot be used to connect a main and a satellite such as a main satellite trunk Therefore it is recommended that AAR be used with ISDN PRI trunks to provide private network facilities Even though main satellite trunks cannot be used over ISDN PRI facilities the main satellite feature may still exist on a switch that uses ISDN For example ISDN PRI facilities may be used to access the public network using the ARS software while non ISDN PRI trunks such as main satellite trunks may be used to connect subtending switches to the main switch Calls may originate and terminate on the satellite or on the tandem through the main and route onto the ISDN public network via ISDN PRI trunks Centralized Attendant Service CAS uses a trunk type that does not use ISDN PRI signaling Therefore CAS is unavailable with ISDN PRI facilities Distributed communications system DCS network configurations are supported over ISDN PRI facilities However a separate DCIU signaling link is required This separate signaling link may be a B channel that is used as a DSC or an analog facility ISDN PRI and DCS are two separate networking services If DCS is used over an ISDN PRI trunk in most cases the DCS display appears instead of the ISDN PRI messages With ISDN PRI the calling party information is sent to the called party and the called p
23. Primarily these other features include tandem tie trunk access trunk to trunk calling and miscellaneous trunk restrictions When applicable these features are administered with procedures 275 word 1 110 111 102 and 010 word 3 Procedure 275 Word 4 ISDN Service Enable Disable Screen based procedure 275 is used to translate the system COS assignments as well as several other miscellaneous services and features Word 4 provides the capability for enabling and disabling the ISDN service Figure 7 25 Procedure 275 Word 4 System COS and Miscellaneous Service Assignments Generic 2 depicts this procedure ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 275 WORD 4 SYSTEM COS MISCELLANEOUS 1 Traditional Code Calling Access Digits E 38 Trunk to Trunk Transfer ATTENDANT RELEASE LOOP OPERATION 4 Status E 5 Timed Recall Timer J 14 ISDN Status E 6 Default Recent Disconnect Inteval MAXIMUM PREEMPTION LEVEL ADMINISTRABLE ALARMS 7 All Incoming E 15 Even Port Peripherals OUTGOING 16 Trunk Software 8 Terminal E Les Auxiliary Software 9 attendant DISPLAY ONLY 18 Local Switch Number AUTOVON Interface Switch ACD Abandon Call Search MLL Status CMS Status enter command Fz pata_ _ FS HELP F FIELD F7_InpuT Fs CMDs Figure 7 25 Procedure 275 Word 4 System COS and Miscellaneous Service Assignments Generic 2 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 54 ADMINISTRATION OP
24. System 85 Administration Settings Table E 1 System 85 R2V4 Administration Settings shows the basic System 85 administration settings needed to implement ISDN PRI tie trunks between the two communications systems The administration procedures are shown in the order they should be set See chapter 7 Administration Options and Requirements for additional information on ISDN PRI administration issues See AT amp T System 85 Release 2 Version 4 Feature Translations Issue 1 July 1987 555 103 107 for further details on each of the procedures listed in table E 1 and how to administer the switch NOTE Table E 1 System 85 R2V4 Administration Settings is not a complete enumeration of the required administration settings It highlights those settings that are particular to the ISDN PRI interface between the two systems NOTE Sometimes the analogous administration fields and screens in Generic 1 are stated for a given procedure word and field These analogies are usually not one for one For example a given procedure word and field may correspond to only parts of one or more Generic 1 screens and fields TABLE E 1 System 85 R2V4 Administration Settings PROCEDURE WORD FIELD REMARKS 275 4 14 A 1 must be set in this field to enable the ISDN feature The analogous Generic administration is in the ISDN PRI field of the SYSTEM PARAMETERS CUSTOMER OPTIONS screen ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 I
25. This method allows the customer to specify a single usage allocation plan to be used for all time Field encodes and their descriptions are y Enable this method The plan that is administered in the Allocation Plan Number field will be enabled n Disable this method Consequently the scheduled method must be enabled for this CBC application Specifies the plan number 1 2 or 3 that is to be enabled when fixed usage is selected This method allows the customer to specify that scheduled usage allocation is desired Field encodes and their descriptions are y Enable this method NOTE The time of day account time or plan number day of week entries must have been administered before this field is enabled The customer can override or suspend the specified usage allocation schedule by changing or enabling the fixed method n Disable this option ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 7 157 Act Time Specifies the time that the associated usage allocation plan will become effective Time must be specified in 24 hr format Permitted entries are 00 00 through 23 59 NOTE Each day of the week must have at least one entry but may have as many as six transition times A transition time is defined as the time when another plan becomes effective A new or different plan will not effect existing calls but will effect new call attempts Plan Spe
26. You can set any number from to 99 If you are assigning this number for use in atest set itto 1 8 Assign a 1 in this field if you do not want optional IEs sent or toa 0 if you do want these sent Either all will be sent or none will be sent depending on the setting These optional TEs are e Connected number e User user e Calling party number e Display e Logical link identification Traveling class mark Link layer parameters e Packet layer parameters Look Ahead Interflow The calling party number option will populate the ISDN PRI setup message with the information necessary to deliver SID to the called party User to user information is not yet available When available it will allow discretionary information to be passed from the calling party to the called party in various ISDN PRI messages The analogous Generic administration for the calling connected party number is the Send SID field of the TRUNK GROUP screen The analogous Display IE administration is inthe Send Name field of the TRUNK GROUP screen ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 TIE TRUNK SETTINGS E 7 TABLE E 1 continued System 85 R2V4 Administration Settings PROCEDURE 101 WORD FIELD 17 REMARKS Assign AVD to all trunk groups that will be used for digital data calls to and from Generic 1 Do not assign AVD if the trunk group is to be used for voice grade data using the modem pool feature You
27. encodes Fields 2 11 Each field should be translated with the encode that corresponds to the desired character Procedure 012 Word 3 Name Database Since the name database has the potential to use a large amount of memory it is generally desirable to run the compact operation whenever all names have been added Figure 7 18 Procedure 012 Word 3 Name Database System 85 R2V4 depicts this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 7 43 ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 012 WORD 3 NAME DATABASE COMPACTION 1 Compact g DISPLAY ONLY 2 Names That Can Yet Be Assigned BN Words Available 4 Words to Be Gained by Compacting Connected to CCO ON LINE MAJOR MINOR RUN TAPE BUSY OUT IN USE enter command e iW Jes bata JD _ _ Ssd FS ere Fe FIELD F7 inpur Fs comps Figure 7 18 Procedure 012 Word 3 Name Database System 85 R2V4 Field 1 Assigns whether 1 or not to compact the name database Fields 2 4 Are display only and serve to show status of the database Procedure 309 Word 1 ARS Assignments and IXC ISDN Network Identifier This procedure is used for translating controlling the Automatic Route Selection feature Figure 7 19 Procedure 309 Word 1 ARS System 85 R2V4 depicts this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 44 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 ENHANC
28. for example a SESS or 4ESS is defined as the network side 1 For private network DMI MOS and ISDN PRI connections additional care must be exercised in defining user and network sides Specifically only one end must be administered user side 0 while the alternate must be defined as the network side 1 If the private network node is a tandem switch then that node may function as both user side and network side depending on the particular facility NOTE For System 85 R2V4 DMI MOS to host computers equipped with MOS the computer should always be assigned as the network side Field 6 V4 Only Administers the facility test code For most installations it is desirable to enable or establish permission thus allowing selected maintenance software to test the DMI MOS ISDN PRI transmission facility on a demand basis Procedure 648 contains several tests that may be done on a demand basis by executing procedure 648 when facility test code 1 2 or 3 is administered The DMI MOS ISDN PRI communication protocol consists of three layers or levels Level 1 is the physical layer Level 2 is the data link layer Level 3 is the network layer also called the link access procedure on the D channel LAPD Field encodes and their descriptions are 0 Disables or prohibits maintenance testing from being done on the specified module cabinet carrier and slot transmission facility 1 Selects level 2 testing via procedure 648 N
29. identifier enables the switch to provide equal access capability by populating either the NSF IE or the Transit Network Selection IE If sending an NSF IE and a particular IXC vendor number is specified in this field that entry is included in the NSF IE If no IXC vendor number is specified an is created automatically in the Transit Network Selection IE Permitted field entries may be any number within the range of 0 through 999 When the trunk group is routed over private network ISDN PRI transmission facilities then no IXC ISDN network is used and the 0 option must be translated Each network provider of ISDN service will have a different IXC identifier number When connecting to AT amp T ISDN network facilities the required number is 288 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 48 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 Procedure 321 Word 5 AAR and ISDN Trunk Network Characteristics This procedure is used to translate ISDN trunk groups in the AAR plan Figure 7 22 Procedure 321 Word 5 AAR and Transit Network Identifiers System 85 R2V4 depicts this procedure ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 321 WORD 5 AAR ISDN AND BEARER CAPABILITY Pattern Number Preference Number ISDN Dynamic Trunk Type PUNE Network Service Value BEARER CAPABILITY 5 Voice or Voice Grade 6x Mode 1 Data Ts Mode 2 Data 8 Mode 3 Data 9 Mode 0 Data Connected to CCO ON LINE MAJOR MI
30. l way in dial repeating Procedure Encode 32 Feature TIE Signaling Direction Types Procedure Encode E amp M IS in IS out l way out auto 33 TIE E amp M IS in auto out analog line loop l way out dial repeating l way in auto 34 35 TIE TIE E amp M IS in IS out GS E amp M auto in IS out GS 2 way dial repeating both ways 2 way dial repeating in auto out 2 way auto in dial repeating out 2 way auto both ways l way in dial repeating DD 2 way wink in DD or wink out 36 37 38 39 40 41 TIE TIE TIE TIE ETN ETN E amp M IS in IS out E amp M IS in auto out analog line loop 2 way E amp M auto in IS out GS 2 way E amp M auto in auto out GS E amp M DD in IS out E amp M WS in WDDFOT out E amp M WS in wink DD out DMI ISDN MOS E amp M WS in WS out E amp M DD in DD out 2 way l way in 4 31 27 4 1 28 1 4 31 27 28 1 32 26 l way in wink 42 ETN E amp M WS in WDDFOT out E amp M WS in Wink DD out DMI ISDN MOS E amp M WS in WS out E amp M DD in DD out l way out DD or wink 2 way dial repeating DD in 2 way dial repeating in auto out DD in 2 way DD or wink out dial repeating DD in 2 way DD in DD out or wink out internal ANN interface external ANN interface 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 ETN ETN ETN ETN ETN N A N A E amp M WS
31. specified in the Called Len field No entry leave the field blank When no digits are to be deleted The word all This option may be used to route particular types of calls to a specific extension number This specific extension number would be administered in the Insert field ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 150 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 Insert The digits inserted before the Called Party Number IE This specifies the digits prepended to the front of the remaining digits after any optional digit deletion has been performed The resultant number formed from digit deletion insertion is used to route the call providing that night service is not in effect Field encodes and their descriptions are e A series of numbers which may consists of from to 16 digits e No entry leave the field blank This will suffice for the case where no digits are to be inserted Per Call Specifies if and how to request SID or ANI for this particular type of Service Feature SID ANI Field encodes and their descriptions are e No entry leave the field blank default Specifies that the switch will not request either SID or ANI for any of these types of calls after call delivery Use no entry when the network is provisioned to always send SID ANI with call setup ANI only ANI pref but will accept SID e SID only e SID pref but will accept ANI e None same as blank
32. 00110 inwats 1 00100 sdn 1 00001 wats max bnd 1 00101 accunet 1 00110 lds 1 00111 1800 1 01000 multiquest 1 10000 Additional Services Features Facility Facility Name Type Coding Name Type Coding Figure 7 58 Network Facilities Screen Name Up to 15 alphanumeric characters that uniquely identify by name the Service or Feature Facility The ISDN PRI specification requires that each network capability be identified as Type either a feature 0 or service 1 Facility The ISDN PRI specification further requires that each service or feature be identified as Coding a e Parameterized Service e Parameterized Feature Binary Service Binary Feature Since two new user defined facility names and codes have been added to System 75 R1V5 a conflict might occur when a R1V4 user translation with user defined services or features is upgraded to R1V5 translation Table 7 14 RIV4 to RIV5 Translation Upgrade Strategy describes a strategy to resolve this conflict ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V2 amp R1V3 7 119 TABLE 7 14 R1V4 to R1V5 Translation Upgrade Strategy R1V4 User Defined Translation Upgrade Facility Facility Strategy Note Code 1 E 0o00 Remove from user defined eoe 2 nor 01000 Remove from user defined table 3 not i800 or multiquest 01000 f Preserve in use
33. 1 automatically determines the BC of its endpoints without administration The BCC value appears as read only however on the STATION and DATA MODULE screens Use this field to assign which terminals can cannot use ISDN facilities For example you may want to assure the caller a company executive for instance that a call is going over ISDN facilities You have the option here to have calls from a particular extension routed only over ISDN facilities only over non ISDN facilities or over either depending on the availability of ISDN facilities when the call is made An analogous Generic 1 administration does not exist although an all ISDN route can be set up using AAR ARS partitioning Assign trunk type 41 if TCMs are passed The analogous Generic administration is in the Service Type field of the TRUNK GROUP screen ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 E 6 TIE TRUNK SETTINGS TABLE E 1 continued System 85 R2V4 Administration Settings PROCEDURE WORD FIELD REMARKS 100 3 2 Use ISDN signaling type which is type 20 The analogous Generic 1 administration is in the Group Type field of the TRUNK GROUP screen 3 Glare control is automatically handled with ISDN trunks and does not have to be administered 4 Assign a 1 here if you have assigned trunk types 41 42 43 46 or 47 7 This field is used to set the number of errors allowed over two 5 minute intervals before automatic busyout
34. 140 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 PROCESSOR CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Page 1 of 4 Interface Remote Link Chan Priority Proc Chan Machine ID Figure 7 76 Processor Channel Assignment Screen Proc Chan This is a display only field You can select any of the following processor channels 5 7 9 11 58 60 64 conditional that the identified channel is not already used Appl This field should be administered isdn for ISDN PRI applications Interface Permitted encodes are 1 through 8 The number selected should match the number Link previously administered on the PROCESSOR INTERFACE DATA MODULE screen Interface Not used in Generic 1 Chan Priority Servicing the D Channel is a high priority issue Therefore h for high should be administered for all ISDN PRI applications For ISDN PRI applications the other fields should remain blank Interface Links ISDN PRI Applications This screen identifies the interface link and enables the link Figure 7 77 Interface Links Screen depicts this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 7 141 Link DIY DOkwWHHE Link Enable Est Conn PI Ext Prot Destination Digits Destination Brd DTE DCE Identification INTERFACE LINKS Page 1 of 1 Enable Est
35. 2 Field 3 Specifies the AAR pattern number Permitted encodes are numbers within the range of 1 through 640 Specifies the AAR preference number Permitted encodes are sequential numbers within the range of 1 through 16 Translates ISDN trunk type 120 only Recall that for ISDN applications the trunk type may be translated as fixed for example one specific type or dynamic which may include those from the fixed category Generally the trunk type selected will depend on the network service feature value which is translated in field 4 Translates the ISDN trunk type The network SERVICE application and any associated application requirements will determine the appropriate trunk type Furthermore trunk type selection should be coordinated with previous assignments from procedure 100 word 1 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 110 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 Field 4 Specifies the network service requested Refer to table 7 12 Network Services Network Features for the appropriate encode NOTE When translating MEGACOM SDN and ACCUNET switched digital service calls you must first assign a network specific facility NSF index in field 1 of procedure 279 word 1 and then assign this same index in this field to all patterns used for these types of calls Field 5 Assigns a BCCOS to the preference Permitted numbers include any previously defined BCCOS from procedure 014 word 1
36. 2 Cabinet B 13 SC Reference 3 Carrier H 4 Slot E 14 Application Ea 15 Bit Inversion SIGNALING 16 Link Type s 6 Framing E 17 SA FX 7 pes ces 8 24c RBS FF DISPLAY ONLY 9 ZCS B8ZS Al 18 SC Information EJ 10 Slip Enable H 11 External Loop enter command Figure 7 4 Procedure 260 Word 1 System Configuration Circuit Pack Assignments System 85 R2V4 Fields 1 4 V1 V4 Assigns the circuit pack to an equipment location These assignments include the module number 0 through 30 cabinet number 0 through 7 DSI MFAT carrier number 0 through 3 and slot number 5 or 18 for line plus trunk operation or slot numbers 0 5 13 or 18 for line only operation System 85 R2V4 permits only trunk mode operation that is only slot numbers 5 or 18 can be assigned ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 8 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 Field 5 Field 6 Field 7 V1 V2 For DS1 0 is the only choice V3 V4 This field is reserved for further use and contains a dash V1 V4 Used for assigning the framing format The choices are D4 and ESF previously called F e The choice of framing format is totally dependent on the equipment connected to the interface such as D4 channel bank channel division multiplexer or CDM channel expansion multiplexer or CEM host computer and other switches Normally the format is not de
37. 2 is administered similarly to System 75 System 75XE and Generic 1 Because Generic 2 administration is significantly different from previous System 85 releases and versions this administration section contains a separate heading that includes descriptions on how to administer DS1 DMI ISDN PRI services for Generic 2 For System 85 administering DS1 DMI BOS DMI MOS simply consists of translating procedures 250 260 and 116 Being familiar with administering these procedures is a good starting point for understanding the options and requirements of ISDN PRI Administrating ISDN PRI uses procedures 250 260 116 plus several additional procedures Some applications such as off premises station or OPS may also require that other additional procedures be administered 7 1 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 2 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS Generic 1 may be administered from a Manager I terminal or by the Initialization and Administration System INADS Generally the administration procedures consist of executing the proper administration and maintenance commands from the command line feature set and translating in the required order the following screen based forms e DS1 circuit pack e Sync plan e DMI BOS when required Trunk group as required Trunk member assignments as required ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIRMENTS SYSTEM 85 7
38. 24th channel of the compressed facility leaving 46 compressed channels available for voice DMI 46 is usually selected only when the facilities to the switch use RBS signaling The method for selecting the channels that are to be compressed and the channels that are to pass through uncompressed depends on the type of signaling used Both methods are described as follows If VBR signaling is used the assignment of compressed and uncompressed channels on one of the two input DS1 DMI BOS facilities is done using 12 front panel switches The assignment of the other input DS1 DMI BOS facility is done by default by the CEM If bundling is used four templates are used to assign status to each of the four 12 compressed channel bundles There are 6 front panel switches per bundle These switches select 1 of 64 possible templates per bundle The templates define the status compressed or uncompressed of each channel the signaling format that is being used and the channels that have signaling disabled Regarding alarms the CEM provides six relay contact closures They are used to indicate major alarm conditions The contacts should be wired individually to the external alarm interface of the switch or at the minimum should be connected in parallel to one external alarm input of the switch ISDN PRI PRIVATE NETWORK CONNECTIONS Private network connections only include connections to other customer premises switches System 85 R2 to a System 85 R2V4 G
39. 280 Word 1 heading of chapter 7 Administration Options and Requirements NOTE For Generic 2 AVD trunk characteristics no longer govern modem pool insertion For Generic 1 AVD is used for non ISDN trunks Generally DCS networks may overlay on an electronic tandem network ETN or main satellite network For DCS call routing ETNs use AAR to complete DCS calls while main satellite networks use multidigit steering software to complete DCS calls Therefore if DCS trunks are provided over ISDN PRI facilities then the switch must be configured with AAR See of this list for more information When Generic 2 connects to a System 85 R2V4 using ISDN PRI facilities to provide DCS service then the originating extension will not receive display updates as the call progresses for example to call coverage or is forwarded The DCS leave word calling feature is only applicable for 4 or 5 digit extension numbers it will not function with 7 or 10 digit public or private network numbers ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 1 34 INTRODUCTION Full DCS feature transparency is provided between two or more Generic 2s interconnected with ISDN PRI facilities The supported voice terminal features include e Abbreviated dialing e Alphanumeric display DCS e Automatic callback e Call coverage e Call forwarding all calls e Call waiting terminating e Call waiting conference e Priority calls e Distinctive ring
40. 75 NSF administration summar 1 29 C 6 outgoing calls null modem cable B 17 numbering plan area NPA 7 19 7 76 si O octet all Os 7 18 office code 7 19 O office interface unit OIU 2 2 5 offline module 5 8 off premises cabling 3 9 SSS E station OPS applications 7 7 i channel assignments channel selection DS1 termination DS1 DMI channel administration 6 12 equipment locations 7 14 facility selection line applications line assignments line option line only mode 6 6 Cs line trunk mode 6 10 matching assignments B 3 ports 4 7 6 6J6 7 ___ special access channel unit 6 12 time slots 6 6 to another system 2 5 OIU 2 2 5 5 28 online module 5 8 on premises cabling 3 6 Open Systems Interconnection OSDII 3 O operating mode Generic 1 DSI DMI BOS 6 4 System 85 DMI MOS 6 13 System 85 DS1 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 IN 12 INDEX operating mode Contd System 85 DS1 Contd line trunk OPS ports 4 7 to another system 2 5 osa o o oS E other service facility options DMI MOS ISDN PRI only other vendor digital switch to another system connecting 2 4 P packet switching 2 10 pad group 4 2 parameterized service format 7 104 PCM 1 8 5 1 PCM data 1 8 PCIPBX Connection 22 24 PDS wiring 2 5 per channel drop and insert capability 6 2_ _ _ port family 6 10 grouping rules line trunk 6 10 tran
41. ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 7 133 Network Synchronization Options DS1 and ISDN PRI Applications The SYNCHRONIZATION PLAN screen is used to specify which of the two DS1 Tl spans previously administered with slip detection y is the primary reference source and which is the secondary reference source Figures 7 70 Synchronization Plan Screen Stratum 3 and 7 71 Synchronization Plan Screen Stratum 4 depict this procedure SYNCHRONIZATION PLAN Page 1 of 1 SYNCHRONIZATION SOURCE DS1 circuit pack location Stratum 3 Port Network 1 Figure 7 70 Synchronization Plan Screen Stratum 3 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 134 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 Stratum Port Network Primary SYNCHRONIZATION PLAN Page 1 of 2 SYNCHRONIZATION SOURCE DS1 circuit pack location Stratum 4 Primary Secondary DS1 CIRCUIT PACKS Location Name Location Name Figure 7 71 Synchronization Plan Screen Stratum 4 The stratum level used for synchronization Options are 3 Stratum 3 clock If this option is used the remainder of the screen disappears and the Port Network field appears NOTE A TN780 circuit pack must be used when selecting the stratum 3 clock option 4 Stratum 4 clock
42. At the end of the one hour interval the slip count is analyzed If the primary slip count is less than 2 then a switch back to the primary is made If the primary has a slip count of 44 or less and if the secondary and 50 of those DS1s that are enabled ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 12 Field 11 Field 12 Field 13 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIRMENTS SYSTEM 85 for slip enable have reached their maximum slip count of 88 then a switch back to the primary is made V1 V4 Offers the options external loop not available 0 or external loop available 1 The external loop available option should only be selected when demand diagnostic maintenance is done and then only after a DS1 has been busied out If DS1 is a primary or secondary reference the reference should be switched off line This option is used with procedure 620 test 2 to extend the range of the test to include the network channel terminating equipment NCTE and the connecting facility The external loop available option should only be used for the duration of the test V1 V4 Specifies whether 1 ornot 0 the associated T1 span is used as an incoming synchronization source to the switch The network synchronization diagram should show those transmission facilities that are used for synchronization Each switch permits a maximum of two interfaces one primary and one secondary to be translated 1 in field 12 However there is no r
43. Be Gained by Compacting Connected to CCO ON LINE MAJOR MINOR RUN TAPE BUSY OUT IN USE enter command Figure 7 48 Procedure 012 Word 3 Name Database Generic 2 Field 1 Assigns whether the name database is 1 orisnot 0 to be compacted Fields 2 4 Are display only and serve to show status of the database Procedure 279 Word 1 Network Facilities Coding Each interexchange carrier which provides public network ISDN service must have a unique identifier number Furthermore each carrier may provide multiple ISDN services and ISDN features that must be individually identified via a Network Specific Facility NSF coding value A NSF is an ISDN IE sent in the setup message that is used to identify the network or feature associated with the call When connected to a 4ESS a Generic 2 must send the appropriate NSF for MEGACOM SDN and ACCUNET switched digital service calls MEGACOM 800 service calls do not require an NSF since it is an incoming only service and the Generic 2 cannot tandem it to another switch as a MEGACOM 800 call NOTE All NSFs must be defined in field 1 of this procedure prior to use in field 5 of procedure 309 word 5 and field 4 of procedure 321 word 5 should all have the same value Figure 7 49 Procedure 279 Word 1 Network Facilities Coding depicts this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 7 1
44. Copy or Share DISPLAY ONLY Te Characters In Name 8 Shared Primary Extensions or Trunk Groups 9 Associated Extension Name Assigned Connected to CCO ON LINE Q MAJOR RUN TAPE BUSY OUT enter command o Figure 7 46 Procedure 012 Word 1 Name Database Generic 2 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 100 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 Field 1 Assigns either an extension number vector directory number or trunk group Field encodes and their descriptions are e 000 through 99999 for extension and directory numbers Whether the number is three four or five digits depends on the numbering plan e 18 through 999 for trunk group numbers Field 2 Specifies whether the encode for field 1 is a trunk group or extension vector directory number Field encodes and their descriptions are 0 Trunk groups 1 Extension numbers and vector directory numbers Field 3 This field is only applicable for the identified extension s display module It controls the number of blank spaces that are inserted before the first displayed character of the name dialed number or trunk group name Permitted encodes are numbers from 1 to 30 Field 4 The main function of this field is to provide some administration control over what is displayed on the voice terminals digital display Field encodes and their descriptions are Dash all incoming only trunk groups O The user extension d
45. End Test No TRUNK PARAMETERS Send Display TCM in codeset 6 7 6 Max Message Size to Send 260 Connected to Toll n STT Loss normal DIT to DCO Loss normal Bit Rate 1200 Synchronization Duplex full Figure 7 79 Trunk Group Screen Page 1 ISDN PRI Only the new ISDN PRI service application fields or those fields that require special or additional considerations are mentioned here Group Type For ISDN PRI service applications this field should be translated isdn pri NOTE The sYSTEM PARAMETERS CUSTOMER OPTION screen must have ISDN PRI service enabled before this trunk group type can be translated Dial Access Normally this field is defined as y However for some public network connections such as service type CBC MEGACOM etc this field is defined as n ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 Night Service Service Type Usage Allot Far End Test No Send Display TCM in Codeset 6 7 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 7 145 If administered then the extension number translated will receive all incoming calls for the particular trunk group when the switch is placed in night service mode NOTE Page 2 of the TRUNK GROUP screen permits an override entry for each particular type of ISDN network service Also trunk member night service is allowed Assigns the service application for the ISDN PRI trunk group Since CBC permits reduced costs depending o
46. Figure 5 17 Excessive Cascading 5 25 Figure 5 18 Minimized Cascading 5 25 Figure 5 19 Excessive Synchronization from One Node 5 26 Figure 5 20 Minimized Synchronization from One Node 5 27 Figure 6 1 Physical and Virtual Carrier Slot Relationships Line Only Mode Figure 6 2 Physical and Virtual Carrier Slot Relationships Line Trunk Mode 6 9 Figure 7 1 Procedure 275 Word 4 System COS and Miscellaneous Service Assignments System 85 R2V4 Figure 7 2 Procedure 276 Word 1 Feature Group COS System 85 R2V4 Figure 7 3 Procedure 250 Word 1 System Configuration Carriers System 85 R2V4 Figure 7 4 Procedure 260 Word 1 System Configuration Circuit Pack Assignments System 85 R2V4 Figure 7 5 Procedure 262 Word 1 ISDN Board Parameters 7 16 Figure 7 6 Procedure 354 Word 3 NPA NXX Assignment System 85 R2V4 7 19 Figure 7 7 Procedure 000 Word 4 NPA NXX Partition Assignment System 85 R2V4 7 20 Figure 7 8 Procedure 210 Word 2 Attendant Partition Assignments System 85 R2V4 7 21 Figure 7 9 Procedure 010 Word 4 Terminal COS Restrictions System 85 R2V4 7 22 Figure 7 10 Procedure 100 Word 1 Trunk Group Translations System 85 R2V4 7 24 Figure 7 11 Procedure 100 Word 2 Trunk Group Data Characteristics System 85 R2V4 7 27 Figure 7 12 Procedure 100 Word 3 Trunk Group Trunk Type Signaling Type Translations System 85 R2V4 Figure 7 13 Procedure 101 Word 1 Additional Trunk Group Translations Syste
47. ISDN 120 Note 3 M S TIE 70 78 Special 2 5 6 50 58 62 65 67 90 93 TIE 32 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 WATS 26 27 28 NOTES 1 Trunk types preceded with an asterisk may be selected by trunk type 120 on an as needed Call By Call CBC Service Selection basis 2 Trunk types not included in these categories may not be translated for ISDN PRI service Most conventional trunk types specify as a part of their name an in out signaling sequence Actually these signaling sequences are disabled and type 20 signaling is used exclusively over ISDN facilities 3 Beginning with the 1 0 software load of Generic 2 and the 1 2 software load of System 85 R2V4 digits may be inferred where using the ISDN dynamic trunk type The default of 30 infers DID if necessary A default of 46 infers AAR ARS See Appendix C Administrative Procedure Summary for a complete explanation of this field Used as a display only field This field displays the trunk type that was administered in procedure 100 word 1 Procedure 101 Word 1 ISDN Trunk Group CDR and Digital Loss Plan Procedure 101 word 1 is used primarily to turn on CDR as well as translate the digital loss plan Procedure 101 Word 1 ISDN Trunk Group CDR and Digital Loss Plan depicts this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 94 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE
48. Module 2 Cabinet 3 Carrier 4 Slot J PRI PARAMETERS 5 Interface Type E 5 Facility Test Code 7 Terminal Endpoint Identifier E J PRI LAYER 2 PARAMETERS 8 Timer T203 F 9 Timer T200 10 Counter N200 E i Counter Ki E Connected to CCO ON LINE Y MAJOR MINOR RUN TAPE BUSY OUT IN USE WAIT enter command Ces bata JL CdS HELP Fe FIELD F7 INPUT Fe cups Figure 7 5 Procedure 262 Word 1 ISDN Board Parameters Fields 1 4 V4 Only Assigns the circuit pack to an equipment location These include the module number 0 through 30 cabinet number 0 through 7 DS1 MFAT carrier number 0 through 3 and slot number 5 or 18 NOTE Entries for these four fields are the default values from translating a 5 in field 14 of procedure 260 These entries should always be correct ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 7 17 Field 5 V4 Only Assigns the interface type or side The default option is 0 for user side Alternately a 1 should be administered for network side The configuration of the network should be analyzed to determine if the 0 option is appropriate For MOS type facilities such as DMI MOS and ISDN PRI each link must be segmented into user and network sides Each System 85 R2V4 MOS based transmission facility connecting to the public network will always be the user side 0 while the network switch
49. PI Destination DIE Conn Ext Prot Digits Brd DCE Identification y Y ISDN 7 2 n o cos ras n Zs 2 o n S i J n oe _ f H a T a n Figure 7 77 Interface Links Screen This is a display only field The interface link identified and enabled should be the same number as previously translated in the Physical Channel field of the DATA MODULE screen Enter y to enable the link Enter y for all ISDN PRI applications This is a display only field It should display the phantom Data Extension that was previously administered with the DATA MODULE screen Enter ISDN for all ISDN PRI applications Field disappears when PROT ISDN Enter the ISDN PRI 4 character circuit pack address The first digit 1 or 2 identifies the port the second character A E identifies the carrier the third and fourth digits 01 20 or 01 18 identify the circuit pack slot number Field disappears when PROT ISDN Optional but typically should include the identifying name of the destination switch Trunking Considerations ISDN PRI Applications It is necessary to determine those types of ISDN PRI network services desired before attempting to build the ISDN PRI trunk groups Some of the more significant considerations should include the following ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 142 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 NOTE An ISDN PRI trunk group is create
50. SETTINGS Trunk Group Screen Settings This screen is used to administer the ISDN PRI trunk group Following is an example of typical settings for this screen when a Generic 1 is connected to a System 85 R2V4 via ISDN PRI trunks TRUNK GROUP Group Number 92 Group Type isdn pri SMDR Reports y Group Name ISDN Daley COR 32 TAC 192 Direction two way Outgoing Display n Dial Access n Busy Threshold 60 Night Service Queue Length 0 Service Type tandem Far End Test No 5767999 TRUNK PARAMETERS Send Display TCM in codeset 6 7 7 Max message size to send 128 Connected to Toll n STT LOSS low DIT to DCO Loss low Bit Rate 1200 Synchronization async Duplex full Figure E 9 TRUNK GROUP Screen Page 1 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 TIE TRUNK SETTINGS E 23 TRUNK FEATURES ACA Assignment y Long Holding Time hours 1 Short Holding Time sec 3 Short Holding Threshold 10 MIS Measured n Used for DCS y PBX ID 3 Data Restriction n Maintenance Tests y Send SID y Send Name y Service Called Called Del Insert Per Call Night Feature Len Number SID ANI Serv tandem 7 8 67998 Figure E 10 TRUNK GROUP Screen Page 2 GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS 13 14 15 913 imt013 914 imt014 915 imt015 Port Name Night 1 1C1901 imt001 2 1 1902 imt002 3 1C1903 imt003 4 1 1904 imt004 5 1 1905 imt005 6 1C1906 imt006 7 1C1907 imt007 8 1C1908 imt008 9 1C190
51. Screen Figure E 13 SID PREFIX TABLE Screen ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 B 11 B 12 B 13 CONTENTS xix LIST OF TABLES TABLE 1 1 24th Channel Signaling Arrangement 1 15 4 3 TABLE 4 1 Digital Loss Plan Encodes TABLE 4 2 Digital Loss Plan Port to Port Losses 4 5 TABLE 6 1 Supported Digital Facilities 6 TABLE 7 1 DS1 Administration Channel Versus Line Assignments 7 14 TABLE 7 2 Trunks Supporting Signaling Type 20 7 25 TABLE 7 3 DS1 ISDN PRI Administration Channel Versus Trunk Assignments 7 38 TABLE 5 1 SCS References Switches 5 10 2 TABLE 7 6 Equipment Parameters and Permitted Translation Encodes 7 58 TABLE 7 11 DSI ISDN PRI Administration Channel Versus Trunk Assignments 7 98 TABLE 7 4 Network Service Feature Options 7 46 TABLE 7 5 Administration Summary 7 49 TABLE 8 1 Minor Major Alarm to Errored Seconds Conversions 8 10 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 XX CONTENTS TABLE B 1 50 Pin 25 Pair Connector Configurations B 14 TABLE B 2 System 75 Versus System 85 Cable Comparisons B 15 TABLE B 3 15 Pin Connector Arrangement System 75 85 Perspective B 16 TABLE B 4 8 Position Modular Jack Pin Assignments System 75 and System 85 Perspective B 17 TABLE C 1 Internal Definition Translations C 10 TABLE C 2 System 85 R2V4 to Generic 2 IE Opcode Translations C 12 TABLE C 3 User to User IE Opcodes C 12 TABLE C 4 Codeset Map Number to I
52. Screen Page 1 SDN A 5 Figure A 6 Synchronization Plan Screen A 5 Figure B 1 Incorrect Translations Procedure 260 B 2 Figure B 2 Correct Translations Procedure 260 B 3 Figure B 3 Incorrect Assignment of Trunks B 4 Figure B 4 Correct Assignment of Trunks B 4 Figure B 5 System 75 or System 85 with CDMs B 5 Figure B 6 Translation Effects on the CEM B 6 Figure B 7 Arrangement for a Complex CEM Installation B 7 Figure B 8 System 75 System 85 to a D4 Channel Bank B 8 Figure B 9 Internal Timing No Synchronization B 9 Figure B 10 Leavenworth Loop on the Primary Reference B 10 Figure B 11 Leavenworth Loop on the Secondary Reference B 10 Figure B 12 No Synchronization Reference Assigned at Location A B 11 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 xviii CONTENTS Figure B 13 No Primary or Secondary Sync Reference Assigned at Location A Figure B 14 Compatible Synchronization References Figure B 15 Synchronization from DACS Node Figure E 1 OPTIONAL FEATURES Screen Figure E 2 FEATURE RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS Screen Figure E 3 MAINTENANCE RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS Screen Figure E 4 DIAL PLAN RECORD Screen Figure E 5 DS1 CIRCUIT PACK Screen Figure E 6 DATA MODULE Screen Figure E 7 INTERFACE LINKS Screen Figure E 8 PROCESSOR CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Screen Figure E 9 TRUNK GROUP Screen Page 1 Figure E 10 TRUNK GROUP Screen Page 2 Figure E 11 TRUNK GROUP Screen Page 3 Figure E 12 ROUTING PATTERN
53. Service Unit User s Manual 999 100 189 AT amp T DEFINITY 75 85 Communications System Generic I Maintenance 555 204 105 AT amp T DEFINITY 75 85 Communications System Generic 1 and System 75 and 555 200 201 System 75 XE Feature Description AT amp T DEFINITY 75 85 Communications System Generic 2 Administration 555 104 506 Procedures AT amp T DEFINITY 75 85 Communications System Generic 2 Maintenance Procedures 555 104 117 AT amp T DEFINITY 75 85 Communications System Generic 2 Maintenance Repair 555 104 118 Strategies Network and Data Services Reference 555 025 201 AT amp T System 85 Release 2 Version 4 Administration Procedures 555 103 506 ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT XXV BCM32000 Description Installation and Maintenance Digital Transmission Systems Channel Division Multiplexer Installation and Maintenance Manual Channel Expansion Multiplexer Installation and Maintenance Manual D4 Channel Bank Channel Units Application Engineering DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 1 to 4ESS Via ISDN PRI Access DEFINITY Communication System Generic 2 1 to Generic 1 1 with DCS DEFINITY Communications System Generic 2 1 to 4ESS Via ISDN PRI Access Digital Multiplexed Interface DMI Technical Specification Issue 3 2 ESF TI Channel Service Unit User Manual Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Primary Rate Interface for AT amp T Communications Technical Publication 41459 ISDN BRI Reference Manual Perfo
54. Since both analog and digital tie trunks are involved in the end to end link the end to end transmission facilities called a combination tie trunk GENERIC 1 DS1 DMI BOS The operating mode and supported port types for Generic 1 DS1 DMI BOS are described next Operating Mode There are no special slot or option strap considerations for Generic 1 DS1 DMI as with Generic 2 The TN722 TN722B and TN767 plug into any normal port slot in the system Supported Port Types The TN722 and TN722B only emulate tie trunk signaling That is they provide 2 state signaling on hook off hook signaling Two categories of trunk types perform 2 state signaling tie trunks and DMI trunks ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 PORT TYPES INSTALLATION COMPATIBILITIES 6 5 The TN767 circuit pack provides CO in addition to tie and DMI trunk types That is it provides 4 state signaling on hook off hook signaling as well as ringing and no ringing indication and reverse battery NOTE No restrictions are placed on the type of framing signaling or line coding options used with any of the port types However take care to assure that the interface options are compatible with the distant endpoint D4 channel banks are not now compatible with 24th channel signaling most D4 channel banks do not support ESF framing Tie Trunk Generic 1 DS1 DMI tie trunks appear to the switch software as a TN760B analog tie trunk Therefore thi
55. available but not recommended If a dash were translated all IEs would be mapped from one codeset to the other codeset on a one to one basis Because some codeset 7 IEs are different from their numerical equivalent in codeset 6 it is generally NOT desirable to map on a one to one basis Table 7 9 Codeset Differences identifies current IE differences between codeset 6 and codeset 7 TABLE 7 9 Codeset Differences IE Name Codeset 6 CodeSet 7 Traveling Class Mark Logical Link Identification Display Packet Layer Parameters Link Layer Parameters number Any number within the range of 0 through 127 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 7 75 Field 5 Specifies a mapped to codeset number Permitted encodes are numbers within the range 0 through 7 These numbers correspond to the respective codesets on a number per number basis If field 2 is translated one for incoming then encode seven is appropriate for field 5 Field 6 Identifies the IE code to be mapped to Permitted encodes are the same as field 4 Field 7 Each code set map number may contain up to a maximum of 255 incoming and 255 outgoing mappings This display only field shows the number of mappings that remain the number of unassigned mappings Procedure 354 Word 3 NPA NXX Digits Assignment This word and procedure are used to administer the ISDN numbering plan Depending on the switch
56. be available for other types of calls Other types of calls may be a combination of both incoming and outgoing 9 Regardless of the maximum bound assigned to other services there will always be at least 5 members that can carry calls for the associated Service Feature for example MEGACOM 800 NOTE This type of allocation plan has the characteristic of insuring that no single service will dominate the trunk group while still allowing for periodic fluctuations in demand If a particular Service Feature attempts a call that would result in exceeding the specified threshold then that call is rejected Usage Allocation Plan Assignment Schedule ISDN PRI Applications The CBC USAGE ALLOCATION PLAN ASSIGNMENT SCHEDULE screen permits the customer to administer a usage allocation plan and to vary the plan by both time of day and day of week Figure 7 83 Trunk Group Screen Page 4 ISDN PRI depicts this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 156 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 RIV5 amp GENERIC 1 Fixed Allocation Plan Number Scheduled CBC TRUNK GROUP USAGE ALLOCATION PLAN ASSIGNMENT SCHEDULE Page 4 of 11 Usage Method Fixed y Allocation Plan Number 1 Scheduled n Usage Allocation Plan Activation Schedule Act Plan Act Plan Act Plan Act Plan Act Plan Act Plan Time Time Time Time Time Time Figure 7 83 Trunk Group Screen Page 4 ISDN PRI
57. cannot mix digital data and modem pooled data on the same trunk groups in R2V4 In Generic 2 this is be possible because of BCCOS You can put voice grade data on the digital data trunk groups if the modems are not automatically inserted by the modem pool feature For example if you have a modem on your terminal you can use the same trunk groups as used for the digital data 103 14 This field and field 4 should be set to 1 if TCMs are to be sent and received The trunk type should be type 41 The analogous Generic administration is in the Service Type and Service Feature fields of the TRUNK GROUP screen This field and field 3 should be set to 1 if TCMs are to be sent The trunk type should be type 41 The analogous Generic administration is in the Service Type and Service Feature fields in the TRUNK GROUP screen If TCMs are to be sent here use TANDEM trunks otherwise use ACCESS trunks Enter the AAR or ARS prefix digit here On incoming calls this setting routes calls to AAR or ARS The analogous Generic administration is in the Incoming Call Handling Table fields on page 2 of the TRUNK GROUP screen see table E 8 Assign a 1 here for all ISDN trunks This is to collect all digits before seizing trunks The analogous Generic 1 administration is in the preferences in the ROUTING PATTERN screen Digits are all collected starting with the first ISDN PRI preference in a pattern and for
58. capabilities and concerns 8 1 maintenance procedures 8 2 summary of maintenance capabilities 8 5 glare 2 2 ground start CO trunk 6 11 H high level data link control HDLC 8 7 10 Habtevel dara link conmo EDLC L18710 J high speed multiplexers network 7 20 hot standby 5 15 Hunt Group screen settin ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 IN 8 INDEX IBM IDNX multiplexer to another system 2 4 IDNX multiplexer 2463 IDSN Advantage 65007 21 _ _ IE 1 16 BC C 1 BCC called party C 9 called party_number_C 8 channel ID 2 2 connected number displa C 5 NSF NSF Generic 2 C 15 NSF System 85 R2V4 C 14 NSF System 85 R2V4 and Generic 2 C 6 C 13 opcode translations C 12 inband signaling 4 incoming call handling table 7 146 E 25 information element IE 1 16 725 Initialization and Administration System ADS 5 2 72___ Sd installation compatibilities ports T Integrated Telemarketing Gateway ITG enabling System 85 interexchange carrier IXC Generic 1 routing 7 162_ __ Generic 1 trunk applications Generic 1 trunking considerations 7 142 Generic 2 AAR tables Generic 2 ARS tables network service value C 13 System 85 administration summar System 85 ARS assignments 7 43 internal clock reference B 9 B 11 B 12 System 85 AAR assignments Interface Links screen settings description 5 1 intemal Contd clock reference
59. channel provides a 16K bps signaling channel NOTE Specific descriptions for BRI layers 1 2 and 3 are not included here Another document that fully describes ISDN BRI architecture specific administration requirements and service provisioning is being developed Refer to ISDN BRI Reference Manual 555 025 102 for more information When connecting customer premises switches to the public network consider the features and services supported on each end of the connection At the time of this publication the AT amp T public network supported the following services ACCUNET Switched Digital Service MEGACOM MEGACOM 800 Call by call CBC Service Selection Automatic number identification ANI Software Defined Network SDN System 85 R2V4 and Generic 1 supports ISDN PRI but not ISDN BRI However System 85 R2V4 uses the line side digital communications protocol DCP to provide end to end digital connectivity The DCP channel structure consists of 2I 1S channel format Each I channel provides a 64K bps information voice data channel while the S channel provides an 8K bps signaling channel The DCP is similar to ISDN BRI both in structure and in function The DCP was AT amp T s early attempt to offer what at that time was the evolving BRI standard Figure _1 1 System 85 R2V4 ISDN Configuration shows various trunk side and line side connections to a System 85 R2V4 Generic 1 R1V5 and Generic 2 provide a
60. default When a stratum 3 clock is selected in the Stratum field this field is used to specify which port network 1 2 or 3 containing a stratum 3 clock will be used as the synchronization source This field does not appear when a stratum 4 clock is selected in the Stratum field The 3 character location of the circuit pack that is the primary synchronization reference NOTE The primary will be the DS1 circuit pack administered with slip detection y The location name and slip that is slip detection fields list the DS1 circuit packs that have been administered on the Ds1 CIRCUIT PACK screen The primary and secondary source must be selected from this list ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 7 135 Secondary The 3 character location of the circuit pack that is the secondary synchronization reference There is no requirement that a secondary source be provided However it is a good practice The Command Line Feature set provides four executable commands for controlling and monitoring synchronization They are e Disable e Enable e Status e Set Trunk Group Trunk Group Members DS1 Trunk Applications For DSI DMI applications the TN722 circuit pack emulates three categories of trunk types while the TN767 circuit pack emulates three additional trunk types refer to table 6 1 Supported Digital Facilities DS1 DMI trunking
61. determine which option to choose The digital switch maintains a slip count record for each DS1 The slip count is used to determine if the Tl span is experiencing errors and if so the severity of the errors type alarm Option y enables switching between the primary secondary or internal high accuracy clock If as many as 50 of those spans that are administered for slip detection are experiencing slips with respect to the primary then a decision is made to switch to the secondary Option y is equivalent toa 1 in field 10 of procedure 260 Remote Option y is only used during some phases of DS1 DMI diagnostic testing The Loop normal or operational choice is n Option n is equivalent toa O in field 11 of Around procedure 260 Network Synchronization Options The SYNCHRONIZATION PLAN screen is used to specify which of the two DS1 T1 spans that were previously administered with slip detection y is the primary reference source and which is the secondary reference source Figure_7 57 Synchronization Plan Screen depicts this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPT IONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V2 amp R1V3 7 117 SYNCHRONIZATION PLAN Page 1 of 1 SYNCHRONIZATION SOURCE DS1 circuit pack location Primary Secondary DS1 CIRCUIT PACKS Location Name Slip Location Name Slip Figure 7 57 Synchronization Plan Screen Primary The 3 character l
62. distant switch cannot handle the call it rejects the call with a different disconnect message The sending switch then either selects an alternative distant switch from subsequent route to steps and sets up another status query or invokes the alternative action program within its own local vector Calls can be intelligently interflowed among switches based on that is progress of the message Time of oldest call in the queue e Number of calls in the queue e Number of staff or available agents to handle calls e Time of day NOTE Look Ahead Interflow currently works only in private network configurations NOTE Call Vectoring and AAR ARS must be present for Look Ahead Interflow to work properly Summary ISDN calls are processed using conventional well established time proven call processing techniques The ISDN layer 3 software maintains status records for the ISDN call states maintains the call reference value CRV for each B channel and starts sending messages To request services from the conventional call processing routines ISDN layer 3 software informs the switch of items such as incoming calls and dialed digits ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 INTRODUCTION 1 29 The ISDN PRI level 3 messages are a collection of IEs that are defined in the Q 931 recommendations Each message has at least one IE IEs are transmitted and received over the D channel IEs contain three headers protocol discriminat
63. entries are numbers within the range through 254 The appropriate number must come from the RNX HNPA FNPA RHNPA tables Permitted entries are numbers within the range 1 through 99 The appropriate number must come from the previously administered TRUNK GROUP screen NOTE There is no restriction on using the same trunk group number in more than one routing pattern Permitted entries are numbers within the range 0 through 7 where 0 is least restrictive and 7 is most restrictive NOTE ISDN PRI does not alter the usage of FRLs However to access an ISDN PRI trunk group the calling extension must be compatible both in terms of FRL and BCC Permitted entries are the NPA area code for the terminating switch NOTE This field is not used for AAR or tie trunk applications although it may still be translated ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 162 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 Prefix Mark Toll List No Del Digits Inserted Digits IxC This field is only used for public network ARS applications The Prefix Mark relates to the ARS Prefix 1 Required field on the DIAL PLAN RECORD screen If the ARS Prefix 1 Required field is translated y then for certain type of calls it may be necessary to transmit the one along with the dialed digits The Prefix Mark field permits four different entries numbers for administering this capability Field encodes and the
64. equipment carrier is configured with two DS1s physical slots 3 8 16 and 21 are available for other applications If only one DS1 is configured then six additional slots are available for other applications To minimize confusion and eliminate the need for maintaining elaborate trunk to channel cross reference tables trunk group member assignments should match the DS1 channel assignments for example trunk group member 1 should be on channel 1 When using procedure 116 word 1 refer to Trunks Supporting Signaling Type 20 to determine which slot and circuit to translate for channel 1 Repeat this procedure by sequentially selecting DS1 channels 2 3 and so on and translating the appropriate slot and circuits as required Fields 1 5 These fields are used to translate the equipment location including slot and circuit channel location and to associate the equipment location channel with the particular trunk group translated in field 6 Field 6 Translates the trunk group Permitted encodes must be numbers with the range of 18 through 999 Field 7 Translates a particular number that functions as the night service number The number of digits depend on the particular application and its numbering plan ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 7 39 Field 8 Disables a channel s signaling Field encodes and their descriptions are Dash used when ISDN is enabled
65. field is only applicable for the identified extension s display module It controls the number of blank spaces that are inserted before the first displayed character of the name dialed number or trunk group name Permitted encodes are numbers 1 through 30 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 7 41 Field 4 The main function of this field is to provide some administration control over what is displayed on the voice terminals digital display Field encodes and their descriptions are Dash for all incoming only trunk groups 0 Used when the user extension does not want the outgoing trunk group name displayed but does desire the dialed number to remain on the display 1 Used when the user desires to display the name of the outgoing trunk group such as ISDN SDN MEGACOM or CBC NOTE For a tandem interworking call the name of the incoming trunk group is transmitted in the display IE of the ISDN PRI outgoing trunk group Field 5 The method that defines the name Field encodes and their descriptions are 0 Used for adding a new name or changing an existing name requires that the name change be made with word 2 1 Used for copying the name from the extension or trunk group that is displayed in field 6 Field 6 This field is used with field 5 to copy an existing name to the extension or trunk group identified in field 1 Field encodes and their descriptions a
66. field is specified for example mega800 e Called Len field is specified for example 4 e Called Number field is not specified that is left blank Application for Case 3 being selected A MEGACOM 800 call is received that has a called party number IE with the digits 8654 Based on the Service Feature field alone this call matches Cases 1 3 However on analyzing the Called Party Number IE there are only 4 leading digits 8654 Cases 1 and 2 are eliminated since they require a Called Len of 5 digits Case 3 requires 4 digits Furthermore the Case 3 Called Number field is blank which matches any number regardless of digit format The incoming call handling software selects Case 3 since it matches and is more restrictive than Cases 4 7 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 152 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 Case 4 e Service Feature field is specified for example mega800 e Called Len field is not specified that is left blank e Called Number field is not specified that is left blank Application for Case 4 being selected Assume the switch receives a MEGACOM 800 call that has a called party number IE with the digits 75442 Based on the Service Feature field alone this call will match Case 1 2 3 and 4 However on analyzing the Called Party Number IE it is determined that there are the following 5 leading digits 75442 Case 3 does not match because it
67. for data mode 3 BC code Field 10 Enables 1 or disables 0 support for data mode 0 BC code Procedure 321 Word 1 AAR Assignments and IXC ISDN Network Identifier This procedure is used for translating controlling the AAR feature Figure 7 21 Procedure 321 Word 1 AAR System 85 R2V4 depicts the procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 7 47 ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 321 WORD 1 AAR ROUTE TABLES Pattern Number Preference Number Trunk Group Facility Restriction Level Warning Tone Off Net Number of Digits Deleted Digit Collect DC Signal Ignore Oxxx Allowed IXC ISDN Network Identifier CUO DIDO PBWNEH eee Hod H Connected to CCO ON LINE 9 MINOR enter command JC JE pata WC OF HELP Fe FIELD F7 INPUT Fe cmDs Figure 7 21 Procedure 321 Word 1 AAR System 85 R2V4 Fields 1 9 The ISDN PRI does not place any new or additional considerations on translating these fields The codes or digits translated are generally dependent on each AAR plan and other switch or network considerations See table 7 5 Administrative Summary in procedure 321 word 5 for the relationship between administering field 4 in this word and field 4 in word 5 Field 10 Specifies either the number designation of the interexchange carrier IXC or the ISDN Network Service Identifier for the trunk group The IXC ISDN network
68. groups as well as other types of trunk groups the entered type defines feature operation for the trunk group For example if a trunk group is assigned the type of 19 incoming calls over this trunk group are routed to the attendant console On DID trunk type groups the switch expects station number digits on all incoming trunks on tie trunk type groups the switch can handle either station number digits or network numbers ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 26 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 For an ISDN trunk group a dynamic trunk type 120 can be assigned to the group This trunk type allows the group to process calls with a different trunk type on a call by call basis For example one incoming call over the group may expect station number digits as does a MEGACOM call while the next call over the group may expect a network number as does an SDN call Both an AAR ARS prefix digit procedure 103 and a DID additional digit procedure 101 can be administered for ISDN dynamic trunk groups This cannot be done for any other type of trunk group The dynamic trunk type may be used for CBC service although any of the conventional trunk types could also be used if incoming digits have been provisioned consistently For example trunk type 41 could be used as a CBC trunk group to support MEGACOM MEGACOM 800 and SDN if the incoming digits for both MEGACOM 800 and SDN reflect extension numbers or s
69. in WDDFOT out E amp M WS in wink DD out DMI ISDN MOS E amp M WS in WS out E amp M DD in DD out 2 way E amp M DD in IS out 2 way E amp M DD in IS out E amp M DD in WDDFOT out E amp M IS in WDDFOT out E amp M IS in wink DD out DMI ISDN MOS E amp M WS in WS out E amp M DD in WDDFOT out E amp M DD in wink DD out DMI ISDN MOS E amp M WS in WS out E amp M DD in DD out N A none 4 remote BCS access telephone dictation interface recorded announcement interface 50 51 52 RA N A N A GS E amp M IS in and out DMI ISDN MOS E amp M WS in WS out N A aux equipment N A aux equipment ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 TRUNK TYPE AND SIGNALING TYPE COMPATIBILITY TABLES TABLE D 1 Trunk Signaling Cross References continued D 5 Trunk Procedure Feature Direction Signaling Procedure Description Encode Types Encode code call interface 53 N A N A aux equipment 7 loudspeaker paging interface 54 N A N A aux equipment 7 TT sender 55 N A N A none 0 CAS interface 56 N A N A none 0 RLT for CAS 51 CAS l way out E amp M RLT out 13 ANI interface 58 N A N A ANI signaling 6 station msg register interface 59 N A N A none 0 unused 60 UCD lamp interface 61 N A N A none 0 music on hold interface 62 N A N A none 0 hardware digit collection 63 N A N A none 0 v
70. in procedure 000 to identify an area code and office code with a particular station This information is used to populate the calling party number IE and the connected party number The analogous Generic 1 administration is in the SID PREFIX TABLE screen ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 TIE TRUNK SETTINGS E 5 PROCEDURE TABLE E 1 continued System 85 R2V4 Administration Settings WORD FIELD REMARKS 000 010 100 Assign the NPA and NXX index for the terminal extension number This information is used to populate the calling party number field in a connect party number ISDN PRI message The analogous Generic 1 administration is in the SID PREFIX TABLE screen For each terminal class of service COS on a System 85 assign either mode 0 1 2 or 3 data or voice voice grade data The assignments here are responsible for populating the bearer capability BC IE in the ISDN PRI messages This is used for interworking between ISDN and non ISDN trunks and endpoints and also for routing calls based on BC For example if you want only mode terminal extensions to use a certain trunk group mode 1 is assigned to the COS for that terminal and the preference is also assigned mode in procedure 321 word 1 and or 309 word 5 If you want a terminal to have more than one BC it must have more than one extension An analogous Generic administration does not exist because the Generic
71. is required to connect to the TN463 SC which will always be located in the TMS cabinet For universal modules whenever this field is translated field 20 displays a number which corresponds to a Whether the circuit pack is used as a synchronization source b If it is a synchronization source then which type c Which cable connector cable 0 or cable 1 contains the circuit pack synchronization leads A loop timing problem can be created if synchronization sources are not administered correctly The loop timing problem exists as the result of an error where both switch endpoints for the same T1 span are administered as the primary This causes the clock frequency to vary widely and can bring down the switch Loop timing problems can be avoided by following a correctly engineered network synchronization diagram NOTE Depending on the application type encode translated there may be additional administration slot and port grouping restrictions ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 64 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 Field 14 Field encodes and their descriptions are 0 Assigns that the DS1 DMI BOS channels can be used for both trunks and lines mixed the latter is frequently called off premises stations OPS 1 Assigns that the interface is used to provide DMI BOS trunks The DMI BOS trunk groups are defined using procedure 100 word 1 encode 108 and or 109 DMI BOS applications
72. modules must be equipped with the TN380C or TN380D circuit packs TN380D supersedes TN380C and earlier in ISCN 249DR The TN580 has all functions of the TN380D For R2V1 System 85s version 1 5 or later software and R2V2 System 85s version 1 3 or later software equipped with the TN380C and ANN11C D circuit packs the following port types may also provide ground start FX WATS l RA PBX CO and DID trunks via the DS1 facility ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 6 4 PORT TYPES INSTALLATION COMPATIBILITIES 4 The DMI BOS is available with the ANNIID ANNIIE and TN722B circuit packs The ANNIID is only used on some R2V4 CIs The ANNIIE supersedes the ANNIIC as the production model For System 85 and Generic 2 DMI MOS is available with the ANN35 circuit pack traditional modules and with the TN767 or TN555 circuit pack universal modules 5 For Generic 1 DS1 CO and foreign exchange FX with TN767 6 The OPS line option is initially available with the TN380C TN380D ANN11C ANNIID and ANNIIE circuit packs Therefore the R2V3 software or later version is required for administration purposes procedure 000 7 System 85 R2V3 for analog DSC endpoints System 85 R2V4 for added digital endpoints 8 The dynamic trunk group includes CO trunk types 17 27 and 30 tie trunk types 41 42 43 46 and 47 as well as DMI trunk types 108 and 109 9 This requires an accompanying TN555 circuit pack
73. must enter either grp name or mbr name to specify whether the hunt group name or member name is sent to the far end when a member of a hunt group answers ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 INDEX 011 calls C 1 1 ls density 17 1 20 2 24th channel signaling 1 14 1 15 2 3 4 4 wire E amp M extended range channel units 2 5 5 50 pin 25 pair connector configurations B 4 551V channel service unit 551V ST channel service unit SESS to another system 2 7 6 6500 IDSN Advantage A AAR assignments access ACCUNET 6 3 C 16 code trunk connector ISDN B 16 digital and cross connect system DACS 2 6 5 6 B 12 equal 7 44 7 47 7 105 7 108 7 300 ISDN 7 30 line networ access Contd nodal services 37 _ o per channel drop and insert capability 6 2 private network 7 142 public network 7 32 7 142 special 2 6 6 11 A 1 ACCUNET access C 16 digital service 6 3 y ADFTC 8 4 administration administration options and requirements 77 settings Generic E 9 o private network E 8 __ O summary Generic 1 E 70_ ____ administrative procedure summary C 1 Advanced Private Line Termination APLT AIOD 7 32 alarmi blue 8 5 circuit pack facility 8 8 LFA 8 8 S loss of signal 8 9 asses id remote frame 8 9 yellow 8 5 8 9 all Os octet 7 18 alternate mark inversion AMI 1 2 1 16 voice data AVD analog CO to another system 2 8 digital fac
74. nothing Enables one or more BC codes for the AAR plan pattern number preference number Enables 1 ordisables 0 support for the voice or voice grade data BC code Enables 1 or disables 0 support for the data mode 1 BC code Enables 1 or disables 0 support for the data mode 2 BC code Enables 1 or disables 0 support for the data mode 3 BC code Enables 1 or disables 0 support for the data mode 0 BC code Procedure 107 Word 1 ISDN Trunk Verification by Terminal Attendant and ATMS This procedure must be translated to support trunk verification by voice terminal and trunk verification by attendant over ISDN PRI facilities Figure 7 23 Procedure 107 Word I ATMS Terminating Test Line Assignment System 85 R2V4 depicts this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 50 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE TIL TELEPHONE DIGITS Digit Digit Digit Digit Digit Digit Digit Gea NID oF WwW m Digit DISPLAY ONLY ANDO PB WNE A 19 Trunk Type Els EZ 13 14 IS 16 ATs 18 107 Digit 9 Digit Digit Digit Digit Digit Digit Digit WORD ATMS TERMINATING TEST LINE ASSIGNMENT La Trunk Group E 2 Test Line Type E3 omamo 1 Connected to CCO ON LINE Q MAgoR MINOR RUN TAPE IN USE WAIT enter command CO OOOO CO Eara J OOO OE HELP F6 FELD F7 I
75. oO rs o T a n Z 5 ie amp o 5 a T H Nn 2 3 4 d 5 1 Circui ki 6 7 8 9 nchronization Plan S IPI el 9 9 fa a Is i O pa g y n QO l O La S l gP a ch a S Fa Q oO J S gh a oO nterface Links Fill in all but the enable fields y O oO wn n Q y 5 oO gt wn 4 ignment 10 Interface Links Enable the interface links 11 Signaling group R1V5 only 12 Trunk Group 13 Various routing screens RNX HNPA FNPA RHNPA 14 Routing Pattern ID Prefix Table n 16 Hunt Group z erminating Extension Group ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 TIE TRUNK SETTINGS E 11 System Parameters Customer Options Screen Settings The administration for this screen is done remotely by the Customer Service Support Organization CSSO of the Network Operations Group NOG It enables the optional features of a Generic 1 Following is an example of typical settings for this screen when a Generic 1 is connected to a System 85 R2V4 via ISDN PRI tie trunks OPTIONAL FEATURES Abbreviated Dialing Enhanced List ACD ARS ARS Partitioning Authorization Codes CAS Branch CAS Main DCS Emergency Access to Attendant Forced Entry of Account Codes Hospitality Hospitality Parameter Reduction ISDN PRI OCM Private Networking Service Observing Ten to Seven Dig
76. of 88 then a switch back to the primary is made ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 62 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 Field 11 Field 12 Offers the options external loop not available 0 or available 1 The external loop available option should be selected only when demand diagnostic maintenance is done and then only after the interface has been busied out This option is used with procedure 620 test 2 to extend the range of the test to include the network channel terminating equipment NCTE and the connecting facility any external equipment to the point of the DS1 loop around The test requires that either the colocated or the distant NCTE be physically optioned for loopback mode The external loop available option should be used only for the duration of a test Specifies whether 1 ornot 0 the associated Tl span is used as an incoming synchronization source to the switch The network synchronization diagram should show those transmission facilities that are used for synchronization Each switch permits a maximum of two interfaces one primary and one secondary to be translated here However there is no requirement to have both When a Generic 2 is the master timing server neither primary or secondary is administered Each Generic 2 that is equipped with a DS1 will also contain a TN463 synchronization clock synchronizer SC For single module systems the SC is located in
77. of the installation and ISDN PRI service provisioning process the test number must be coordinated with the terminating switch NOTE This field is equivalent to translating procedure 108 word 1 for Generic 2 This field maps the display information codepoint 8 and the TCM information codepoint 40 to codeset 6 or codeset 7 depending on whether a 6 or a 7 is translated The distant switch will determine which should be translated Specifically if the distant switch is a 4ESS with 4e11 or 4e12 software or a System 85 R2V4 then this field should be translated with a 7 If the distant switch is a 4ESS with 4e13 Generic 1 or Generic 2 then the field should be translated with a six NOTE For tandem node configurations Generic rebuilds the message in conformance to the outgoing trunk group If any codeset codepoint conversions are required then the two endpoints must coordinate the conversions Generic 1 can receive in either codeset this is a send option ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 146 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 Max This field determines the maximum number of bytes that may be transmitted before an Message Size acknowledge reply is required Permitted entries are 128 244 256 and 260 default to Send This field must be administered to be the maximum size messages that the far end is able to receive and process If the distant switch is another Gene
78. on the type call For example trunk type 41 is the default for switch to switch connections trunk type 30 is the default for public network to switch connections and trunk type 108 is the default for host to switch calls Table 7 2 Trunks Supporting Signaling Type 20 shows permitted field entries that support signaling type 20 TABLE 7 2 Trunks Supporting Signaling Type 20 Trunk Description CO 16 17 Note 1 18 19 20 Data 100 107 DID 30 31 DMI Note 2 108 109 FX 21 25 ISDN 120 Note 3 M S TIE 70 78 Special 2 5 6 50 58 62 65 67 90 93 TIE 32 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 WATS 26 27 28 NOTES 1 Trunk types preceded with an asterisk may be selected by trunk type 120 on an as needed Call By Call CBC Service Selection basis 2 Trunk types not included in these categories may not be translated for ISDN PRI service Most conventional trunk types specify as a part of their name an in out signaling sequence Actually these signaling sequences are disabled and type 20 signaling is used exclusively over ISDN facilities 3 Beginning with the 1 0 software load of Generic 2 and the 1 2 software load of System 85 R2V4 digits may be inferred when using the ISDN dynamic trunk type The default of 30 infers DID if necessary A default of 46 infers AAR ARS See Appendix C Administrative Procedure Summary for a complete explanation of this field For ISDN trunk
79. only translated for the channels that is used as a dedicated switched connection Field 9 Not applicable for ISDN PRI ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 7 99 Field 10 Assigns the function of the terminating endpoint For PRI nodal services this endpoint is the network Field encodes and their descriptions are 0O Another customer premises switch 1 A private network connection to a host computer 2 Public network connections Field 11 Translates the D channel group number These numbers should be coordinated with field 1 of procedure 262 word 2 Field encodes and their descriptions are e Dash for non NFAS arrangements e Numbers within the range 1 through 255 for all NFAS arrangements Procedure 012 Word 1 Name Database The name database is used by those features such as DCS ISDN PRI which provide display type information to voice terminals Some examples of common display information are calling party name vector directory number and trunk group name For ISDN PRI applications the name database information is used to populate the display IE Figure 7 46 Procedure 012 Word 1 Name Database depicts this procedure ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 012 WORD 1 NAME DATABASE NAME TO BE DISPLAYED Extension VDN or Trunk Group Type E Display Start EJ Outgoing Trunk Display E Copy Mode Extension VDN or Trunk Group to
80. pai ERACE 655 FT INTERFACE il aisre 655 FT MAXIMUM MAXIMUM ANY DSX 1 ANY DSX 1 INTERFACE INTERFACE Figure 3 4 Nonmetallic Cabling Configurations CEM AND CDM CABLING CONFIGURATIONS Both the CEM and CDM provide a DSX 1 cross connect to the DS1 DMI BOS and therefore connect directly to a DSI DMI BOS Any of the previously described metallic or nonmetallic transmission media may be used for completing the connection from a DSI DMI BOS to CEMs and CDMs 3 5 CEM and CDM Cable Configurations shows stand alone and combined CEM and CDM configurations Refer to Service Manual Installation and Maintenance Channel Division Multiplexer 365 165 101 and to BCM32000 Description Installation and Maintenance Digital Transmission Systems 365 287 100 for appropriate distance limitations and switch settings ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 DS1 TRANSMISSION AND CABLING 3 11 DS1 DMI DS1 DMI OR D4 DSX 1 OR D4 CHANNEL CHANNEL BANK ANY DS1 DSX 1 BANK TRANSMISSION lt lt MEDIA DSI DMI DSX 1 DS1 DMI ORD4 M OR D4 CHANNEL CHANNEL BANK BANK A CEM ONLY DS1 DMI DSX 1 DS1 DMI ORDA CDM A DSX 1 OR D4 CHANNEL SX 1 ANY DSI CHANNEL BANK TRANSMISSION BANK as MEDIA DEDICATED __ DEDICATED CHANNEL Se HE _ CHANNEL APPLICATIONS APPLICATIONS B CDM ONLY A
81. populate the BC IE Field encodes and their descriptions are 0 Voice and Voice grade data Mode 1 data 56K bps Mode 2 data subrate up to 19 2K bps Mode 3 data also called packet mode Mode 0 data 64K bps digital data gt w N Be Procedure 116 Word 1 DS1 DMI ISDN PRI Trunk Assignments Each analog trunk circuit pack provides four circuits that are administered by using procedure 150 Conversely each DSI provides 24 circuits channels that are administered by using procedure 116 Procedure 116 Word 1 DSI Trunk Assignments to Equipment Circuit Location System 85 R2V4 depicts procedure 116 word 1 Each DS1 MFAT carrier will support a maximum of two DS1s each occupying one slot and located in slots 5 and 18 When a DSI DMI ISDN interface trunk applications is located in slot 5 it uses the six slots 0 1 2 5 6 and 7 When the interface is located in slot 18 it uses the six slots 13 14 15 18 19 and 20 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 7 37 ENHANCED MODE PROCEDUURE 116 WORD 1 DS1 AND ISDN TRUNK ASSIGNMENTS EQUIPMENT LOCATION 1 Module 2 Cabinet fF 3 Carrier 4 Slot 5 Circuiti EJ 6 Trunk Group Tow Night Terminal 8 Disable Signaling 9 AIOD Equipment Number 10 Interface Endpoint piglii Connected to CC0 ON LINE MAJOR MINOR RUN TAPE ll BUSY OUT lI IN USE lf WAIT enter command
82. run both modes 3 and 2 such as BRI PC PBX and 3270 data modules Mode 3 is tried first if it fails mode 2 is used ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 INTRODUCTION 1 25 3 Unknown digital used for those calls of any mode 0 3 where the signaling message does not specify a mode such as DS1 trunks using common channel or 24th channel signaling 4 Unkown analog used for voice or voice grade data calls where the signaling message does not specify a type such as analog trunks and robbed bit DS1 trunks 5 Voice grade data used for data applications that use modems 6 Mode 0 data used for facilities that transmit 64K bps data DCP and BRI extensions DMI BOS trunks and ISDN PRI facilities 7 Mode I data used for 56K bps synchronous data applications The appropriate data module must be installed and optioned for 56K bps operation NOTE This arrangement can be used to support the special format required for ACCUNET switched digital service or 56K bps basic service DCP uses a mode 2 handshake unless an MPDM M1 data module is used 8 Mode 3 data should be administered for those applications requiring packet mode data 9 X 25 X 25 is administered only for DCIU and other X 25 links Predefined BCCOSs should not be redefined Lines trunks and AAR ARS preferences are assigned the default BC when one is not administered Generic 2 BCCOS defaults are intended to make a Generic 2 switch opera
83. side Differences between the user side and network side are primarily related to resolving occurrences of glare Glare is a condition where both switches try to originate a call on the same channel simultaneously The network side always gains control of the channel and the user side backs down terminals are excused from certain protocol functions Linking dissimilar networks to provide end to end call or feature processing is called interworking Calls from non ISDN facilities analog trunks and or DMI BOS trunks may be connected to ISDN facilities to provide end to end tandemed connections The switch provides the required signal conversions through interworking routines The switch features and services that may be used depend on an extension s COS assignment and other administration options i Depending on other administration options message associated user to user information MAUUI or user to user information UUI may be transmitted from one user endpoint to the other UUI transfer includes the display of such things as calling number and calling party name Equipment manufacturers interpret the ISDN PRI protocol in different ways As a result equipment and various equipment releases use different approaches Currently one significant difference occurs in codesets 6 and 7 System 85 R2V4 transfers UUI via codeset 7 System 85 R2V4 transfers network specific information in codeset 7 according to the initial definition of ISDN G
84. stream by multiplexing the information B channels and signaling D channel the orderly sharing of the D channel timing synchronization framing and line coding Layer 2 PRI defines the signaling channel data link protocol that is the envelope This layer includes the LAPD protocol the focus of the Q 921 recommendations The LAPD protocol permits many logical links to be multiplexed into one D channel It also provides flow control and error recovery for each logical link Layer 3 PRI defines the network layer protocol that is the message which consists of the Q 931 recommendations It provides the methods messages to establish maintain and terminate network connections between communicating ISDN applications The message set includes over 200 messages which provide many services features that are not available without ISDN Some of these include e Call establishment messages alerting call proceeding connect setup e Call information phase messages resume suspend e Call disestablishment messages disconnect release e Miscellaneous messages ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 1 4 INTRODUCTION The BRI terminates at a subscriber s residence or office There it connects either to an ISDN compatible terminal or to a conventional terminal via a terminal adapter The BRI channel structure consists of a 2B 1D format Each B or bearer channel provides a 64K bps information channel Each D
85. the trunk group to function with a modem pool A Data Originate code is required to start a modem pool call The avd option is equivalent to translating System 85 procedure 101 field 17 witha 1 Trunk Type Establishes the physical type of incoming and outgoing trunks For tie trunk in out applications field encodes and their descriptions are e Auto e Immed start e Wink start e Delay dial Trunk Group Screen Page 2 Tie Trunk Group depicts this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V2 amp RIV3 7 121 GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS Page 2 of 5 Mode Type Answer Delay ly 2 3 4 RE 6 Ts 8 w on es a m N fan w m eS ig oa Figure 7 60 Trunk Group Screen Page 2 Tie Trunk Group Port This field associates each trunk group member to a particular carrier A E slot 01 20 and circuit 01 24 NOTE System 75 does not have the same DS1 circuit pack slot restrictions as System 85 However trunk group member assignments should match the DS1 channel assignments for example trunk group member 1 on channel 1 and maintain this procedure as long as possible Name This field does not apply to PRI Mode For DS1 tie trunk applications the default and only permitted entry is e amp m Type For DS1 DMI applications the default is T1 stan T1 standard Normally this f
86. this document a basic understanding of telephony and networking is required The GLOSSARY and ABBREVIATIONS appendixes of this document are provided to assist you in understanding the terminology used herein See the Related Sources heading later in this preface About This Document for a list of other documents that discuss similar topics HOW THIS DOCUMENT IS ORGANIZED This document consists of the following chapters 1 INTRODUCTION Provides a high level functional description of the DS1 DMI ISDN PRI channels available framing formats signaling options and line coding formats Describes functional connection arrangements to private network facilities private endpoints and to public network facilities public endpoints Included along with the public network discussions are Switched Access connections and services This section also describes connection arrangements using digital multiplexer transmission equipment 3 DS1 TRANSMISSION AND CABLING Describes cable distance limitations versus cable size permitted cable types the DSX 1 interface specification the need and function of customer service units on and off premises cable configurations metallic and nonmetallic cable options and equalizer and compensation settings 4 THE DIGITAL LOSS PLAN Describes transmission loss concepts the analog and digital loss plans and the differences between them and the user or installer impact switch settings
87. to establish a trunk failure threshold that when exceeded will generate an alarm The threshold limit will affect service availability and on an indirect basis the customer s maintenance costs Field 8 Permits user control of whether optional ISDN IEs are transmitted and whether access to other ISDN network features is desired The optional ISDN IEs include the following e Calling number display e Connected party number e User to user information e Called party name e Calling party name e Data mode 3 parameters e Traveling class marks NOTE Items preceded with an asterisk are only transmitted on an end to end basis whenever all public network links are provided with CCITT interoffice communication Field encodes and their descriptions are Dash only applicable whenever ISDN is not available 0 Recommended for all ISDN configurations both public and private network arrangements 1 Do not transmit the optional ISDN IEs ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 Field 9 Field 10 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 7 93 Specifies the network service that is requested for trunk verification by station TVS The following table shows permitted field entries that support signaling type 20 Trunks Supporting Signaling Type 20 Trunk Trunk Description Type CO 16 17 Note 1 18 19 20 Data 100 107 DID 30 31 DMI Note 2 108 109 FX 21 25
88. to terminate the D channel Six different types of channel units may be used to provide drop or insert channels The 4 wire E amp M tie trunk is compatible with DS1 tie trunks and may be used for the dedicated switch connection The All Rate OCU Dataport RS 232C 2 4 4 8 9 6K bps or V 35 56K bps is compatible with an identical channel unit when configured in a D4 channel bank All other CDM channel units must terminate at a distant CDM on the same channel with an identical channel unit The emphasis here is what is on one end must be compatible with what is on the other end channel per channel The D4 channel bank is versatile It may be used as customer premises equipment to support both circuit switched such as with a switch and dedicated line applications The D4 channel banks can also be used at an analog end office class 5 or configured to provide both voice and data interfaces to a digital toll office 4ESS Although the D4 channel bank is compatible with other devices using D4 standards its most frequent application from this document s perspective is as the interface between a DIMENSION and DS1 or T1 facilities The physical connections from the D4 to the switch are identical to connections used in any 4 wire analog tie trunk connection The 4 wire E amp M ER tie trunk should be used because these units include variable attenuators in the range between O and 25 5 dB Therefore external attenuator pads are not required
89. translated as a catch all entry for all Services Features not explicitly specified This field reserves a specified number of trunk group members that are to always be available to the associated Service Feature Permitted numbers are any number within the range of 0 to 99 NOTE For each allocation plan the sum of the Min Chan columns must be less than the total number of members for the trunk group To maximize the utility of CBC Service Selection the sum of the Min Chan column must be much less than the total number of members for the trunk group The difference between this sum and the total numbers of members determines the overflow pool ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 7 155 Max Chan This field established the maximum number of trunk members that can be used by the associated Service Feature application at any one time for example MEGACOM 800 An Example Application for Usage Allocation Plans A given ISDN PRI trunk group has the Service Type field translated cbc and has 23 trunk members And if 1 At any given time no more than 15 members that is Max Chan 15 will be used for the particular Service Feature 2 At least 5 members that is Min Chan 5 will always be reserved for this service application Then these Min Chan and Max Chan administration assignments insure the following 1 At least 8 trunk members will
90. use the DCP protocol The DCP protocol is based on the DMI specification which uses HDLC mode 2 3 as a building platform and therefore meet these conditions The DS1 T1 facilities that use RBS and are optioned for ZCS maintain the ones density requirement by converting any all zeroes octet to a string of seven zeros and a one This does not significantly affect voice and voice band data since it is in analog pulse code modulation of PCM form For DS1 T1 facilities that use 24th channel signaling and are optioned for ZCS the data communications protocol communications equipment used must prevent the all zeroes octet from occurring otherwise the ZCS method will forcibly alter the data causing errors to guarantee proper ones density The B8ZS line coding format substitutes a unique code bipolar violation code for any eight consecutive zeros This bipolar violation code is detected at the receiving end and converted back to the original string of eight zeros The B8ZS encoding method permits data transmission at rates up through 64K bps without consideration of the user data protocol Several different types of network digital facilities may be linked together to complete the end to end connection Typically they will be multiplex derived facilities Usually the multiplexers will contain a bipolar violation monitor and removal circuit that corrects all bipolar violations alters B8ZS data and also produces an all 1s if a loss of input si
91. 0 Used when signaling is enabled This is the default option not used with ISDN 1 Used when signaling is disabled Use this with dedicated switched connection to disable signaling for a tie trunk The signaling bit then can be used as a data bit allowing the full 64K bps to be used for data Field 9 Not applicable for ISDN PRI Field 10 For outgoing AAR and TVS test calls this field determines the encoding of the called party IE as assigned in procedure 107 word 1 and procedure 108 word 1 If the B channel is in an ISDN dynamic trunk group this field also determines how an incoming call over the trunk is processed see the Procedure 100 Word 1 section earlier in this chapter See Appendix C Administrative Procedure Summary for a discussion of the called party IE and the Procedure 107 Word 1 and Procedure 108 Word 1 sections in this chapter for more information Field encodes and their descriptions are 0 For another customer premises switch 1 For a private network connection to a host computer 2 For public network connections Procedure 012 Word 1 Name Database The name database is used by those features such as DCS ISDN PRI which provide display type information to voice terminals Some examples of the more common display information include calling party name vector directory number and trunk group name For ISDN PRI applications the name database information is used to populate the display IE in the call set
92. 03 ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 279 WORD 1 NETWORK SPECIFIC FACILITY 1 ISDN Network Service Value E ISDN NETWORK DEFINITION 2 Parameterized Binary 33 Feature Service E d 4 Facility Coding Value z PARAMETERS 5 Parameter 1 EJ 6 Parameter 2 7 Parameter 3 EJ 8 Parameter 4 E 9 Parameter 5 E 10 Parameter 6 E 11 Parameter 7 Connected to CCO ON LINE QY MAJOR MINOR RUN TAPE BUSY OUT IN USE WALT enter command o Figure 7 49 Procedure 279 Word 1 Network Facilities Coding Generic 2 Field 1 Translates Network Service This field is an arbitrary index number that you use to identify the NSF defined in the rest of the fields Field encodes and their descriptions are e Dash whenever a carrier identifier number is not applicable e Numbers 1 through 511 For most ISDN public network connections it is expected that the CBC Service Selection capability will be implemented With this capability the ISDN B channels must on a per call basis support multiple ISDN features and services The public network CO originates an incoming call by transmitting a call setup message to the switch The call setup message contains a NSF IE that identifies the ISDN feature service At the switch fields 2 through 11 are used to define the various ISDN public network features and services Network Services Network Features lists the currently available AT amp T ISDN network services
93. 100 Word 3 Trunk Group Trunk Type Signaling Type Translations System 85 R2V4 Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Specifies a trunk group Permitted entries include any not already used number within the range of 18 to 999 Administers or changes the signaling type for the trunk group For all ISDN trunking applications except DCS glare is resolved by the ISDN protocol Glare is discussed in more detail in Bee 2 Nenvork Connections and Configurations Specifically ISDN negotiates the losing call to a different channel if the original channel is preferred Exclusive calls such as DCS are not negotiated and the user hears the reorder tone In either case the network interface has priority over the user interface when both calls are preferred or exclusive This capability is administered in procedure 262 word 1 and field 5 Therefore this field 3 entry may be any of the available encodes 0 1 or 2 since this field is ignored for ISDN applications ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 7 29 Field 4 Field 5 Field 6 Field 7 Retry permits multiple attempts to seize a busy trunk from the specified trunk group This field is primarily applicable for those trunk groups routed over analog facilities and use one of the following trunk types 41 42 43 46 or 47 Depending on the particular configuration RETRY may or may not be applicable for ISDN appli
94. 12 si selecting a timing source for the switch 5 8 service acknowledge 8 2 facility options DS1 characteristics System 75 R1V2 versus System 85 System 85 Release 2 type DMI MOS 2 3 shared channel 2 10 SID Prefix Table screen settings SID ANI I 31 7 142 S signal preequalized 3 13 signaling 2 6 24th channel 4 2 3 AT amp T proprietary 1 14 cross references D 2 _ O DMI BOS 1 14 2 3 DMI MOS 1 14 2 3 dual tone multifrequency DTMF 2 6 E amp M reverse battery 2 6 framing 2 14 o group inband 7 14 ISDN aga oS link code SLC 2 7 nonfacility associated R2V4 alternate type translations D 6 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 IN 14 INDEX signaling Contd reverse battery E amp M 2 6 robbed bit 4 B8ZS 2 7 D4 framing 2 5 definition 7 14 DS1 DMI BOS connection to D4 channel bank 2 5 VBR 2 S ZCS 2 7 system number 7 type 20 trunks supporting variable bit robbed VBR signals channel 7 7 SLC 2 7 SLIM 2 7 slip 1 17 controlled 5 3 excessive 8 8 o E slot virtual slot virtual Software Defined Network SDN software operation System 75 and Generic 1 synchronization 5 12 special access administration requirements A 1 channel unit 6 11 connections 2 6 office SAO 6 11 subscriber 6 11 Ss7 7 30 7 92 S station identification SID number 7 31 lt strata 5 5 stratum 4 type I 5 5 type II 5 5 subnet wonking p8 J subsc
95. 16 146 oF 1916 P9275 or 202 __21 f 246 776 15 6 or 2076 0708 58 33 E 07 7 1377 or 187 o fremm n p eano 2 3 7 3 15 3 or 20 3 27 A 1577 or 20 7 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 7 15 Field 15 V4 Only ZCS facilities require that the contents of the D channel be inverted to guarantee that the minimum ones density be maintained This field shows whether the signaling channel is inverted Field encodes and their descriptions are Dash means ZCS chosen in procedure 260 This is the default when ZCS is chosen this automatically inverts the D channel The dash is appropriate for all applications of the ANNI1 circuit pack RBS does not use the 24th channel to transmit signaling information 24th channel signaling via BOS uses A and B bits for signaling and the channel structure is such that the ones density is never violated oO Selects inverted signaling information contents of the 24th channel Either 0 or 1 must be administered for MOS Recall that B8ZS is recommended for MOS based applications However not all transmission facilities will permit B8ZS on an end to end basis Administration must be coordinated with the network facilities distant end to ensure compatibility NOTE This field must be a dash when ZCS line coding is selected with ISDN 1 Selects uninverted signaling information contents of the 24th channel T
96. 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 TIE TRUNK SETTINGS E 15 DIAL PLAN RECORD Area Code 619 ARS Prefix 1 Required n Uniform Dialing Plan y Plan Length 5 FIRST DIGIT TABLE First Length Digit d a E S23 4 2 5 169 ile fac tac 23 extension 32 extension 4 extension D extension 6 extension T extension 8 fac 9 fac 0 attendant fac E fac Figure E 4 DIAL PLAN RECORD Screen DS1 Circuit Pack Screen Settings For details on how to administer this screen see DEFINITY 75 85 Communications System Generic 1 1 and System 75 Implementation Issue 1 February 1989 555 204 654 See page 4 51 DS 1 Circuit Pack In addition see pages 3 132 4 123 5 159 6 91 6 126 and 6 168 for other required information Following is an example of typical settings for this screen when a Generic 1 is connected to a System 85 R2V4 via ISDN PRI tie trunks ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 E 16 TIE TRUNK SETTINGS DS1 CIRCUIT PACK Location 1C19 Name TG 92 TO KM4 Line Compensation 1 Zero Code Suppression zcs Framing Mode esf Signaling Mode isdn pri Connect pbx Interface user MAINTENANCE PARAMETERS Slip Detection y Remote Loop Around Test n Figure E 5 Dsi CIRCUIT PACK Screen Table E 3 DS 1 Circuit Pack Screen Settings Generic 1 describes the administration settings for the ISDN PRI specific fields in this administration screen TABLE E 3 DS 1 Circuit Pack Screen Settings
97. 20 negotiation packet switched 0 primary D 9 restricted 8 secondary D 1 9 service unit 1 20 3 2 shared 2 10 signaling 7 9 signals 7 unit 2 wire E amp M 6 5 6 10 4 wire E amp M 6 10 4 wire E amp M extended range 2 5 dial pulse originating DPO 2 8 FX office 2 8 FXS 2 5 FXS with gain transfer FXS GT 2 5 SAO 6 11 SAS 6 11 special access office SAO 2 8 unrestricted 7 18 channel division multiplexer channel expansion multiplexer circuit pack alarms 8 7 circuit switched channel 7 10 class of restriction COR A 2 class of service COS C 1 BC and ISDN routing interworking translation TA between 6 and 7 map number to incoming and outgoing translations C 13 combination channel 4 6 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 IN 4 INDEX combination tie trunk 2 5 common channel signaling Common Control Switching Arrangement COSA E34 communication protocols 20 comparison System 75 R1V2 versus System 85 G2 7 113 o o SSiSE Y compensation settings line equalizer 3 13 composite clock output 5 16 conclusions on synchronization 5 29 connected number IE connection special access 2 6 connections using DS1 DMI terminal equipment 2 9 controlled slip 5 3 COR 7 120 7 139 A 2 COS C 1 BC and ISDN routing interworking 4 30 _ o translation Generic 1 7 139 Cid Generic CRC 212 12 1 13 CSU 1 20 3 2_ o customer controllable reconfigur
98. 260 Except for one case the default values are usually adequate When connected to a duplicated Generic 1 however field 10 should be set to a value of 6 to avoid an alarm when Generic 1 switches processors 280 054 13 For each ANN35 and TN767 containing a D channel in an nonfacility associated signaling NFAS arrangement assign an interface identifier here This field is used to populate the ISDN channel ID information element IE Assign an extension range to the SN261 ADFTC that will be used for ISDN testing from the far end communications system This extension corresponds to the number assigned in the TRUNK GROUP screen on Generic for ISDN test calls Fields 6 and 7 should be assigned ADF TC Stations are defined in procedure 000 word 1 The analogous Generic 1 administration is in the ISDN Test Call field in the MAINTENANCE RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS screen 108 Assign the test number to call on the far end communications system to do ISDN PRI tests This number is mapped according to the dial plan to the extension assigned in the MAINTENANCE RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS screen on Generic 1 The analogous Generic administration is in the Far End Test No field of the TRUNK GROUP screen 354 Assign the NPA and NXX designators here The NPA is the area code in which this System 85 R2V4 resides The NXX is a local exchange office code used by the system The designator is an index used
99. 3 SYSTEM 85 R2V1 THROUGH R2V4 This part describes administration options and requirements for System 85 R2V1 through R2V4 NOTE Screens shown in the System 85 portion of this chapter are from the Manager II administrative terminal These fields correspond directly to the fields on flipcharts That is the field 1 of procedure 275 word 4 on the Manager II screen is the same as field 1 of procedure 275 word 4 on the flipchart Procedure 275 Word 4 ISDN Service Enable Disable Procedure 275 is used to translate the system class of service COS assignments as well as several other miscellaneous services and features Word 4 provides the capability for enabling and disabling the ISDN service Figure 7 1 Procedure 275 Word 4 System COS and Miscellaneous Service Assignments System 85 R2V4 depicts procedure 275 word 4 ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 275 WORD 4 SYSTEM COS MISCELLANEOUS 1 Code Calling Access Digits g 13 CMS Status g 3a Trunk to Trunk Transfer H 14 ISDN Status EJ ATTENDANT RELEASE LOOP OPERATION ADMINISTRABLE ALARMS 4 Status B 15 Even Port Peripherals g 5 Timed Recall Timer EJ 16 Trunk Software E 17 Auxillary Software E 6 Default Recent Disconnect Interval DISPLAY ONLY MAXIMUM PREEMPTION LEVEL 18 Local Switch Number F 7 All Incoming B OUTGOING 8 Terminal g 9 Attendant H 10 AUTOVAN Interface switch 11 ACD Abandon Call Search B Connected to CCO ON LI
100. 4th channel signaling types However these two signaling types are not selectable via ANN11E administration When administered for 24th channel signaling the ANNIIE defaults to DMI BOS However an ANNIIE may still be connected to an ANNIIC The ANNIIE will automatically determine when the ANNIIC or any other endpoint is using proprietary signaling and switch to proprietary 24th channel signaling to maintain compatibility DMI trunk types 108 and 109 are intended for connections to DMI host computer endpoints and for ACCUNET switched digital service The primary difference of trunk types 108 and 109 is that they inhibit the use of Data Answer tone on the trunk Examples of applications requiring this are a DMI BOS trunk to a host which uses DMI BOS 24th channel signaling or an ANN11 used for ACCUNET switched digital service access which requires robbed bit signaling Again trunk types 108 and 109 are not the only trunk types that can provide DMI BOS signaling This matters for non host DMI BOS endpoints such as the IBM IDNX multiplexer This multiplexer requires DMI BOS 24th channel signaling but is not a host Therefore the ANNIIJE that terminates on an IDNX should be administered as any appropriate trunk type other than 108 or 109 Note that at present DMIs are only certified for switch to host connectivity and not for switch to switch connectivity which appears to be the application of the IDNX multiplexer This is now the only applica
101. 55 025 101 Issue 4 7 72 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 Field 7 Assigns whether hyperactivity management will be enabled for the ISDN PRI link Hyperactivity is defined as erratic behavior by the D signaling channel Typically a hyperactive link will generate an excessive amount of meaningless traffic Excessive D channel traffic may overload the module processor and degrade system performance Field encodes and their descriptions are Dash not applicable This would be administered for all ISDN BRI links 0 Disables hyperactivity management for the particular ISDN PRI link this is the recommended option for SNC links 1 Enables hyperactivity management recommended for all ISDN PRI links except SNC links This software hyperactivity management functions to monitor link performance detect when certain error thresholds have been exceeded busyout the link on exceeding the threshold and record the failure reason as FAULT CODE 337 in the maintenance log Procedure 280 Word 1 ISDN PRI Receive Transmit Codeset Mapping This procedure is used to translate Codeset Mapping parameters Because switches sometimes differ in the codesets in which certain ISDN IEs are sent and also in the values of the opcodes of those IE Generic 2 has the capability to map the codesets and opcodes to accommodate these different implementations across systems For example System 85 R2V4 implements the TCM IE in codeset 7 Sy
102. 59 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Primary Rate Interface for AT amp T Communications 326 201 for more detailed information on these connections System 85 R2V4 Generic 1 and Generic 2 to a 4ESS Connections to a 4ESS are called special access connections The physical connection is made from customer premises to a 4ESS Toll calls go directly from the customer premises switch to the AT amp T toll network Network ISDN features and services are available through a 4ESS The physical connection to a 4ESS toll switch is made through the DIF frame to a SM9 circuit pack ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 2 14 NETWORK CONNECTIONS AND CONFIGURATIONS Framing Signaling and Line Coding A 4ESS does not place any restrictions on the framing signaling and line coding options Any applicable restrictions are related to the application and particular installation a Dial Tone Second dial tone may be provided by a 4ESS However it is recommended that the customer premises switch provide a second dial tone With this arrangement the second dial tone can be provided through use of the ARS feature on all ISDN PRI trunks that terminate on a 4ESS Touch Tone Capability ISDN PRI does not support either dial pulse addressing or touch tone signaling but provides the equivalent capabilities with ASCII character signaling on the D channel Screening Intra LATA Calls A 4ESS can be used to block intra LATA calls Howe
103. 6 Trunk Group Fa Night Terminal 8 Disable Signaling 9 AIOD Equipment Number Interface Endpoint D Channel Group Number Connected to CCO ON LINE MAJOR RUN TAPE BUSY OUT IN USE enter command Lao Figure 7 45 Procedure 116 Word 1 DS1 DMI ISDN PRI Trunk Assignments Generic 2 The DS1 channels are assigned to slot and circuit locations according to the order in which the module processor scans the equipment carrier as shown in table 7 11 DSISDN PRI Administration Channel Versus Trunk Assignments When the traditional module DS1 MFAT carrier is configured with two DS1s physical slots 3 8 16 and 21 are available for other applications If only one DS1 is configured then six additional slots are available for other applications ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 98 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 TABLE 7 11 DSI ISDN PRI Administration Channel Versus Trunk Assignments DS1 Channel Slot Circuit DS1 Channel Slot Circuit es 0 0 or 13 0 1 0 or 14 0 Ww 5 0 or 18 0 0 or 19 0 14 0 or 20 0 2 0 or 15 0 1 or 18 1 16 O 1 or 13 1 l 6 1 or 19 1 l 1 1 or 14 1 1 or 20 1 HaT l any a Ur 2 or 18 2 19 2 or 19 2 20 7 2 or 20 2 5 3 or 18 3 1 2 or 14 2 EEES eee TSE 9 2 or 19 2 20 l 12 7 3 or 20 3 or When the traditional module DS1 MFAT carrier is configur
104. 60 Word 1 DS1 DMI ISDN PRI Physical Interface Procedure 260 is required to administer each DS1 For traditional modules the ANNI1 circuit pack provides DS1 DMI BOS services while the ANN35 provides DMI MOS ISDN PRI services For universal modules the TN767_circuit_pack provides DS1 DMI services while the TN767 TN555 pair provides ISDN PRI services Figure 7 28 Procedure 260 Word l Additional DMI MOS ISDN PRI Circuit Pack Assignments Generic 2 depicts this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 7 57 ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 260 WORD 1 DS1 ISDN AND RG CIRCUIT PACK ASSIGNMENTS EQUIPMENT LOCATION sc 1 Module 12 Equipment Type 2 Cabinet 13 SC Reference 3 4 Ml Carrier Slot Application Bit Inversion SIGNALING Link Type Framing SA FX 23B D 24B Loop Length E E a a a E 24C RBS E Bit ZCS B8ZS 10 Slip Enable H E 11 External Loop DISPLAY ONLY 20 SC Information E Connected to CCO ON LINE Q MAJOR MINOR RUN TAPE BUSY OUT IN USE WAIT enter command Figure 7 28 Procedure 260 Word 1 Additional DMI MOS ISDN PRI Circuit Pack Assignments Generic 2 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 58 Fields 1 4 Field 6 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 Assigns the circuit pack to an equipment location Table 7 6 Equipment Parameters an
105. 8 5 IBM IDNX 6 3 synchronization 5 ml S multipoint 2 10 N NCTE bipolar violations 1 20 powering3 J S O network channel terminating equipment NCTE bipolar violations 20 metallic facilities configurations DCS connections and configurations diagram 6 1 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 network Contd difficulties 2 J _ ooo y O digital transmission 3 engineering 5 8 feature 7 103 7 106 high speed multiplexers 20 identifier AAR tables 7 108 ARS tables 7 105 NSF IE C 13 service 7 103 7 106 __ i y service value C 13 service feature options services network features side j specification _C 10 vendor switch connection specific facilities NSF C 6 synchronization definition 5 engineering 5 18 options Generic 7 133 System 75 R1V2 versus System 85 plan development steps 5 29 i example 5 20 issues 5 7 responsibilities B 8 amp system clock tandem tie trunk transmission equipment 1 20 tuning5 29 S NFAS definition 4 o hyperactivit on 4ESS on Generic 1 and Generic 2 9 nodal services node connections cascode 5 24 nonfacility associated signaling NFAS 4 nonfacility associated signali noninterrupted ringing generator 2 5 INDEX IN 11 nonmetallic cabling options 3 10 sid North American dialing plan 29 sd NPA NNX C 17 NPA NXX designator C 3 C 9 digits assignment 7 78 7
106. 9 2K HDLC mode 3 2 adapt 64K LAPD X 25 mode 3 2 adapt 64K LAPD X 25 mode 3 2 adapt PC ISDN 56K 64K sync LAPD X 25 mode 3 w 3270 i Emulation PC ISDN to 19 2K async HDLC mode 3 2 adapt w ASCII or mode 2 Terminal 56K 64K sync LAPD X 25 mode 3 Emulation i ISDN Advaniag 3 6K se yes LAPDINIS MPDM modular processor data module U A AU IN NN NOTES 1 A mode 2 handshake works only on 64K bps facilities such as alternate voice data or AVD Use an MPDM M1 for mode 1 calls made over robbed bit facilities Since an ISDN PRI link between a System 85 R2V4 and a Generic 1 uses these facilities this handshaking will work 2 You must use the MPDM M1 when the far end data circuit terminating equipment DCE is not another AT amp T data module or robbed bit facility does not do a mode 2 handshake Although the MPDM M1 also suppresses the handshake in mode 2 it is recommended this not be done since rate adaption would not be possible 3 Mode 3 2 adaptive means that a mode 3 handshake is attempted first An algorithm is then followed to determine the far end s mode and either switch to mode 2 or continue in mode 3 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 1 2 N INTRODUCITON Mode 3 data can only be circuit switched in Generic 1 1 and Generic 2 1 Using mode 3 on a 3270A or 3270T requires a 3270C on the far end Mode 2 on the PC PBX Connection is supported under the ASCII terminal emu
107. 9 imt009 10 101910 imt010 11 1C1911 imt011 12 1C1912 imt012 Cc Cc Cc Figure E 11 TRUNK GROUP Screen Page 3 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 E 24 TIE TRUNK SETTINGS Table E 7 Trunk Group Screen Settings Generic l describes the administration settings for the ISDN PRI specific fields in this administration screen TABLE E 7 Trunk Group Screen Settings Generic 1 FIELD SETTING REMARKS Group Number Group Type isdn pri Group Name TAC Direction two way Dial Access Service Type Far End Test No Send Display TCM In Codeset 6 7 This field displays the ISDN PRI trunk group number Enter a name one to fifteen characters in length that uniquely identifies this trunk group Enter the access code for this trunk group This is needed for SMDR reports Although dial access codes are supported for ISDN PRI trunks they are not recommended Furthermore they are not supported on System 85 All calls should be made through AAR UDP or ARS Either tie or tandem should be assigned here Tandem should be assigned if you want TCMs sent Use tie if you do not want TCMs sent Assign the number on this System 85 R2V4 to which maintenance test calls will be made to test the ISDN PRI link This number must be the real number of far end test board because test calls to this number do not undergo any routing such as through Ten Digit To Seven Digit Conversi
108. 90 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 INTRODUCTION 1 23 Common Channel Signaling Originally common channel signaling CCS meant that any of the 24 channels could be used to transmit signaling for the other 23 To offer CCS both RBS and 24th channel signaling would have to be disabled to make all 24 channels available to transmit signaling Current AT amp T applications use only the 24th channel as the signaling channel and therefore the term CCS has been used more and more as a synonym for 24th channel signaling Misuse of the term CCS and its original definition have contributed to some misunderstanding When comparing System 75 and System 85 DS1 DMI administration procedures you will find that a The current definition of CCS is used when administering System 75 and Generic 1 although it is 24th channel signaling that is actually being administered b The original definition of CCS cannot be administered for System 85 or Generic 2 however 24th channel signaling can be administered For Generic 2 the equivalent terms 23B 1D or 24th channel signaling are used rather than CCS Alternate Voice Data AVD Trunks AVD is an attribute of trunks used with System 85 R2V4 and earlier releases and System 75 R1V3 and earlier releases and all Generic 1 switches For Generic 2 bearer capability wich identifies the capabilities previously identified with AVD plus many more is used instead AVD relates a trunk group s translations to th
109. ABLING TABLE 3 5 PWR Switch Settings ESF T1 NCTE Multiline ESF T1 NCTE Standalone DIP Switch Name Pos Switch Pos Pos Number Switch Dflt Pos Number NOTE Local exchange companies LECs are currently installing Smart jacks requiring the use of a OdB line build out network LBO TABLE 3 6 XMT LBO Switch Settings DIP ESF T1 NCTE ESF T1 NCTE F Standalone Multiline Switch Name XMT LBO NOTE LECs are currently installing Smart jacks which require the use of a 0dB LBO CONFIG SWITCH SPAN SWITCH URATION FRAMING FRAMING FRAMING A GENERIC ESF gt NCTE ESF gt NCTE _ ESF gt GENERIC GENERIC 1 lt D4 gt NCTE lt ESF gt NCTE D4 gt Generic1 GENERIC 1 D4 gt NCTE D4 gt NCTE D4 gt GENERIC 1 GENERIC 1 lt ESF gt NCTE ESF gt NCTE lt ESF gt SYSTEM 85 GENERIC 1 lt D4 gt NCTE lt ESF gt NCTE D4 gt SYSTEM 85 muons GENERIC 1 D4 NCTE D4 gt NCTE D4 gt SYSTEM 85 Figure 3 1 NCTE Framing Configurations On Premises Cabling When both endpoints are in the same building cabling has three distance ranges and the required equipment depends on the range It is a
110. ATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS Administering DS1 DMI ISDN PRI services involves configuring the software translations to know what the equipment carrier configuration and circuit pack types are and what services are to be done For System 85 R1 through R2V3 switch administration may be done from the system management terminal SMT maintenance and administration panel MAAP or Remote Maintenance Administration and Traffic System RMATS II A System 85 R2V4 includes an additional administration terminal known as the visual maintenance and administration panel VMAAP These administration terminals use flipchart procedures NOTE Although flipchart procedures are used for System 85 administration Manager II screens are shown instead of the actual flipcharts Field numbers for the Manager II screens are exact correlations to field numbers for flipchart procedures Generic 2 is significantly different and may only be administered via a MS DOS based computer running the Manager II applications software The Manager II applications software provides three modes of operation The modes are called e Basic mode e Enhanced mode e Task mode The enhanced mode consists of fill in the blank screen display procedures that contain many of the same fields as the flipchart procedures However with enhanced mode each screen based procedure provides a user friendly interface with optional pop up help instructions Therefore with Manager II Generic
111. BC service although any of the conventional trunk types could also be ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 88 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 used if incoming digits have been provisioned consistently For example trunk type 41 could be used as a CBC trunk group to support MEGACOM MEGACOM 800 and SDN if the incoming digits for both MEGACOM 800 and SDN reflect extension numbers or seven digit RNX XXXX numbers Customers can choose between 0 and 7 incoming digits to a switch Field 7 Assigns the dial access code restriction Field encodes and their descriptions are 0 Allows access to the trunk group via a dial access code 1 Restricts and only allows access to the trunk group for trunk testing and for providing unattended console service Field 8 Assigns the trunk group as a Multifunction Terminal CO line appearance This is not applicable to ISDN so assign encode 0 here Field 9 Assigns the type of network access for the trunk group Encodes are 0 Allows access to the public network 1 Allows access to private network facilities Field 10 Displays and verify that the type of trunk signaling is correct ISDN uses message oriented signaling Therefore encode 20 should be displayed Procedure 100 Word 2 Trunk Group Data Translations This word is used to administer data characteristics for each trunk group including BCCOS 41 Procedure 100 Word 2 Trunk Group Data Translations depicts th
112. C 1 7 159 Permitted entries are single digit numbers less than or equal to the number administered in the Page Length field of the DIAL PLAN RECORD screen For example if the Page Length field is translated five meaning a five digit numbering plan then this field may contain the number 1 2 3 4 or 5 If the Page Length field is translated four meaning a four digit numbering plan then this field may contain the number 1 2 3 or 4 NOTE For most applications it is expected that this field will be translated with the same number as the Page Length field Ext Code Specifies a single explicit extension number or a range of extension numbers Permitted entries are any valid extension number or range of extension numbers that are defined on the DIAL PLAN RECORD screen For example assume that the Ext Len is five and that the Ext Code is administered with the digits 65 Then the range of extension numbers is 65000 through 65999 SID Prefix The number that is prefixed to the extension number to form a 10 digit Station Identification The SID prefix can be a 5 6 7 8 9 or 10 digit number or blank A typical 6 digit SID prefix would be the switch 3 digit NPA and the 3 digit NNX that is NPANNX If the number of digits in the SID prefix plus the extension length exceed ten then excess leading digits from the extension number are deleted when forming the 10 digit SID number If the SID prefix is a 10 digit number then the extension n
113. CEM to a BCM32000 2 10 System 85 R2V4 Generic 1 and Generic 2 to a 4ESS 2 13 System 85 R2V4 Generic 1 or Generic 2 to a DACS 2 15 System 85 or Generic 2 ISDN PRI to a SESS 2 15 ISDN PRI INTRA SWITCH CONNECTIONS 2 16 Generic 2 ISDN PRI with the Integrated Telemarketing Gateway Interface 2 16 AT amp T 6500 ISDN Advantage 2 19 3 DS1 TRANSMISSION AND CABLING 3 1 Network Channel Terminating Equipment NCTE 3 2 On Premises Cabling 3 6 Off Premises Cabling 3 9 NONMETALLIC CABLING OPTIONS 3 10 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 CONTENTS Vv LINE EQUALIZER AND COMPENSATION SETTINGS 3 13 System 85 Traditional Modules 3 13 Generic and Generic 2 Universal Modules 3 13 CEM AND CDM CABLING CONFIGURATIONS 3 11 4 THE DIGITAL LOSS PLAN 4 1 LOSS PLAN IMPLEMENTATION AND PROVISIONING 4 2 Generic 2 4 2 Generic 1 4 3 PORT TO PORT LOSS VALUES 4 4 DS1 DMI ISDN PRI PORT LOSSES 4 6 TERMINATING A DSI AT A CHANNEL BANK 4 6 Tie Trunk Ports 4 6 CO DID Trunk Ports 4 6 OPS Ports 4 7 5 SYNCHRONIZATION OF DIGITAL FACILITIES 5 1 THE NEED FOR SYNCHRONIZATION 5 1 SYNCHRONIZATION HIERARCHY 5 3 System 85 and Generic 2 Synchronization Architecture 5 7 System 85 and Generic 2 Synchronization Software Operation 5 9 CHANGES TO THE SCS SOFTWARE MADE AVAILABLE VIA SOFTWARE PATCHES 5 11 System 75 and Generic 1 Synchronization Architecture 5 11 System 75 and Generic 1 Synchronization Software Operation 5 12 The Exter
114. COM SDN ACCUNET and switched digital international calls NOTE For Generic 2 MEGACOM 800 service calls do not require an NSF since it is an incoming only service which cannot be tandemed to another switch as a MEGACOM 800 call For call by call trunk groups the 4ESS will check for a NSF and will reject the call if one is not present Synchronization A 4ESS is always synchronized to the AT amp T reference frequency Therefore for special access applications the System 85 or Generic 2 normally uses a 4ESS as the master clock source A particular ISDN PRI facility may or may not be selected as the clock reference to the switch depending on the use and reliability of other interfaces The rules and considerations for selecting a synchronization source are detailed in chapter 5 Synchronization of Digital Facilities System 85 R2V4 Generic 1 or Generic 2 to a DACS The DACS does not interpret DMI MOS or ISDN PRI and does not support those types of connections However D4 ESF and RBS are supported and DACS will pass PRI System 85 or Generic 2 ISDN PRI to a 5ESS A SESS is most frequently used by a LEC It provides digital CO services both to subscribers and customer premises switches For ISDN applications a SESS must be equipped with 5e4 2 or later software A System 85 or Generic 2 ISDN PRI connects to the extended digital subscriber line EDSL circuit pack in a 5ESS only those configured with 5e4 2 Generic implement the
115. CP data modules must use the modem pooling capability to transmit data over DS1 T1 RBS facilities Analog data ports must be configured with analog modems 24th channel signaling multiplexes all signaling information for channels 1 through 23 into the 24th channel This makes available the full 64K bps bandwidth of channels 1 through 23 for voice and or digital data transmission called alternate voice data AVD AVD allows 64K bps digital data to be transmitted over those digital trunk facilities that use 24th channel signaling Although AVD trunks are designed for digital data transmission they may also be used for voice transmission However because of a modem pooling limitation AVD trunks cannot easily be used for analog voice grade data transmission 24th channel signaling is required for those trunk groups that are translated AVD from procedure 101 field 17 Either the AT amp T proprietary format or the DMI BOS format may be used with another System 85 or System 75 The DMI BOS format is required to provide 24th channel signaling capability with other vendors digital switches 24th channel signaling both methods is not compatible with D4 channel banks The AT amp T proprietary format is provided by the ANNIIC version 8 or later circuit pack All previous versions will eventually be replaced via a class A change The DMI BOS format is provided by the ANNI1D or ANNIIE circuit pack When 24th channel signaling is optioned th
116. CS is sometimes referred to as AMI alternate mark inversion Also B8ZS is required if this trunk is used for 64K bps unrestricted data The analogous Generic 1 administration is in the Zero Code Suppression field of the Ds 1 CIRCUIT PACK screen This is the slip count enable field It should be assigned according to the overall synchronization plan The analogous Generic 1 administration is in the Slip Detection field of the Ds 1 CIRCUIT PACK screen ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 TIE TRUNK SETTINGS E 3 TABLE E 1 continued System 85 R2V4 Administration Settings PROCEDURE WORD FIELD REMARKS 260 11 12 13 14 15 This field is for loop around testing External loop around should be enabled only during a maintenance test The analogous Generic 1 administration is in the Remote Looparound Test field of the Ds1 CIRCUIT PACK screen The setting for this field depends on whether the ISDN PRI circuit pack is a timing source This field must be set consistent with the overall synchronization plan which is developed according to current methods and procedures The setting for this field depends on whether the ISDN PRI circuit pack is a timing source This field must be set consistent with the overall synchronization plan which is developed according to current methods and procedures The analogous Generic administration is in the Synchronization Source field of the SYNCHRON
117. DN Caller Specifies whether the hunt group name or the member name will be sent to the Disp originating extension Field encodes and their descriptions are e grp name specifies that the hunt group name will be displayed on the originating extension display e mbr name specifies that the hunt group member name will be sent to the originating extension Terminating Extension Group ISDN PRI Applications If the extension is part of a Terminating Extension Group TEG then the voice terminal can be assigned a TEG button and associated status lamp Furthermore if the voice terminal has a digital display then depending on administration details either the TEG group name or TEG member name can be displayed Figure 7 89 Terminating Extension Group Screen depicts this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 7 165 TERMINATING EXTENSION GROUP Page 1 of 1 Group Number Group Extension Group Name Coverage Path Security Code COR I ISDN Caller Display GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS Ext Name Ext Name Te ot 3 2 4 Figure 7 89 Terminating Extension Group Screen ISDN Caller Specifies whether the hunt group name or the member name will be sent to the Display originating extension Field encodes and their descriptions are e grp name specifies that the TEG group name will be sent to the originating extension e mbr
118. DN PRI service application fields or those fields that require special or additional considerations are mentioned here Send SID This field determines whether the Station Identification SID number is sent to the network for both incoming and or outgoing ISDN calls For outgoing calls the user s calling party number is sent For incoming calls the number associated with the answering party is sent Field encodes and their descriptions are y Send the SID NOTE If SID is enabled then the SID PREFIX TABLE screen must be completed n Do not send the SID default NOTE Both SID and ANI significantly enhance the AT amp T ISDN network capabilities The customer can subscribe to the SID ANI service and have a representation of the calling party number forwarded from the AT amp T network to the terminating switch Therefore consider provisioning and enabling the SID ANI option as part of the installation administration process ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 148 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 Send Name This field determines whether the calling originating party s administered name is sent to the network for outgoing calls and whether the connected answering party s name is sent to the network for incoming calls Field encodes and their descriptions are y Enable this capability You can enable this field however there may be cases where it is desirable to dis
119. DS1 circuit packs must be configured with an option strap This strap connects backplane pins 208 and 224 For J58888N1 List 2 Modification C or later the carrier is manufactured with the strap always installed on slots O and 13 The strap may be field installed on slots 5 and 18 as required In line only mode a DS1 provides the equivalent of three analog OPS circuit packs each containing eight ports The line only DS1 thus requires three carrier slots one for the actual circuit pack and two more as virtual slots The term virtual is used to represent slots whose backplane signals are used by the line only mode DS1 but not physically occupied by the interface Virtual slots result from a physical limitation in the number of time slots that are available in each carrier slot Only 8 time slots per carrier slot are available to OPS circuit packs Since a DS1 uses 24 time slots it must use the time slots associated with the occupied carrier slot plus those from 2 additional slots The two virtual slots associated with the real line only mode DS1 always occupy the two carrier slots immediately to the right of the real DS1 These two virtual slots must be left vacant Otherwise circuit packs inserted in these slots may be damaged along with the DS1 A fully equipped carrier contains four line only DS1s and has four other slots available for analog type circuit packs These other slots are physical slot numbers 3 8 16 and 21 Therefore a sin
120. DURE 321 WORD 1 AAR ROUTE TABLES Pattern Number Preference Number Trunk Group Facility Restriction Level Warning Tone Off Net Number of Digits Deleted Digit Collect DC Signal Ignore ONY DO B UNP Oxxx Allowed eons Bp m IXC ISDN Network Identifier onnected to cco ON LINE Q MAJOR MINOR RUN TAPE BUSY OUT CT enter command L F paT Ls HELP F6 FIELD F 7 INPUT F8 CMDS Figure 7 52 Procedure 321 Word 1 AAR Route Tables Generic 2 Fields 1 9 The ISDN PRI does not place any new or additional considerations or translating these fields The codes and digits translated depend on each AAR plan and other switch and network considerations ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 108 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 Field 10 Specifies either the number designation of the interexchange carrier IXC or the ISDN Network Service Identifier for this trunk group The IXC ISDN network identifier enables the switch to provide equal access capability by populating either the NSF IE or the Transit Network Selection IE If sending an NSF IE and a particular IXC vendor number is specified in this field that entry is included in the NSF IE If no IXC vendor number is specified an is created automatically in the Transit Network Selection IE Permitted field entries may be any number within the range of 0 through 999 When a trunk group is rout
121. December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 PORT TYPES INSTALLATION COMPATIBILITIES 6 3 SIG TYPE ANN11 REQ APPLICATIONS SUPPORTERD Robbed Bit C or E Voice grade tie DID amp Co trunks OPS lines connections to D4 channel banks DSCs ACCUNET switched digital Proprietary C or E AVD tie trunks between System 85s and between System 85 and System 75 24th Chan DMI BOS E Proprietary 24th channel format applications plus connections to any endpoint conforming to 24th Chan the AT amp T Digital Multiplexed Interface Technical Specification Examples include 3B5 hosts HP3000 hosts and IBM IDNX multiplexers These endpoints are called DMI BOS endpoints in these notes Other vendor equipment is certified by AT amp T for this connectivity Certified equipment requires an ANN1IE at the System 85 end Application issues about the ANNIIC and ANNIIJE are summarized below a It is not necessary to administer a DMI trunk type 108 or 109 or set the Application Type in procedure 260 to DMI BOS to use DMI BOS signaling To get DMI BOS use an ANNIIJE and administer 24th channel signaling on the ANNIIE by setting field 8 in procedure 260 to 0 This causes ANNIIJE firmware to use the DMI BOS signaling format for all trunk types administered on that ANNIIE The only exception is where an ANNIIE is connected to an ANNIIC that is also administered for 24th channel signaling see item c below ANNIIE provides both DMI BOS and proprietary 2
122. ED MODE PROCEDURE 309 WORD 1 ARS ROUTE TABLES ARS Plan Pattern Number B Preference Number Trunk Group Facility Restriction Level Warning Tone Distant Area Code NPA Send 1 For Toll Toll Table Index Number of Digits Deleted Digit Collect DC Signal Ignore IXC ISDN Network Identifier ale 2 Sy 4 Dis 6 Ta 8 Recon enter command e Figure 7 19 Procedure 309 Word 1 ARS System 85 R2V4 Fields 1 11 The ISDN PRI does not place any new or additional considerations on translating these fields The codes digits translated are generally dependent on each ARS plan and other switch network considerations Field 12 Specifies either the number designation of the interexchange carrier IXC or the ISDN Network Service Identifier for the trunk group The IXC ISDN network identifier enables the switch to provide equal access capability by populating either the NSF IE or the Transit Network Selection IE If sending an NSF IE and a particular IXC vendor number is specified in this field that entry is included in the NSF IE If no IXC vendor number is specified an is created automatically in the Transit Network Selection IE Permitted field entries may be any number within the range of 0 through 999 When the trunk group is routed over private network ISDN PRI transmission facilities then no IXC ISDN network is used and the 0 option must be translated Each network provider of ISDN s
123. Each DS1 or multifunction analog terminal MFAT carrier will support a maximum of four DS1s OPS applications These may be located in slots 0 5 13 and 18 The DS1 channels are assigned to slot and circuit locations according to the order in which the module processor scans the equipment carrier Table 7 1 DS1 Administration Channel Versus Line Assignments lists the equipment location versus DS1 channel assignments for DS1 OPS Analog equipment location assignments are administered by procedure 000 word 1 with field 8 translated a 2 The DS1 OPS channels are translated to equipment locations individual extensions with procedure 000 word 1 with field 8 translated 9 rather than with procedure 116 that was used for trunks 5 Selects the DS1 used to provide 64K bps data with DMI MOS or ISDN PRI trunk facilities When encode 5 is administered procedure 262 is automatically translated with standard default options These default options should later be checked for consistency with the distant end refer to procedure 262 TABLE 7 1 DS1 Administration Channel Versus Line Assignments DS1 Channel Slot Circuit DS1 Channel Slot Circuit Pt 00 0 1370 or i3 04 s 134 o 18 210 610 140 or T I 6 Tar8 oF 1976 320 710 1570 or 2000 18 If 3 714154 or 2004 for S31 or 18 _16 05 515 135 oF 185 Sao TTY 65 145 oF 1975 Pe YTS or 207 S 95 715 1515 or 2015 70253 T 06 56 1346 or 18 6 e fonno w 16 6
124. Fields 12 15 V1 V4 Not applicable for DS1 DMI ISDN PRI applications Therefore a dash is appropriate Procedure 260 Word 1 DS1 DMI ISDN PRI Physical Interface System 85 R2V3 DS1 administration software procedure 260 contains all the same fields options and considerations as R2V1 and V2 Procedure 260 also provides a new field 14 for defining new application types for DS1 facilities The R2V3 systems require the ANNIIC ANNI1ID or ANNIIE vintage circuit pack to provide the OPS line option The ANN11D or ANNIIE is required to provide the DMI BOS option ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIRMENTS SYSTEM 85 7 7 System 85 R2V1 and V2 only provide trunks However R2V3 and V4 provide trunks analog OPS lines and DMI BOS trunks System 85 R2V4 and later versions provides DMI BOS trunks refer to table 7 1 DS Administration Channel Versus Line Assignments Depending on the application type encode translated there may be additional administration slot and port grouping restrictions Procedure 260 is used to administer the DS1 DMI ISDN PRI Interfaces ANN11B ANN11C ANN11D ANNIIE or ANN35 Figure 7 4 Procedure 260 Word 1 System Configuration Circuit Pack Assignments System85 R2V4 shows procedure 260 word 1 ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 260 WORD 1 DS1 ISDN AND RG CIRCUIT PACK ASSIGNMENTS EQUIPMENT LOCATION sc 1 Module EJ 12 Equipment Type E
125. For procedure 100 word 2 Field 1 specifies the trunk group number and field 2 specifies a BCCOS number for this trunk group For interworked tandem calls through the switch where the calling trunk is not ISDN PRI trunk and the called trunk is the BCCOS of the non ISDN PRI trunk is used to define a BC for the outgoing setup message over the ISDN PRI trunk This COS also defines other routing parameters For procedure 100 word 3 Field 2 assigns a trunk group as ISDN PRI that has ISDN PRI signaling type 20 This causes ISDN PRI message oriented signaling MOS to occur for the trunk group Field 8 prevents the sending of various IEs over the trunk group specified in field 1 For specific information on routing rules refer to appendix C Administrative Procedure Summary For specific information on administering a Generic 2 to a 4ESS see DEFINITY Communications System Generic 2 1 to 4ESS Via ISDN PRI Access 555 037 237 For specific information on proper implementation of BCCOS refer to DEFINITY Communications System Generic 2 Administration Procedures 555 104 506 ISDN Call Processing ISDN PRI is a trunk signaling type ISDN trunk signaling is applied on a per trunk group basis and is compatible with most existing switch features ISDN trunk signaling also supports many new networking features as described next Outgoing Calls For outgoing calls ISDN trunk groups may be categorized as those that 1 Require that address d
126. H ISDN PRI DIGITAL CO WITH DCP INTERFACE ISDN PRI DEFINITY DATA MODULES GENERIC 2 E A Ree E AEE E E NE EAE E E WITH ka pU A REEERE EE E E E E E A E E A a N a ISDN PRI PRIVATE NETWORK AND BRI INTERFACE ISDN PRI VOICE TERMINALS NFAS a DEFINITY GENERIC 2 NETH SYSTEM 85 R2V4 y ISDN PRI GENERIC hfe DR BRI INTERFACE VENDOR SWITCH DATA MODULES WITH ISDN PRI Figure 1 2 Generic 2 ISDN Network Configuration Generic 1 and Generic 2 provide ISDN PRI but do not support wideband channels Additionally ISDN BRI is not currently supported in Generic 1 However end to end digital connections are permitted via line side DCP interface voice terminals and DCP interface data modules Figure 1 3 Generic 1 ISDN Network Configuration shows a Generic in a sample network ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 INTRODUCTION 1 21 TABLE 1 2 Data Module Capabilities User Data Bit Protocol Handshake Invert Packaging ee sync be mode 2 56K sync DDS mode 2 to 19 2K both ved HDLC mode 2 sync yes none sync no DDS to 19 2K both yes HDLC to 19 2K both yes HDLC mode 3 2 adapt 64K sync ae LAPD X 25 mode 3 2 adapt 64K LAPD X 25 mode 3 PC PBX to 19 2K HDLC mode 3 2 adapt Conn w ASCII or mode 2 Term Emul LAPD X 25 mode 3 2 adapt PC PBX sync LAPD X 25 mode 3 Conn w 3270 Emulation 7500 Series 64K none no BRI Sets 56K DDS no to 1
127. ION 1 5 ISDN PRI LINE SIDE TRUNK SIDE PUBLIC NETWORK DCP INTERFACE VOICE TERMINALS 4E11 DIGITAL TOLL OFFICE WITH ISDN PRI Phase 1 DIGITAL FX CO WITH ISDN PRI SESS DIGITAL CO WITH ISDN PRI SYSTEM 85 R2 V4 WITH ISDN PRI PRIVATE NETWORK SYSTEM 85 DCP INTERFACE R2 V4 WITH OTHER DATA MODULES ISDN PRI VENDOR SWITCH WITH ISDN PRI Figure 1 1 System 85 R2V4 ISDN Configuration With NFAS if two or more PRI pipes are present an optional D channel backup feature is available One D channel is administered as the primary D channel on one DS1 and the secondary D channel on another DS1 Only one D channel per primary secondary pair can be active at a time If the primary D channel fails the signaling function is switched automatically to the secondary sometimes called the backup D channel Without D channel backup D channel failure results in loss of service for all calls passing through a PRI pipe Generic 2 offers ISDN BRI however some BRI capabilities are not initially available Figure 1 2 Generic 2 ISDN Network Configuration shows a Generic 2 switch in a sample network ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 1 6 INTRODUCITON TSDN PRI LINE SIDE TRUNK SIDE PUBLIC NETWORK DCP INTERFACE DIGITAL VOICE TERMINALS TOLL OFFICE WIIH 4ESS DIGITAL FX CO WIT
128. IZATION screen Assign a 5 for ISDN PRI in this field Assign a hyphen here This setting is for use when ZCS line coding is used If for some reason B8ZS is assigned in field 9 then you must assign a 0 for no bit inversion on the D channel because Generic 1 never inverts the bits with B8ZS and the two systems must agree 262 1 4 Assign the ANN35 to the proper module cabinet carrier and slot The analogous Generic administration is the command add dsl lt parameters gt Assign a 0 here for user or a 1 for network When connected to another communications system one communications system is user and the other is network Thus if you assign a System 85 R2V4 as network you must administer the Generic as user The analogous Generic 1 administration is in the interface field of the Ds 1 CIRCUIT PACK screen ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 E 4 TIE TRUNK SETTINGS TABLE E 1 continued System 85 R2V4 Administration Settings PROCEDURE WORD FIELD REMARKS 262 8 12 Assign a 3 here if a System 85 is equipped with an SN261 analog digital facility test circuit pack If an SN261 is not present assign a 1 here A 3 allows level 2 and 3 tests in procedure 648 A 1 allows only level 2 tests These fields are for the terminal endpoint identifier and various timers and counters They are assigned default values when the ANN35 board is assigned in procedure
129. N11 circuit pack RBS does not use the 24th channel to transmit signaling information 24th channel signaling via the BOS interface uses A and B bits for signaling and the channel structure is such that the ones density is never violated Assigns that the signaling information contents of the D channel is inverted ap Either 0 or 1 must be administered for ISDN PRI Recall that B8ZS is recommended for ISDN PRI applications However not all transmission facilities will permit B8ZS on an end to end basis Administration must be coordinated with the network facilities distant end to ensure compatibility NOTE This field must be a dash when ZCS line coding is selected with ISDN and for automatic inversion of the D channel m Assigns that the signaling information contents of the D channel is not inverted Option 1 no inversion is strongly recommended for use when B8ZS is administered in field 9 NOTE When connected to a 4ESS you must inform the 4ESS on the order form whether bits are or are not inverted ok Field 16 Field encodes and their descriptions are Dash DSI DMI BOS applications should be administered with a dash 0 Indicates that DMI MOS ISDN PRI applications use metallic cable facilities 1 Indicates that DMI MOS ISDN PRI applications use nonmetallic cable facilites NOTE Terminating fiber cable directly on the DS1 MFAT carrier or universal module port carrier is not currently suppor
130. NDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 154 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 Many other scenarios may be developed for applying a plan Various reasons may be used Figure 7 82 Trunk Group Screen Page 3 ISDN PRI depicts this procedure CBC TRUNK GROUP USAGE ALLOCATION Page 3 of 11 Usage Allocation Plan 1 Usage Allocation Plan 2 Usage Allocation Plan 3 Service Feature Min Max Service Feature Min Max Service Feature Min Max Chan Chan Chan Chan Chan Chan Usage Allocation Plan Figure 7 82 Trunk Group Screen Page 3 ISDN PRI Before administering the Usage Allocation Plans it is first necessary to define a strategy for each plan For example plan 1 could specify those actions to be taken during a normal business day plan 2 could specify those actions to be taken during non working hours of the business day during lunch and when phones are not attended while plan 3 could specify those actions to be taken during the weekend An alternate example could just use plans 1 and 2 on a scheduled basis but have plan 3 defined and available for fixed allocation Obviously many other strategies could be defined Service Feature Permitted entries include any of the predefined or additional Service Features listed on Min Chan the NETWORK FACILITIES screen that this trunk group supports Also the special identifier other may be
131. NE 9 MAJOR MINOR RUN TAPE BUSY OUT IN USE enter command e CL es bata __ Fs EE Fe FIELD F7 input rs cups Figure 7 1 Procedure 275 Word 4 System COS and Miscellaneous Service Assignments System 85 R2V4 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 Field 14 V4 Only For System 85 R2V4 field 14 must always be translated Field encodes and their descriptions are Dash required when ISDN is not provided Current policy is to always ship ISDN PRI software with the switch However the administration software still provides the option to show that this software is not provided 0 Must be translated when ISDN is provided but disabled 1 Must be translated to enable ISDN service Procedure 276 Word 1 Other Feature Groups Use this procedure to turn optional networking features such as AAR DCS SNC Look Ahead Interflow and Intergrated Telemarketing Gateway ITG or to see wich of these features are turned on Figure 7 2 Procedure 276 Word 1 Feture Group COS System 85 R2V4 depicts this procedure ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 276 WORD 1 FEATURE GROUP CLASS OF SERVICE Standard Network Multipremise DCS AUTOVON Call Vectoring Tenant Services System 85 SE Look Ahead Interflow ON DOB wWNH ce A m Integrated Telemarketing Gateway DISPLAY ONLY 11 Use Procedure Connected to CCO ON LINE MAJ
132. NOR J RUN TAPE BUSY OUT IN USE WAIT enter command e CC fs bata FS HELP Fe Fretp F7 InpuT Fs cups Figure 7 22 Procedure 321 Word 5 AAR and Transit Network Identifiers System 85 R2V4 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4 Fields 5 9 Field 5 Field 6 Field 7 Field 8 Field 9 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 7 49 Specifies the AAR pattern number Permitted encodes are through 640 Specifies the AAR preference number Permitted encodes are sequential numbers within the range of through 16 Translates the ISDN trunk type Recall that for ISDN applications the trunk type may be translated as fixed that is one specific type or dynamic which may include those from the fixed category Generally the trunk type selected will depend on the network service or feature value which is translated in field 4 Table 7 4 Network Service Feature Options shows the relationships Specifies the network service requested Refer to table 7 4 Network Service Feature Options for the appropriate encode Table 7 5 Administration Summary summarizes administration of NSF in word 5 field 4 and IXC in word 1 field 10 where TNS is transit network service TABLE 7 5 Administration Summary Procedure 321 Word 5 Word 1 Field 4 Field 10 IE NSF IXC Results coded coded NSF dash coded TNS coded dash NSF dash dash
133. NPA NXX Thousand s Digit Figure 7 6 Procedure 354 Word 3 NPA NXX Assignment System 85 R2V4 Field 1 This field should be translated for both private and public network connections The NPA NXX designator is a 2 digit field and must be within the range of 1 through 99 Field 2 This 3 digit field should contain the numbering plan area NPA which is also called the area code Assignment is therefore dependent on the particular location and application Field 3 This 3 digit field should specify the NXX which is also called the office code of the local exchange company LEC Permitted values must be those numbers within the range of 200 through 999 and should be the office code of the local exchange Field 4 This 1 digit field specifies the thousands digit When not used it should contain When used digits 0 through 9 may be assigned Use this field only with three digit dial plans Do not use it with four or five digit dial plans Procedure 000 Word 4 NPA NXX Index Designator Depending on how the switch is used procedure 000 word 4 may or may not be translated Specifically field 4 of word 4 is used for partitioning ISDN or both and must be translated when a The switch transmits the calling party number or connected number to the network b The switch provides unique extension number partitions Field 4 of procedure 000 word 4 need not be translated when the switch does not transmit SID o
134. NPUT Figure 7 23 Procedure 107 Word 1 ATMS Terminating Test Line Assignment System 85 R2V4 Field 1 Identifies those ISDN PRI trunk groups accessed by the trunk verification features Permitted encodes are previously defined trunk group numbers from 18 to 999 Field 2 Dash is appropriate for voice terminal and attendant console applications If a transmission test line is used its type should be specified Fields 3 18 Assigns digits for the terminating test line Procedure 107 words 2 7 need only be translated whenever ATMS is used or TVS for ISDN Procedure 108 Word 1 ISDN Trunk Group Terminating Test Line Number Digits This procedure is used for ISDN PRI testing purposes with procedure 648 test 3 This procedure translates the line number that identifies the loop around termination for the particular B channel This test line number must be assigned for both private and public network configurations Whether more than one terminating test line number is needed depends on the number of ISDN PRI links and whether they terminate on more than one switch Procedure 108 Word 1 ISDN Terminating Test Line Assignments System 85 R2V4 depicts this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 7 51 ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE ISDN TERMINATING TEST LINE ASSIGNMENT 1 Trunk Group E TERMINATING TEST LINE TELEPHONE DIGITS Digit D
135. NY DS1 DSI DMI DSX 1 TRANSMISSION DSI DMI OR D4 MEDIA DSX 1 OR D4 CHANNEL CHANNEL BANK CEM BANK a NOTE DSX 1 psx 1 M DS1 DMI P CDM CDM NOTE DS1 DMI DSX 1 DSX 1 OR D4 DSX 1 OR D4 CHANNEL CHANNEL BANK BANK DEICATED CHANNEL CHANNEL DEDICATED A TOATIONE UNITS UNITS CHANNEL Ss APPLICATIONS C COMBINATION CDM AND CEM NOTE Requires the bundling signal option Figure 3 5 CEM and CDM Cable Configurations ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 3 12 DS1 TRANSMISSION AND CABLING LINE EQUALIZER AND COMPENSATION SETTINGS The Generic 1 and Generic 2 DS1 circuit packs generate a signal that is preequalized Preequalized means that the bipolar signal is shaped so that when it reaches the cable end it conforms to the DSX 1 power specification System 85 Traditional Modules Traditional modules may be equipped with the ANN11 and ANN35 circuit packs Preequalization is provided by properly setting the three equalizer switches on the circuit packs The three switches must be set for either half or all of the distance to the far end The correct equalizer and compensation setting is determined based on the cable configuration If a DS1 terminates at a NCTE or DSX 1 cross connect the total distance to the NCTE or DSX 1 should be used If a DS1 terminates on another DS1 then half the distance to the other interface should be used This setting is done in increments of about 133 feet
136. OR MINOR RUN TAPE BUSY OUT IN USE WAIT i enter command CFs cata J JFS eL Fe FIELD F7_ input Fe c ps Figure 7 2 Procedure 276 Word 1 Feature Group COS System 85 R2V4 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 7 5 Procedure 250 Word 1 DS1 Carrier Designation Primarily procedure 250 is used to assign the equipment carriers to a module and cabinet Additionally it is also used to assign the type of carrier the carrier port electrical number and whether the carrier is equipped with a synchronization clock SC Figure 7 3 Procedure 250 Word 1 System Configuration Carriers System 85 R2V4 depicts procedure 250 word 1 ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 250 WORD 1 CARRIERS CARRIER LOCATION LOCAL RMI LOCATION 1 Module EJ 12 Module 2 Cabinet H 13 Cabinet 3 Carrier 14 Carrier sE Ss Slot 4 Carrier Type MODULE CONTROL Es I 0 PDS 6 7 Duplicated 8 TMS 9 Port Electrical Carrier EJ 10 TMS Electrical Carrier 11 SC Equipped Connected to CCO ON LINE V9 MAJOR MINOR RUN TAPE BUSY OUT IN USE WAIT enter command s Figure 7 3 Procedure 250 Word 1 System Configuration Carriers System 85 R2V4 DS1 circuit packs may only be installed within DS1 port carriers Each System 85 that is equipped with one or more DS1s will also contain a TN463 SC For single module systems the SC is located in the
137. OTE The screen that follows these case examples depicts a line entry Service Feature Called Len Called Number for each case The first top entry is for case 1 the second entry from the top is for case 2 the last entry shown is for case 7 Case 2 e Service Feature field is specified for example mega800 e Called Len field is specified with a requirement of N digits for example N 5 e Called Number field is specified with M leading digits where M is a number of digits less than N for example the single digit 8 Application for Case I being selected most restrictive Assume the switch receives a MEGACOM 800 call that has a called party number IE with 85542 Based on the Service Feature and Called Len fields alone this call will match both case 1 and case 2 However on analyzing the called party number the incoming call handling software will select Case 1 since it is the more restrictive match Each incoming call is searched against every screen entry to identify the appropriate match Application for Case 2 being selected Assume the switch receives a MEGACOM 800 call that has a called party number IE with the digits 84000 Based on the Service Feature and Called Len fields alone this call will match both Case 1 and case 2 However on analyzing the called party number it is determined that the leading digits 84000 do not match the digits for Case 1 but do match for Case 2 Case 3 e Service Feature
138. OTE This encode should be translated for all DMI MOS to host computer links 2 Selects level 3 network layer testing Level 3 does loopback testing and requires the use of a separate special test line SN261C Analog Digital Facility Test Circuit 3 Permits both level 2 and level 3 tests to be done NOTE This encode should be translated for all ISDN PRI connections that terminate on a 4ESS ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 18 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 Field 7 V4 Only This field will accept encodes within the range of O through 126 However all point to point nonswitched links such as an System 85 R2V4 DMI MOS link to a host computer must be administered with encode 0 Encodes 1 through 126 are not used at this time Field 8 V4 Only The field will accept encodes ranging from 0 through 255 corresponding to 1 second intervals for an elapsed time of up to 4 minutes and 15 seconds The default value for this T203 timer is 30 meaning 30 seconds This timer monitors the facility data link and specifies the maximum time allowed without frames being exchanged on a data link layer connection Field 9 V4 Only The field will accept encodes ranging from 0 through 255 which corresponds to 0 1 second per increment for a maximum range of up to 25 5 seconds The default value for this T200 timer is 10 meaning 1 second This timer monitors multiple frame operations on the data li
139. Pack Screen Common Channel Signaling 7 68 DS1 Circuit Pack Screen ISDN PRI Signaling and 7 69 DS1 Circuit Pack Screen ISDN EXT Signaling depict the three possible ways to use this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 128 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 DS1 CIRCUIT PACK Page 1 of 1 Location __ Name Line Compensation 1 Framing Mode esf DMI BOS y Zero Code Suppression zcs Signaling Mode common chan MAINTENANCE PARAMETERS Slip Detection n Remote Loop Around Test n Figure 7 67 DS1 Circuit Pack Screen Common Channel Signaling DS1 CIRCUIT PACK Page 1 of 1 Location Name Zero Code Suppression zcs Signaling Mode isdn pri Connect pbx Line Compensation 1 Framing Mode esf Interface user MAINTENANCE PARAMETERS Slip Detection n Remote Loop Around Test n Figure 7 68 DS1 Circuit Pack Screen ISDN PRI Signaling ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 7 129 DS1 CIRCUIT PACK Page 1 of 1 Location Name Line Compensation 1 Zero Code Suppression b8zs Framing Mode esf Signaling Mode isdn ext MAINTENANCE PARAMETERS Slip Detection n Remote Loop Around Test n Figure 7 69 DS1 Circuit Pack Screen ISDN EXT Signaling Service Facility Options Location A display only field specifying the carrier and slot of the DS1 I
140. R1V3 7 113 DS1 Circuit Pack Options 7 127 Network Synchronization Options DS1 and ISDN PRI Applications 7 133 Trunk Group Trunk Group Members DS1 Trunk Applications 7 135 Processor Interface Data Module ISDN PRI Applications Usage Allocation Plan Assignment Schedule ISDN PRI Applications Trunk Group Member Assignments ISDN PRI Trunk Applications SID Prefix Table ISDN PRI Applications 7 158 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 CONTENTS ix Routing Patterns ISDN PRI Applications Hunt Group ISDN PRI Applications 7 163 Terminating Extension Group ISDN PRI Applications 7 164 Signaling Group ISDN PRI Applications 7 165 8 MAINTENANCE AND ALARMS 8 1 GENERIC 1 AND GENERIC 2 ISDN PRI MAINTENANCE PHILOSOPHY GENERIC 2 MAINTENANCE CAPABILITIES AND CONCERNS 8 1 Generic 2 Maintenance Procedures 8 2 Summary of Generic 2 Maintenance Capabilities 8 5 GENERIC 1 MAINTENANCE CAPABILITIES AND CONCERNS 8 5 Generic 1 Maintenance Procedures Summary of Generic 1 Maintenance Capabilities 8 7 ALARMS 8 7 Circuit Pack Alarms 8 7 Facility Alarms 8 8 A ADMINISTRATION REQUIREMENTS A 1 B SAMPLE INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE PROBLEMS B 1 TRANSLATIONS BASED PROBLEMS B 1 TRUNKS AND TRUNK GROUPS B 3 CDMs B 5 CEMs B 5 D4 Channel Banks B 7 SYNCHRONIZATION RELATED PROBLEMS B 8 Loss of or No Synchronization B 9 Leavenworth Loop B 9 D4 Synchronization Problems B 10 Digital CO Sy
141. Receive Transmit Codeset Mapping Generic 2 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 74 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4 Assigns a codeset map number such as defined in procedure 262 word 3 Field encodes and their descriptions are e Dash which disables codeset mapping e Any number between 0 and 15 that is previously defined with procedure 262 word 33 Specifies whether codeset mapping is for incoming messages or outgoing messages Field encodes and their descriptions are 0 Assigns mapping for incoming messages 1 Assigns mapping for outgoing messages From a Generic 2 perspective incoming means mapped from Codeset 6 to Codeset 7 While outgoing means Codeset 6 is mapped to Codeset 7 Two way trunk groups will normally have a Codeset Map translated for both incoming and outgoing Specifies a mapped from codeset number Permitted encodes are 0 to 7 These numbers correspond to the respective codesets on a number per number basis NOTE Currently codeset 1 through codeset 5 are reserved for future use Thus only encodes 6 and 7 are applicable for the codeset fields If field 2 is translated 0 for incoming then encode 7 is appropriate for field 3 If field 2 is translated 1 for outgoing then encode 6 is appropriate for field 3 Identifies the IE code to be mapped from Field encodes and their descriptions are Dash is
142. S line coding 1 17 2 3 bit compression multiplexer BCM 2 10 error rate 10 1 13 8 4 oriented signaling 2 3 synchronization 5 1 blue alarm 8 5 bundling signaling C cable comparisons B 5 cabling ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 cabling Contd CEM and CDM configurations DS1 transmission metallic nonmetallic options off premises on premises Call by Call Service Selection advantages description Generic 1 services 7 127 O ISDN public network connections 7 103 1 29 o trunk type 120 called party IE 1 29 calling line ID calling number identifier call reference IE 29 call reference value CRV cancelers echo 3 9 o CAS 1 32 o cascode node connections 5 24 CBC Service Selection 7 30 ____ CCITT BOS specification MOS specification 7 ze SS7 standards 2 CCR 2 8 CcsA 34 o CDM applications 2 9 framing format master clock 5 20 terminal transmission equipment 3 1__ _ id CEM cabling configurations framing format master clock 5 20 terminal equipment connections 2 0 terminal transmission equipment Centralized Attendant Service CAS channel B 1 9 bank D4 1 1 2 5 D type 1 1 bank loop timing 5 3 bearer 1 9 INDEX IN 3 channel Contd circuit switched 7 10 combination 4 6 D 1 9 delta 2 21 o division multiplexer CDM 2 9 drop and insert capability 6 2________ expansion multiplexer CEM 2 10 D2
143. S 1 9 for hybrid module 5 9 for traditional module 5 9 frame 7 10 FXO channel units 2 8 hyperactivity2 2 metallic cabling NFAS configuration 9 nonmetallic cabling options preequalized signal 3 3 primary timing reference 5 8 robbed bit signaling robbed bit signaling RBS 1 8 1 14 secondary timing reference 5 8 signaling 17 9 signaling types 1 14 slip rate 5 10 synchronization 5 1 TN767 5 9 transmission and cabling 3 7 sd trunks B VBR signaling ZCS line coding 1 17 DS1 ASDN PRI administration channel versus trunk assignments DS4 bit rate 3 1 o DS DSX 1 cross connect 3 1 distance limitations line compensation A termination 3 13 vendor interface 2 4 DTE 1 18 7 14 S y O DTMF 2 6 dual tone multifrequency signaling DTMF 2 6 E echo cancelers 3 9 SSS EIA data terminations digital loss plan specification System 85 vendor switch 2 4 digital tie trunk pad group 4 2 E amp M 2 5 endpoints 2 3 engineering network synchronization and 5 8 equalizer and compensation settings 3 3 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 equipment parameters and permitted translation encodes 7 58_ S OE ER channel unit 2 5 errored second ES 8 10 ES 8 10 ESF framing format ANN11C ANNI11E feature comparison es description 2 11 DS1 signal 8 8 reliability restrictions 2 3 superframe 3 excessive slips extended digital subscri
144. S1 s signal This event is known as the LFA alarm The LFA alarm is also known as the red alarm because a red LED lights on the D4 channel bank when this alarm is on ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 D TRUNK TYPE AND SIGNALING TYPE COMPATIBILITY TABLES This appendix contains three tables that_define trunk type to signaling type compatibility for System 85 R2V1 through R2V4 and Generic 2 Table D 1 Trunk Signaling Cross references provides on a trunk type basis the default signaling type the feature and direction compatibility and the valid signaling types Table D 2 R2V4 Alternate Signaling Type Translations provides on a trunk type basis a translation of other than the default valid signaling type to standard signaling type for R2V4 trunks This translation is necessary to use table D 3 Signaling Type Compatibility This table provides on a signaling type basis a compatibility matrix for the standard signaling types Table D 1 Trunk Signaling Cross references shows for each trunk type what its default signaling type value is and what other possible signaling types can be assigned to it This table is valid for System 85 R2V1 through and Generic 2 R2V4 alternate signaling types must be translated by R2V4 Alternate Signaling Type Translations The headings for table D 1 Trunk Signaling Cross references are defined as follows Trunk A description of this trunk type A signaling type or trun
145. SS MAXIMUM C DISTANCE OF 4311 FT OR MORE Figure 3 2 On Premises Metallic Cable Configurations ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 DS1 TRANSMISSION AND CABLING 3 9 Off Premises Cabling When DS s reside in different locations they are typically connected via a transmission facility such as a metallic cable configuration that is leased from the LEC This facility usually consists of a line and T1 repeater combination The customer premises equipment interfaces to a DS1 network facility T1 line via NCTEs The customer is responsibility for maintaining NCTEs When purchasing service from the LEC the customer must specify the DS1 framing and line coding requirements For off premises cabling it is also possible to use any of the connection methods described for On Premises Cabling as long as appropriate lightning and powerline cross protection is provided Echo on voice channels must also be considered when a DS1 facility extends over long distances that is long round trip delays are encountered Round trip delays of about 16 ms equate to about 100 miles through the public switched network or 800 miles in a private network Each digital switch and each digital multiplexer in a path adds about 3 ms and 2 ms of delay respectively Therefore private network routes with several digital switches and digital multiplexers may need to use echo cancelers in path distances of less than 100 miles as shown i
146. SS tet AT amp T Business Communications Systems subject Addendum 1 555 025 101ADD for date December 1990 DS1 DMI ISDN PRI Reference 555 025 101 from AT amp T The packet of addendum information enclosed with this cover memo includes any necessary replacement supplement and errata pages to DSI DMI ISDN PRI Reference It contains both new information and information from any previous addenda to the document By incorporating the addendum as instructed on the next page you can update your copy of the document to be current with the latest issue of the System 85 or DEFINITY Generic 2 1 Communications System When you have incorporated the addendum be sure to insert the addendum description into your document behind the title page where it will serve as a record that the document has been addended ADDENDUM DESCRIPTION This addendum includes necessary replacement supplement and errata pages to DS DMI ISDN PRI Reference 555 025 101 Issue 4 dated April 1990 Incorporate the addendum as instructed below to update your copy of the document to be current with the latest issue of the System 85 or DEFINITY Generic 2 1 Communications System Then insert this addendum description into the document behind the title page and before the table of contents It will serve as a record that your document has been addended Nature of the Document Changes The general nature of the changes to your document is as follows This packet co
147. STEM PARAMETERS Trunk to Trunk Transfer Coverage Don t Answer Interval for Subsequent Redirection rings Coverage Caller Response Interval seconds Keep Held SBA at Coverage Point Automatic Callback No Answer Timeout Interval rings Call Park Timeout Interval minutes Off Premises Tone Detect Timeout Interval seconds AAR ARS Dial Tone Required Music On Hold Port Music or Silence on Transferred Trunk Calls DID Tie ISDN Intercept Treatment Messaging Service Adjunct MSA Connected n Automatic Circuit Assurance ACA Enabled y ACA Referral Calls remote ACA Remote PBX Identification 3 Figure E 2 FEATURE RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS Screen The only ISDN PRI related field in this screen is the DID Tie ISDN Intercept Treatment field You should enter the extension of the recorded announcement you want to use for intercept treatment for invalid ISDN PRI calls This field defaults to 0 to go to the attendant Maintenance Related System Parameters Screen Settings This screen is primarily for use by maintenance personnel Following is an example of typical settings when a Generic is connected to a System 85 via ISDN PRI tie trunks ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 E 14 TIE TRUNK SETTINGS MAINTENANCE RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS MAINTENANCE THRESHOLDS Before Notification Minimum Threshold for TTRs 12 Minimum Threshold for CPTRs 6 TERMINATING TRUNK TRANSMISSION TEST Extension Te
148. Screen A number that associates the D channel pair used to signal for a group of trunk boards Assigns whether this signaling group uses FAS y or NFAS n This field appears for both FAS and NFAS For FAS this field specifies which channel will be used as the D channel to signal for all B channels on that board This channel will not signal for any other board For NFAS that is when the Associated Signaling field is setto n this field is the D channel assigned as the primary signaling channel for those trunk boards in this signaling group This field appears for NFAS only and specifies the D channel assigned as the secondary backup signaling channel for those trunk boards in this signaling group If the primary D channel fails this channel is used instead For this reason the secondary D channel should be on another board than the primary D channel This field appears for NFAS only and specifies the trunk boards assigned to this signaling group All channels on these boards except for those channels listed as the primary and secondary D channels are used as B channels ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 Interface ID ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 7 167 This field appears for NFAS only and specifies an ID that associates the D channels allowed to signal this trunk board from the D channels available on any trunk board Fo
149. TIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 Field 14 For Generic 2 field 14 must always be translated Field encodes and their descriptions are Dash required when ISDN is not provided Current policy is to always ship ISDN PRI software with the switch However the administration software still provides the option to assign this software as unprovided 0 Must be translated when ISDN is provided but disabled 1 Must be translated to enable ISDN service Procedure 276 Word 1 Other Feature Groups Use this procedure to turn on optional networking features such as AAR DCS SNC Look Ahead Interflow and Integrated Telemarketing Gateway ITG or to see which of these features are turned on Figure 7 26 Procedure 276 Word 1 Feature Group COS Generic 2 depicts this procedure ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 276 WORD 1 FEATURE GROUP CLASS OF SERVICE Standard Network Multipremise DCS AUTOVON Call Vectoring Tenant Services System 85 SE Look Ahead Interflow ON DO BFwWwNHE m Integrated Telemarketing Gateway DISPLAY ONLY 11 Use Procedure Connected to CCO ON LINE Q RUN TAPE BUSY OUT j IN USE WAIT enter command Figure 7 26 Procedure 276 Word 1 Feature Group COS Generic 2 Procedure 250 Word 1 SC DS1 Carrier Designation This procedure is used to assign the equipment carriers to a module and cabinet Additionally it is used to assign the type of carrier the c
150. The choices are D4 and ESF previously called F e The choice of framing format is totally dependent on the equipment connected to the interface such as D4 channel bank CDM BCM32000 host computer and other switches Normally the format is not dependent on facilities used but there could be some older digital radio equipment that only supports D4 The ESF format consists of a better framing algorithm and therefore provides more reliable error detection than D4 The ESF is the preferred selection for System 75 to System 75 System 75 to Generic 1 or Generic 2 System 75 to System 85 System 85 to System 85 System 85 to Generic 1 or Generic 2 Tl spans The D4 format should be selected for T1 spans connecting D4 channel banks and CDMs since they do not typically support ESF ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 7 59 Field 7 Field 8 If field 14 is defined as non ISDN 0 1 or 2 this field is equivalent to the Per Channel Signaling and common channel signaling options used with System 85 R2V4 However the terms have been changed to facility associated signaling FAS and NFAS If field 14 is defined as ISDN 5 this field is used to specify the method used to construct signaling bits for each DSO B channel The 23B 1D option is also called FAS If this interface contains a D channel 23B 1D if it is a DS1 DMI link or if it is an ISDN PRI li
151. The decision to switch from one source to the other is based on an internal slip count calculation NOTE Those DS1 T1 facilities that are used to provide the primary and secondary synchronization reference should be administered for slip detection y Typically those other DS1 T1 spans that are used for data applications and deemed important should also be administered for slip detection All T1 spans connecting channel banks are excluded unless the channel bank is externally timed Normally those DS1 T1 spans used exclusively for voice and not assigned as the primary or secondary synchronization source should be administered for slip detection of n Refer to the network synchronization diagram to determine which option to choose The digital switch maintains a slip count record for each DS1 Interface The slip count is used to determine if the Tl span is experiencing errors and if so the severity of the errors type alarm Option y enables switching between the primary secondary or internal high accuracy clock NOTE If as many as 50 of those spans that are administered for slip detection are experiencing slips with respect to the primary then a decision is made to switch to the secondary Option y is equivalent toa 1 in field 10 of procedure 260 Remote Option y is only used during some phases of DS1 DMI diagnostic testing The Loop normal or operational choice is n Option n is equivalent toa O in field 11 of Around procedure 260
152. Translations System 85 R2V4 Field 1 Displays the trunk group number previously administered in procedures 100 and 101 Fields 2 13 DS1 or ISDN PRI do not place any new or additional considerations on translating these fields The encodes that are translated are generally dependent on each trunk group its application and the associated trunk groups Refer to Appendix C Administrative Procedure Summary for more information about the dynamic 120 trunk types For more information see Dynamic Trunk Type in Procedure 100 Word 1 Field 14 Specifies how the dialed digits are outpulsed Field encodes and their descriptions are O When digit outpulsing may overlap digit reception 1 When all digits must be received before outpulsing may start All ISDN applications regardless of the trunk type require that a 1 be translated in this field Digit outpulsing does not begin until all digits are received Then digits are outpulsed as ASCII characters per the ISDN recommendations ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 36 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 Field 15 V4 Only Used for non ISDN trunk groups that interwork to ISDN trunk groups Therefore field 15 only applies to non ISDN trunk groups Generally trunk groups can use both analog and ISDN PRI digital transmission facilities Any restrictions and compatibility requirements are conveyed as information known as the BC code This field is used to
153. Trunk Type Field 5 Network Service Value BC System 85 R2V4 and Generic 2 amp Generic 2 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 B 13 B 17 B 18 B 20 B 21 B 22 B 22 C 10 C 10 C 11 C 11 C 11 C 12 C 13 C 13 C 13 C 16 CONTENTS xi PROCEDURE 321 WORD 5 System 85 R2V4 amp Generic 2 C 17 lt C 17 PROCEDURE 354 WORD 3 System 85 R2V4 amp Generic 2 f C 18 PROCEDURE 420 System 85 R2V4 amp Generic 2 D 1 D TRUNK TYPE AND SIGNALING TYPE COMPATIBILITY TABLES E TIE TRUNK SETTINGS E ee E 1 System 85 Administration Settings Generic 1 Administration Settings E 9 Administration Summary E 10 System Parameters Customer Options Screen Settings E 11 5 Ser i E 12 Feature Related System Parameters Screen Settings Maintenance Related System Parameters Screen Settings E 13 Dial Plan Record Screen Settings E 14 DS1 Circuit Pack Screen Settings E 15 E 17 Synchronization Plan Screen Settings ABBREVIATIONS AB 1 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 xii CONTENTS GLOSSARY GL 1 INDEX IN 1 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 CONTENTS xiii LIST OF FIGURES Figure 1 1 System 85 R2V4 ISDN Configuration Figure 1 2 Generic 2 ISDN Network Configuration 1 6 Figure 1 3 Generic 1 ISDN Network Configuration 1 7 Figure 1 4 D4 Framing 1 11 Figure 1 5 DS1 Extended Superframe Format 1 12 Figure 1 6 DS1 Signal Framing Format and ESF Superframe 24 Fram
154. abilities The following questions should be answered Does the vendor product provide a DSX 1 interface Does the vendor product support at least one each of the line coding framing and signaling options provided by System 85 or Generic 2 For synchronization purposes what stratum clock does the vendor switch provide Will the vendor switch act as a timing master or slave its timing to the System 85 or Generic 2 Does the vendor switch implement the digital loss plan specified by EIA PIN 1429 Can the vendor switch be administered for either the user side or the network side as required Is call by call CBC provided and what are the network service values NSVs for their services For CBC under what conditions are NSVs to be sent For CBC can NSVs be sent in the same dial plan format as other incoming services How are the messages and digit manipulation schemes implemented How are the numbering plans implemented Depending on the answers to these questions basic compatibility can be determined ISDN PRI PUBLIC NETWORK CONNECTIONS Public network connections typically involve connecting a System 75 System 85 Generic 1 or Generic 2 to a 4ESS Refer to System 85 R2V4 to 4ESS Via ISDN PRI Access 555 037 232 DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 1 to 4ESS Via ISDN PRI Access 555 037 234 DEFINITY Communications System Generic 2 1 to 4ESS Via ISDN PRI Access 555 037 235 and Technical Publication 414
155. able this option for example security privacy and personal preference n Disable this capability default NOTE Administering the Send Name field is equivalent to administrating procedure 012 words 1 and 2 with the exception that Generic 1 cannot be administered to transmit the trunk group name Typically those trunk groups that are administered for cbc service type will receive a variety of incoming call types These incoming calls may originate from a variety of sources for example public network private network or host computer The incoming call handling software processes incoming calls based on e The number of digits received e The type of digits e Whether the call has an identifying NSF for example MEGACOM 800 SDN or ACCUNET Service Feature Permitted entries include any of the predefine or additional Services Feature listed on Called Len the NETWORK FACILITIES screen and supported by this trunk group Also the special identifier other may be translated as a catch all entry for all Services Features not explicitly specified The Service Feature field is the first item searched Following a match in the Service Feature field then the associated entry for the Called Len field is searched and if a match is found then the Called Number field is searched Failure to match the associated Called Len or Called Number will cause the search to continue to the next Service Feature entry For a list of predefine
156. ach number is unique and may be applied to a different type of routing configuration It is currently believed that these numbers may be applied to meet the needs of most routing configurations If it is determined that the existing BCCOS numbers do not meet the needs of a particular routing configuration then new numbers may be defined New numbers should begin with 255 and continue in descending order Refer to chapter 1 Introduction for more information about BCCOS The differences between System 85 R2V4 and Generic 2 are 1 With System 85 R2V4 BC and ISDN routing are administered in procedure 010 word 4 but with Generic 2 these are moved to procedure 014 word 1 2 With System 85 R2V4 the switch assumes that all user data information will be presented for transmission in a form called Restricted Restricted means that the data information is encoded so that the all zeroes octet will not occur The DCP data modules encode user data into the form Restricted With Generic 2 the switch administration software procedure 014 word 1 field 3 assigns whether user data information is presented to the switch as Restricted or Unrestricted Unrestricted means that the data may contain the all zeroes octet 3 With System 85 R2V4 the AVD bit shows when a modem pool is required With Generic 2 the BCCOS with AAR and ARS shows whether a modem pool is required Figure 7 37 Procedure 014 Word 1 BCCOS Routing Options depicts this
157. al Encode Description Module Board Module Board o 06 ANI signaling SN244 auxiliary equipment SN232 TN763B 09 E amp M DD in wink DD SN233 ANNI1 TN760C TN767 with DT out None 10 E amp M WS in wink DD SN233 ANN TN760C TN767 with DT out E amp M WS in wink DD out SN233 TN760C TN767 also known as universal sequence E amp M IS in wink DD out SN233 ANN TN760C E amp M RLT out SN233 ANN TN760C TN767 E amp M MS IS SN233 ANN E amp M MS WS SN233 ANN TN760C TN767 E amp M MS DD SN233 ANN TN760C TN767 S Channel signaling host access GPP SN270 SN238 TN754 TN726 S Channel signaling host access EIA A 1 n 1 AN A 1 1 LS ANNI1 TN767 DMI ISDN MOS ANN35 TN767 TN555 pair E amp M WS in WS out SN233 ANN TN760C TN767 E amp M DD in DD out SN233 ANN TN760C TN767 E amp M DD in wink DD out SN233 ANNI1 TN760C TN767 1 23 x x 7 28 29 30 31 E amp M auto in IS out SN233 ANNI1 TN760C TN767 E amp M auto in WS out SN233 ANN TN760C TN767 LRB IS SN232 ANNI11 TN753 TN767 E amp M IS in auto out SN233 ANNI11 TN760C TN767 E amp M auto in auot out SN233 ANNI1 TN760C TN767 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 E TIE TRUNK SETTINGS This appendix contains the ISDN PRI specific administration settings that must be assigned to enable DEFINITY Generic 1 1 to System 85 R2V4 communications systems to communicate via ISDN PRI tie trunks
158. all subsequent preferences whether they are ISDN PRI trunk groups or not Thus you can achieve the same effect as this procedure does in the Generic 1 by assigning an ISDN PRI preference as the first preference in a pattern ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 E 8 TIE TRUNK SETTINGS PROCEDURE 103 116 TABLE E 1 continued System 85 R2V4 Administration Settings WORD FIELD 15 10 REMARKS This field applies to calls incoming on this trunk group If non ISDN trunks are to interwork with ISDN trunks then the non ISDN trunks may have their BCs assigned here An example would be a non ISDN data call coming into a System 85 that is tandemed to an outgoing ISDN trunk bound for a Generic 1 Here the incoming trunk should have its BC set so that the far end knows what mode of data it is The analogous Generic 1 administration is in the BCC field for trunk groups set as comm type AVD or data in the TRUNK GROUP screen When connected to a Generic 1 the interface endpoint is PBX Thus assign a O here The analogous Generic 1 administration is in the connect field of the Ds 1 CIRCUIT PACK screen 210 Assign the Listed Directory Number LDN and NPA NXX designator for the attendant console in this procedure 309 10 This procedure for ARS and procedure 321 for AAR implement the private networking capabilities between System 85 R2V4 and Generic 1 Fields relating to
159. ame SETTING procr intf Interface Links Screen Settings REMARKS You must assign a data module extension to the physical channel to be used for the ISDN PRI link to the far end System 85 R2V4 Any valid extension can be used here and does not require coordination with the System 85 Use the system command add data modul extension Enter the physical channel number 01 08 to which you assigned the data extension This field is optional Enter something showing that the system associated with this channel is the far end System 85 Refer to links 2 and 4 in the example below Following is an example of typical settings for this screen when a Generic 1 is connected to a System 85 R2V4 via ISDN PRI tie trunks Link CIDR WDHB INTERFACE LINKS PI Destination DTE Ext Prot Digits Brd DCE Identification BX25 DTE 67967 ISDN 1 19 ISDN 1 KM BX25 DTE 67965 ISDN 1A06 ISDN 2 KM 67954 BX25 67953 DTE AUDIX 67980 BX25 67981 DCE DCIU 6 KM 67982 BX25 67983 DCE DCIU 7 BB 2 BX25 DTE Figure E 7 INTERFACE LINKS Screen Est Enable Conn n n Y n n Y bA ng x bi Y we Y n n ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 E 20 TIE TRUNK SETTINGS Table E 5 Interface Links Screeen Settings Generic l describes the administration settings for the ISDN PRI specific fields in this administration screen TABLE E 5 Interface Links Screen Settings Generic 1 FIELD SETTING REMARKS
160. and administration values 5 SYNCHRONIZATION OF DIGITAL FACILITIES Describes synchronization strategies objectives and requirements This chapter also discusses the availability of synchronization sources and includes the rules for selecting and assigning primary and secondary references and facilities ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT xxiii 6 PORT TYPES INSTALLATION COMPATIBILITIES Describe the DS1 DMI circuit pack operating modes slot restrictions and administration considerations and restrictions This section also includes a table that lists the available port types and shows their compatibility on a system release version and circuit pack suffix basis 7 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS Covers the following information Describes those procedures that are required for DS1 services what the available field encode options are and the considerations for choosing the options for System 85 Describes those procedures that are required for DS1 services what the available field encode options are and the considerations for choosing the options for DEFINITY Generic 2 Describes the administration screens that are required for DS1 services any unusual or special field requirements or considerations and options for System 75 and System 75XE Describes the administration screens that are required for DS1 services any unusual or special field requirements or considerations and options for Generic 1
161. and a 1 544M bps digital data rate e Monitoring of the input DS1 or when necessary adding pulses 1s to ensure that the ones density requirements are met ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 DSI TRANSMISSION AND CABLING 3 3 e Removing bipolar violations which implies incompatibility with B8ZS line coding e Termination of a DS1 or regeneration of received data using an office repeater e Provisions for supplying DC power to a DS1 to power line repeaters e A fault locating jack to aid in testing repeaters on DS1s e Jacks for manually looping the NCTE and aiding in maintenance testing e A DC triggered remote toward the far end loopback relay Other optional features include inband loopback control and the ability to pass bipolar violations The most frequently used NCTEs are the 551V and the 551V ST Other vendor provided NCTEs may have distance limitations different from those for the 551V and 551V ST NOTE The 551V has a maximum transmit distance toward a Generic 1 or Generic 2 of 85 feet Therefore when this type of NCTE the 551V is used the DS1 should be optioned or administered accordingly The 551V ST has a maximum transmit distance toward a Generic 1 or Generic 2 of 655 feet Exact distance settings are usually determined at installation time and by configuring the NCTE s user selectable option switches Switch option selection must be coordinated with the particular switch DS1 For most types of NCTEs the
162. and features and their further defining attributes ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 104 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 TABLE 7 12 Network Services Network Features NAME Feature 0 Facility or Coding Service 1 Value i Caller_data os 0 Out WATS band Operator handled Pre subscribed aT i oo CC operator Long distance serie 383 1 dP MEGACOM 800 sevice wa ma ma m MEGACOM pap oo T gt 1 Tn WATS i aS a a Sa E WATS maximal 356 1 1 5 subscribed band ACCUNET switched 357 1 1 6 digital services Field 2 Assigns whether the service feature is binary 1 or parameterized 0 All codeset NSFs are classified as binary services As an option fields 5 11 may contain additional defining parameters refer to table 7 12 Network Services Network Features However even though a service feature may be defined as parameterized it is generally not required that fields 5 through 11 be translated For a binary service feature fields 5 11 cannot be translated Field 3 Assigns whether the facility coding value represents a feature 0 ora service 1 Refer to table 7 12 Network Services Network Features Field 4 Assigns the facility coding value Field encodes and their descriptions are e Dash not applicable e Numbers refer to table 7 12 Network Services Network Features Fields 5 11 There are no default values Procedure 309 Word 1 ARS Ro
163. and separate sections provided To date DS1s have been well accepted For both Generic 1 and Generic 2 DS1s were initially available for providing digital tie trunks Later versions of DSIs and later releases and versions of the switch software provide additional capabilities These later version circuit packs are always backward compatible with previous types However new capabilities that depend on software may only be available on the earlier releases when the required software is provided whether the software is a patch or later issue of the tape Not all new capabilities are backward compatible to earlier releases and versions Supported Digital Facilities lists the available capabilities and the hardware and software dependencies Engineering problems are minimized by having a good understanding of e DSI DMI and ISDN PRI capabilities e Hardware and software compatibility requirements e Services that the particular application requires e All carrier facilities that will be used to complete the end to end transmission facility both local exchange company LEC and toll network carrier The labeled network diagram Installation problems are minimized by proceeding from a labeled network diagram Each DS1 or all intermediate transmission equipment such as channel expansion multiplexers CEMs channel division multiplexers CDMs network channel terminating equipment NCTE network carrier multiplexers channel banks or chann
164. applications are defined by using page 1 and page 2 of the TRUNK GROUP screen this is the same as for analog trunk groups Trunk members are added to the GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS screen pages 3 through 9 This series of screens administers many of the same parameters as procedures 100 and 101 do for Generic 2 Figure 7 72 Trunk Group Screen Page I Tie depicts this procedure TRUNK GROUP Page 1 of 9 Group Number Group Type tie SMDR Reports y Group Name OUTSIDE CALL COR 1 TAC Direction two way Outgoing Display n Dial Access y Busy Threshold 99 Night Service nm Queue Length 0 Incoming Destination Comm Type avd Auth Code n BCC 0 TRUNK PARAMETERS Trunk Type in out Incoming Rotary Timeout sec 5 Outgoing Dial Type tone Incoming Dial Type tone Disconnect Timing msec 500 Digit Treatment Digits Connected to Toll n STT Loss normal DTT to DCO Loss normal Incoming Dial Tone y Bit Rate 1200 Synchronization async Duplex full Answer Supervision Timeout 10 Figure 7 72 Trunk Group Screen Page 1 Tie Most fields require no unusual entries for DS1 service applications Only those fields that may require special attention are mentioned ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 136 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 Comm Type The default is voice with avd and data being the alternate selections NOTE Trunk groups that are administered av
165. are available Following is an example of typical settings for this screen when a Generic is connected to a System 85 R2V4 via ISDN PRI tie trunks ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 TIE TRUNK SETTINGS E 21 PROCESSOR CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Proc Interface Remote Chan Appl Link Chan Priority Proc Chan Machine ID Ts 23 3 4 53 6 ms 8 9 10 isdn 2 h 11 isdn 4 h 12 133 14 15 16 Figure E 8 PROCESSOR CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Screen Table E 6 Processor Channel Assignment Screen Settings Generic l describes the administration settings for the ISDN PRI specific fields in this administration screen TABLE E 6 Processor Channel Assignment Screen Settings Generic 1 FIELD SETTING REMARKS Proc Chan Appl Interface Link Interface Channel Priority Remote Proc Chan Machine ID This field is display only isdn This is the application type that connects to this processor channel Enter the interface link number assigned in the INTERFACE LINKS screen In the screen examples ISDN was assigned to links 2 and 4 This field does not apply to ISDN processor channels and must be left blank h The ISDN application always uses high h priority This field does not apply to ISDN processor channels and must be left blank This field does not apply to ISDN Leave it blank ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 E 22 TIE TRUNK
166. are the leftmost three slots of the left quarter and the two slots immediately to the right of the real DS1 in the right quarter of the half carrier in which the DS1 is contained These virtual board locations must be left vacant or damage to a port board and the DS1 could result A carrier equipped with two line trunk DS1s will have four slots available for other port boards in physical slots 3 8 16 and 21 Figure 6 2 Physical and Virtual Carrier Slot Relationships Line Trunk Mode shows the carrier slots physical versus virtual slot locations and their relationship to line trunk mode use Because line trunk mode requires six carrier slots while line only mode requires only three mode selection is not made a software configurable option ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 6 8 PORT TYPES INSTALLATION COMPATIBILITIES SLOT NUMBERS a aa 0 2 LEFT HALF CARRIER 5 6 7 8 13 14 15 16 18 19 20 21 RIGHT HALF CARRIER LINE ONLY ANY OTHER DS1 OR DMI INTERFACE PORT CIRCUIT PACK EQUALS EQUALS ACTUAL VIRTUAL VIRTUAL OTHER OPS OPS CIRCUIT 1 2 PACKS NOTE OPS PORTS CARRIER SLOT OTHERS EQUALS OPS 7 NOTE Any half carrier that does not contain a line trunk mode circuit pack can have 1 or 2 functioning line only modes Figure 6 1 Physical and Virtual Carrier Slot Relationships Line Only Mode ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 ADMINISTR
167. are to the same service or have the same length of digits The remaining four fields specify the unique treatment for the call once the row has been determined Together the Del and Insert fields can be used to manipulate the incoming number that will be used to route the call The Per Call SID ANI field can be used to request SID ANI only for specific calls incoming on the group The Night Serv field is used to have calls of different types routed to different night destinations when night service is in effect The biggest application of this table is when a Generic is connected to the public network with several different services such as MEGACOM 800 service and ACCUNET Switched Digital Services but it also has applications when used in a private network NOTE Administering this table is optional Figure 7 80 Trunk Features Screen Page 2 ISDN PRI depicts this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 7 147 TRUNK FEATURES Page 2 of 11 ACA Assignment n Long Holding Time hours 1 Short Holding Time secs 10 Short Holding Threshold 15 MIS Measured n Internal Alert n Used For DCS n PBX ID 1 Data Restriction n Maintenance Tests y Send SID n Send Name n Service Called Called Del Insert Per Call Night Feature Len Number SID ANI Serv Figure 7 80 Trunk Group Screen Page 2 ISDN PRI Only the new IS
168. arrier port electrical number and whether the carrier is equipped with a TN463 synchronization clock SC Figure _7 27 Procedure 250 Word 1 System Configuration Carriers Generic 2 depicts this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 7 55 ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 250 WORD 1 CARRIERS CARRIER LOCATION LOCAL RMI LOCATION 1 Module EJ 12 Module 2 Cabinet H 13 Cabinet 3e Carrier o 14 Carrier 15 Slot He 4 Carrier Type MODULE CONTROL I O E 5 6 PDS 7 Duplicated a 8 TMS H 9 Port Electrical Carrier 10 TMS Electrical Carrier 11 SC Equipped Connected to CCO ON LINE j MAJOR MINOR RUN TAPE BUSY OUT IN USE WAIT enter command sides pata JO Eser F6 FIELD F7 INPUT F8 cmps Figure 7 27 Procedure 250 Word 1 System Configuration Carriers Generic 2 DS1 circuit packs may only be installed within DS1 port carriers Each Generic 2 that is equipped with one or more DS1s will also contain either a TN463 SC or a TN2131C For single module systems the SC is located in the module control carrier along with the TN460 module clock For multimodule systems the SC is located in the TMS carrier Fields 1 3 Identifies a module number cabinet number and physical carrier position The appropriate encodes are determined based on whether the module is traditiona
169. arty information is returned to the calling party When ISDN PRI and DCS are found in the same network certain features predominate based on the handling of the called number Refer to DEFINITY Communication System Generic 2 1 to Generic 1 1 with DCS 555 037 238 for more information regarding this networking arrangement ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 INTRODUCTION 1 33 5 Interworking between ISDN PRI and DCS is a complex issue that is beyond the scope of this document However for pure ISDN PRI or combined ISDN PRI DCS networks several new ISDN feature and service options are available These include e Call routing based on BC e End to end ISDN connectivity routing e BC passed on a call by call basis e User to user information transport e Locally provided tones e Controlled initialization of trunks to in service at provisioning time e Two way busy out of trunks e Digital demand transmission test With interworking the following types of calls are possible e Calls between non ISDN endpoints and ISDN endpoints BRI terminals e Calls between non ISDN trunks and ISDN trunks e Calls between non ISDN trunks and ISDN endpoints e Calls between non ISDN endpoints and ISDN trunks Part of this capability is the automatic insertion of conversion resources modem pool based on the bearer capability rather than trunk type see also the codeset mapping description in the Procedure
170. associate the NPA NNX designator with the console The encode must have been previously defined in procedure 354 word 3 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 22 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 Procedure 010 Word 4 Line Side B Channel BC and ISDN Routing Options Figure 7 9 Procedure 010 Word 4 Terminal COS Restrictions System 85 R2V4 depicts proceure 010 word 4 ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE WORD EXTENSION CLASS OF SERVICE RESTRICTIONS Class of Service Maximum Precedence Level Bearer Capability BwWN Ee MoO ISDN Routing Connected to CCO ON LINE Y MAJOR MINOR RUN TAPE BUSY OUT IN USE ll WAIT enter command e Co fFz cata J Fe HELP F FIELD F7 ineur Fe cMps Figure 7 9 Procedure 010 Word 4 Terminal COS Restrictions System 85 R2V4 Field 1 When ISDN is administered each COS assignment must have an associated BC and ISDN routing assignment That is to say that whenever ISDN is enabled all COS assignments must also be translated for this procedure COS assignments must be within the 2 digit range of 1 through 63 Field 2 This field s encodes are only useful for AUTOVON applications Dash is appropriate for ISDN applications ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 7 23 Field 3 This field is used to populate the BC code IE or an ISDN PRI facility All
171. ated to ISDN PRI Fields not discussed in the table do not relate directly to the configuration shown in figure 1 Typical settings for these fields are shown in the examples though they are not required for this interface ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 E 10 TIE TRUNK SETTINGS For those fields of a screen not discussed in the tables following these screens you can assume that the settings shown are reasonable They are the settings used by a customer having a System 85 R2V4 connected to a Generic 1 with ISDN PRI tie trunks The only significant difference between the configuration discussed in this appendix and the configuration administered in the sample screens is that the customer has DCS implemented over the ISDN PRI trunks Administration Summary Before administering a Generic 1 you should have the dial plan completed Following is a summary of the administration screens specific to this configuration listed in a suggested order they should be administered Not all screens are order dependent but if you follow this suggested order you should not encounter any order related administration problems Refer to DEFINITY 75 85 Communications System Generic I and System 75 Administration Measurements Issue 4 February 1989 555 200 500 for the administration commands applicable to each of these screens l stem Parameters Customer Options eature Related System Parameters S 5 e T 5 o 5 a
172. ation 2 8 service unit cut through dialing trunk roups 7 27 CY cut through operation cyclic redundancy check CRC 1 12 D D4 channel bank 2 5 5 20 framing format ANNIIC ANNIIE feature comparison AT amp T proprietary signaling 1 15 CRC errors 8 8 S E description 7 10 DSI signal 88 S restrictions 2 5 superframe 7 10 DACS connections 5 6 frames 2 6 to another system 2 8 data 64K bps 1 8 channel 2 circuit terminating digital transmission conditions 9 mode O Generic 2 25 0 System 85 1 Generic 21 1 System 8517 7 240 OSOS 24 2 Generic 21 24 SS O 2 System 85 1 24 S 3 Generic 20 25 3 System 851 24 i y O 3 2 adaptive Generic 2 X 25 Generic 2 1 25_ __ O module assignment 7 139 S BRI protocol DCP protocol interfaces 7 8 restrictions 7 18 PCM 1 8 terminal equipment DTE 2 18 unknown analog Generic D 1 25 O O unknown digital Generic D 1 25 O O voice 1 8 voice Generic 2 voice grade Generic 2 voice grade System 85 voice System 85 JI 23 y voiceband analog 1 8 voice grade 1 8 DCH 1 21 7 141 DCP data modules digital data ports elgg 2 2 line side DC dedicated switch connection DSC 6 2 6 12 delta channel 2 11 D channel backup and 4ESS 2 kem eee 1 5 limitation without 5 OE definition 2 S TE ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 INDEX IN 5 D channel
173. atter is frequently called OPS Each DS1 MFAT carrier will support a maximum of two DS1s slots 5 and 18 The ACCUNET switched digital service can be provided by setting up a trunk group with encode 109 However a DS1 must be optioned for RBS procedure 260 field 8 The only other administration requirement is that the trunk groups translation field 3 of procedure 100 word 2 be enabled for 56K bps encode one In a private network this can be used to pass 56K bps calls over robbed bit facilities The trunk group used to provide ACCUNET switched digital service may contain as few as 1 or as many as 24 members Therefore the same DS1 may also be used to provide CO foreign exchange FX Wide Area Telecommunications Service WATS Direct Inward Dialing DID and Remote Access trunks Selects the interface is used to provide DMI BOS trunks The DMI BOS trunk groups are defined by using procedure 100 word 1 encode 108 and or 109 m The DMI BOS application uses the switch s DS1 to provide a high speed multiplexed data interface for connecting to compatible computers The computers may be located on the same customer premises as the switch or many miles away The DS1 T1 carrier facilities are used between the switch and the remote computers The DMI BOS application provides 23 data channels plus 1 signaling channel Each data channel can be considered a 64K bps channel However permissible data rates are dependent on the trunk gr
174. band data since it is in analog PCM form For DS1 T1 facilities that use 24th channel signaling and are optioned for ZCS the data communications protocol communications equipment used must prevent the all zeroes octet from occurring otherwise the ZCS method will forcibly alter the data causing errors to guarantee proper ones density The B8ZS line coding format unrestricted substitutes a unique code bipolar violation code for any eight consecutive zeros This bipolar violation code is detected at the receiving end and converted back to the original string of eight zeros The B8ZS encoding method permits data transmission at rates up through 64K bps without consideration of the protocol clear channel transmission Several different types of network digital facilities may be linked together to complete the end to end connection Typically these will be multiplex derived facilities Usually the multiplexers will contain a bipolar violation monitor and removal circuit that corrects all bipolar violations alters B8ZS type data and also produces an all ones if a loss of input signal occurs This bipolar violation monitor and removal feature is currently an inherent part of the MX3 M13 MX2 and MIC multiplexers as well as most vendor s multiplexers ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 Field 10 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 7 61 This option enables 1 ordisable 0 collection of slip data to
175. ber line EDSL extended superframe ESF 2 3 external clock reference 5 14 external reference selection rules 5 27 externally referenced nodes 5 18 F facility alarms facility associated signaling FAS 1 9 facility formats B 2 Facility Restriction Level FRL C 3 family port 6 0 FAS 1 9 1 16 759 ooo ooo Feature Related System Parameters screen settings E J2 o fixed loss plan 4 1 foreign exchange FX 6 4 7 13 foreign exchange subscriber FXS 4 7 formats facility B 2 four wire E amp M extended range channel units Seel4 wire E amp M extended range channel units 2 5 frame 7 10 framing D4 1 10 2 5 2 7 ESF 2 7 extended superframe ESF 2 3 formats 0 signaling and line coding 2 6 free run ability 5 4 FRL 7 160 C 3 FT3 lightwave 3 2 o INDEX IN 7 functioning modules 5 8 fundamentals of DS1 signals 7 7 FXO 6 11 FXS channel unit 2 5 6 11 loss adjustments 4 7 with gain transfer FXS GT channel units 2 5 G gain transfer 2 5 4 7 Generic 1 as a system clock reference Generic 2 as a system clock reference 5 29 si synchronization architecture 5 7 synchronization software operation 5 9 Generic 1 administration options and requirements administration settings DS1 DMI BOS ISDN PRI maintenance philosophy 8 1 maintenance capabilities and concerns 8 5 Generic 2 administration options and requirements 7 53 digit collection C 8 ISDN PRI maintenance philosophy 8 1 maintenance
176. bove list ASSIGNED MEMBERS Stations with a data extension button for this data module Ext Name Ext Name Figure 7 75 Data Module Screen Data A unique extension number that identifies the data module Actually this is a phantom Extension data module and frequently this extension number is identified as a phantom number The extension number can be any reserved number within the Dial Plan Record See also the Physical Channel field description below Type Enter procr infc for ISDN PRI applications Physical A two digit number which corresponds to the physical channel of the processor Channel interface circuit packs TN765s If there is one TN765 these numbers range form 01 to 04 if there are two TN765s these numbers range form 01 to 08 Name Completing this field is optional If you choose to complete this field enter a unique link application such as ISDN PRI 1 or ISDN PRI 2 The ISDN PRI application does not place any additional restraints or special considerations on the remaining fields Processor Channel Assignments ISDN PRI Applications This screen associates a processor channel to an interface link number Processor Interface Data Module which was previously defined Additionally 1 of the 64 interface channels is identified and linked via administration to identified processor channel Processor Channel Assignment Screen depicts this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7
177. cations Field encodes and their descriptions are 0 When multiple retry is not desired RETRY NOT ACTIVE The ISDN PRI protocol contains retry capability When signaling type 20 is selected O encode is required 1 Recommended for ISDN applications where the 40 series of trunk types is used Encode 1 enables a double retry and thus provides slightly improved call completion particulary for large trunk groups that span across more than one transmission facility Not applicable for ISDN applications Therefore the required option must be 0 for not active Not applicable for ISDN applications Therefore the required option must be 0 for not active Not applicable for ISDN applications Therefore the required option must be 0 for no failure threshold See field 17 of procedure 107 word 5 for related information NOTE This field is only applicable for analog trunk facilities It permits the user to establish a trunk failure threshold that when exceeded will generate an alarm The threshold limit will affect service availability and on an indirect basis the customer s maintenance costs ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 30 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 Field 8 Selects whether the optional ISDN information is transmitted and access to other ISDN network features is desired The optional ISDN IEs include the following e Calling number display e Connected party number e User to us
178. cember 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 D 6 TRUNK TYPE AND SIGNALING TYPE COMPATIBILITY TABLES TABLE D 1 Trunk Signaling Cross References continued Trunk Procedure Feature Direction Signaling Procedure Description Encode Types Encode Prost access way PIM Y PNA Sway S Channel signaling TB iS f e feta a O NA o sce e E a E E DMI A bit wink in auto out E amp M WS in IS out Ep DMI ISDN MOS DMI ISDN Mos Lo reserved 17 unused 118 119 ISDN dynamic trunk 120 ISDN PRI 2 way DMI ISDN MOS Table D 2 R2V4 Alternate Signaling Type Translations translates where needed the R2V4 alternate signaling type for each trunk type This allows the table D 3 Signaling Type Compatibility to be used for compatibility checks Only trunk signaling type pair requiring translation are given i TABLE D 2 R2V4 Alternate Signaling Type Translations R2V4 G2 Equiv Sig Type Sig Type r l way in attendant completing auto in l way out DOD l way out DOD with party test 2 way attendant completing in DOD 2 way with party test 1 way in attendant completing auto in l way out DOD l way out DOD with party test 2 way attendant completing in DOD 2 way with party test 1 way in attendant completing auto in l way out DOD 1 way out auto Note 2 way dial repeating in auto out Note gt 27 NOTE R2V4 must be equipped with SN243 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4
179. ch may include those from the fixed category Generally the trunk type selected will depend on the network service or feature value which is translated in field 5 Table 7 4 Network Service Feature Options shows the relationships TABLE 7 4 Network Service Feature Options Network Service or Network ISDN Network Feature Value Trunk Type OUTWATS Banded Note 1 Note 2 Operator Handled Pre Subscribed Common Carrier Operator SDN MEGACOM 800 Service inc International MEGACOM Service 354 INWATS 355 WATS Maximal Subscribed Band ACCUNET switched digital service 357 AT NOTES 1 OUTWATS bands 0 through 255 are assigned sequential numeric values ranging from 33 through 288 for example band 0 is network service value 33 2 Trunk types 26 and 27 DMI data may be translated depending on local requirements 3 Connection made with procedure 309 word 5 Not available in System 85 R2V4 Field 5 Specifies the network service that is requested Refer to Table 7 4 Network Service Feature Options for the appropriate encode Fields 6 through 10 are translated to enable or disable one or more BC codes for the ARS plan pattern number preference number Field 6 Enables 1 ordisables 0 support for voice or voice grade data BC code Field 7 Enables 1 or disables 0 support for data mode 1 BC code Field 8 Enables 1 or disables 0 support for data mode 2 BC code Field 9 Enables 1 or disables 0 support
180. channel service unit or CSU 2 Upgrade System 85 R2V4 administration procedures to include e Coverage for issue 7 of the maintenance and administration panel MAAP flip charts e Additions and corrections to the administration procedures e Clarifications on the use of trunk type 120 ISDN dynamic and other trunk types for providing Call by Call CBC Service Selection 3 Add coverage for DEFINITY Communications System Generic 2 ISDN PRI 4 Add coverage for System 75XE DS1 DMI 5 Add coverage for DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 ISDN PRI This document describes System 75 and System 75XE DS1 DMIs as well as Generic 1 and Generic 2 ISDN PRI It introduces and defines the concepts and terminology that are unique to DS1 DMI ISDN PRI Also included are descriptions of DS1I DMI ISDN PRI applications for both private and public networks engineering procedures and considerations cabling and connection arrangements and administration requirements restrictions and limitations Xxi xxii ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT INTENDED AUDIENCES Since this document contains information ranging from the brief tutorial to the detailed requirements it should prove useful to several groups of readers including e Marketing personnel e Technical consultants e Network engineers e Installation personnel e System administrators e Account teams e Customers PREREQUISITE SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE While there are no prerequisite skills assumed in
181. cifies the plan number effective from the activation time to the activation time of the next Act Time Field encodes and their descriptions are 1 Plan number 1 2 Plan number 2 3 Plan number 3 Trunk Group Member Assignments ISDN PRI Trunk Applications Adding members to an ISDN PRI trunk group is similar to adding members to a DS1 trunk group The prime difference is that with ISDN PRI the TRUNK GROUP screen does not have the right three fields Mode Type and Ans Delay Figure 7 84 Trunk Group Screen Page 5 ISDN PRI depicts this procedure GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS Page 5 of 11 Port Name Night Sig Grp 1 1B1501___ 1 2 1B1523___ 1 3 B1601 __ 1 4 1B1623___ 1 De B1701_ 1 6 1B1709_ 7 IBITL6 K 8 B1724 9 1B1801 __ 2 10 1B1823 2 11 B190 E 3 12 IBI929 3 13 Ei 14 a IS 16 Figure 7 84 Trunk Group Screen Page 5 ISDN PRI ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 158 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 Port Name Night Sig Grp This field associates each trunk group member to a particular network 1 or 2 carrier A E slot 01 20 and circuit 01 24 To keep things simple try to match trunk group member assignments with B channel assignments for example trunk group member 1 on channel 1 Typically this entry is a 7 digit telephone number However another candidate would be the 10 dig
182. cilities are not available either channel negotiation is begun or if appropriate a cause failure code is returned and the call attempt is dropped Otherwise the called switch responds with a call proceeding or alerting message Incoming Calls Incoming ISDN calls are generally processed similar to outgoing ISDN calls Initially the called switch receives a setup message over the D channel and processes the contents of the setup message The call states of the switch how the particular trunk groups are administered and decisions taken as a result of processing the setup message will determine exactly how the ISDN call is processed Look Ahead Interflow Look Ahead Interflow allows customers with multiple ISDN PRI locations to achieve optimum call handling capability and agent productivity by routing calls among call centers as though they were one location Look Ahead Interflow is normally used with the Automatic Call Distribution ACD AAR ARS and Call Vectoring features to conditionally select a distant switch to handle interflowed calls Which distant switch the sending switch selects is determined by a series of route to steps within the same vector Look Ahead Interflow then lets the sending switch use the D channel to query the status of a distant switch before sending the call If the distant switch can handle the interflow call it accepts the call with a D channel progress message and the call is sent over the B channel If the
183. cility test codes For most installations it is desirable to enable or establish permission thus allowing selected maintenance software to test the DMI MOS ISDN PRI transmission facility on a demand basis Procedure 648 contains several tests that may be done on a demand basis by executing procedure 648 whenever facility test codes 1 2 or 3 are administered The DMI MOS ISDN PRI communication protocol consists of three layers or levels Level 1 is the physical layer Level 2 is the data link layer Level 3 is the network layer also called the link access procedure on the D channel LAPD Field encodes and their descriptions are 0 Disables or prohibits maintenance testing from being done on the specified module cabinet carrier and slot transmission facility 1 Assigns that a level 2 test may be executed via procedure 648 Encode 1 should be translated for all DMI MOS to host computer links 2 Assigns that only the level 3 network layer may be tested 3 Permits both level 2 and level 3 tests to be done Encode 3 should be used for all ISDN PRI connections that terminate on a 4ESS if the Generic 2 is equipped with an SN261C analog digital facility test circuit pack If an SN261C is not present use encode 1 instead Fields 8 12 are assigned the default values when the ANN35 TN767 circuit pack is assigned in procedure 260 Field 8 This field accepts encodes from 0 to 126 However all point to point nonswitched li
184. code for distance intervals of 133 feet up to a maximum distance of 655 feet TABLE 7 7 TN767 Compensation Values Distance to Midpoint Compensation or Endpoint FT 22 AWG ABAM amp 24 AWG PDS 26 AWG PDS Value 0 to 133 0 to 90 133 to 266 266 to 399 399 t0 532 3532 to 665 NOTE Compensation values assume 22 gauge ABAM or 24 gauge PDS cables Two switches colocated can be up to 1310 feet apart with maximum compensation on both systems If 26 gauge PDS cables are used distances are reduced as assigned The T1 office repeaters or T1 line repeaters can be used when the on premises distance limitation is exceeded A T1 office repeater is required at each end of the connection to provide an interconnection range of up to 3000 feet Each repeater only provides regeneration for the receive direction The T1 line repeaters can be used to accommodate distances up to 6000 feet between switches The T1 line repeaters can be used in tandem to accommodate greater distances Field encodes and their descriptions are Dash required option for all traditional modules It is also required for all ISDN PRI links provided with universal modules 0 Preferred for DS1 service provided with universal modules shows that a DS1 provides standard DMI BOS 1 Assigns that the DS1 provides the AT amp T proprietary method of signaling on the 24th channel This option is required when connection to System 75 that uses TN722 circuit pac
185. configuration there may be more than one ISDN numbering plan Contents of these fields make up a part of the station identification number SID The SID is transmitted in the calling number IE part of the setup message or connect party number part of the connect message NOTE This word need not be translated unless the application requires that SID or the connected number be transmitted to the network If the SID is to be passed through the ISDN network then it must also be administered here and in procedure 000 word 4 Figure 7 33 Procedure 354 Word 3 NPA NXX Digits Assignment Generic 2 depicts this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 76 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 354 WORD 3 NPA NXX ASSIGNMENTS Deesignator NPA NXX Thousand s Digit Connected to CCO ON LINE MAJOR MINOR RUN TAPE BUSY OUT IN USE Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4 enter command D 3 TA a F6 FIELD F8 CMDS Figure 7 33 Procedure 354 Word 3 NPA NXX Digits Assignment Generic 2 This field should be translated for both private and public network connections The NPA NXX designator is a 2 digit field and within the range of 1 through 99 This 3 digit field should contain the Numbering Plan Area NPA which is also called the area code The NPA is the area code in which the switch resides Assignment is therefore dependent o
186. connections over several DS1 DMI facilities can significantly affect signal quality e All uncompressed channels that is digital data channels and the 24th signaling channel must be provided on the same DS1 DMI NOTE VBR signaling should not be used for out of band signaling applications or used when the compressed facility connects to a DACS The second signaling format is called bundling It is similar to 24th channel signaling in that compressed channels are grouped into bundles of 12 11 carry voice or voice grade data and the 12th called a delta channel carries signaling for the other 11 The important points associated with bundling signaling are as follows 1 It is the recommended signaling type for most applications 2 Hardware in addition to that provided with the basic CEM unit must be ordered 3 The maximum number of compressed channels that a CEM accommodates is reduced to 44 4 It is the only signaling method that allows compressed DS1 channels to be cross connected through a DACS ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 2 12 NETWORK CONNECTIONS AND CONFIGURATIONS 5 It is the only signaling type that permits uncompressed channels from both DS1 DMI BOSes to be connected to the CEM Bundling is required when both DS1 DMI BOSes operate with 24th channel signaling 6 It is required when the CEM is used with a CDM The third signaling format is called DMI 46 This format uses DMI BOS over the
187. critical circuitry such as network protection and ones density enforcement are normally line powered from the CO using a 60 mA current loop If power from the CO is not available then power must be provided locally The type of power required 120 VAC or 48 VDC generally depends on installation engineering specifications and on the NCTE being used refer to the installation and or user s manuals for the particular NCTE The NCTE s noncritical circuits such as error monitoring alarming are always powered locally The following six tables describe DIP switch settings for ESF T1 Standalone and ESF T1 Multiline NTCEs The DIP switch settings apply to configurations shown in NCTE Framing Configurations The legend for tables B 1 through B 6 is given next NOTE If a switch is reset you must power down the NCTE before the change will go into effect LEGEND O Open Off Up Dflt Factory Default C Closed On Down NA _ Not Used ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 3 4 DS1 TRANSMISSION AND CABLING TABLE 3 1 CSU 1 and Bit Error Rate Threshold Switch Settings ESF T1 NCTE ESF T1 NCTE Standalone Multiline Switch gt Switch Number Number Oooo oonojaaaa aaao Oo000 oono oanaaanaanaaaa NOTES 1 ESF means ESF framing from end to end see Configurations A and D in figure 3 D 2 ESF D4 means ESF framing over the span with D4 framing to the switch see Configurations B and E in figure 3 1 3 D4 means D4 f
188. cted otherwise RBS is used y DMI This option is equivalent to a 1 in field 14 of procedure 260 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 132 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 Connect This field is not available unless the Signaling Mode field is translated isdn pri Field encodes and their descriptions are e network default option implies that the Generic will function as user side and the switch connects to the ISDN PRI public network facilities e pbx implies that a Generic 1 will connect to ISDN PRI private network facilities e host implies that a Generic 1 will function as network side and the switch connects to a host computer which is always user side Interface This field is not available unless the Connect field is translated pbx Field encodes and their descriptions are e user default option e network NOTE For ISDN PRI private network connections additional care must be exercised in defining user and network sides Specifically only one end must be administered user side while the alternate must be defined as network side If the private network node is a tandem switch then that node may function as both user side and network side depending on the particular facility Maintenance Options or Parameters Slip This option enables y or disables n switching between the primary secondary and Detection internal high accuracy clock
189. d 1 Network Facilities Coding Generic 2 7 103 Figure 7 50 Procedure 309 Word 1 ARS Route Tables Generic 2 7 105 Figure 7 51 Procedure 309 Word 5 ARS ISDN BCCOS Generic 2 7 106 Figure 7 52 Procedure 321 Word 1 AAR Route Tables Generic 2 7 107 Figure 7 53 Procedure 321 Word 5 AAR ISDN and Other Feature Parameters Generic 2 7 109 Figure 7 54 Procedure 107 Word 1 ATMS TTL Assignment System 85 R2V4 7 110 Figure 7 55 Procedure 108 Word 1 ISDN Trunk Group TTL Assignment Generic 2 7 111 Figure 7 56 DS1 Circuit Pack Screen 7 113 Figure 7 57 Synchronization Plan Screen 7 117 Figure 7 58 Network Facilities Screen 7 118 Figure 7 67 DS1 Circuit Pack Screen Common Channel Signaling 7 128 Figure 7 68 DS1 Circuit Pack Screen ISDN PRI Signaling 7 128 Figure 7 66 Routing Pattern Screen 7 125 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 CONTENTS xvii Figure 7 80 Trunk Group Screen Page 2 ISDN PRI Figure 7 81 Trunk Group Screen Page 2 ISDN PRI for Cases 1 8 Figure 7 82 Trunk Group Screen Page 3 ISDN PRI Figure 7 83 Trunk Group Screen Page 4 ISDN PRI Figure 7 84 Trunk Group Screen Page 5 ISDN PRI Figure 8 1 Facilities Generating the RFA 8 9 Figure A 1 DS1 Circuit Pack Screen A 1 Figure A 2 Trunk Group Screen Page 1 MEGACOM A 2 Figure A 3 Trunk Group Screen Page 1 MEGACOM 800 A 3 Figure A 4 Trunk Group Screen Page 1 MEGACOM 800 DNIS A 4 Figure A 5 Trunk Group
190. d Permitted Translation Encodes depicts the permitted ranges for these encodes TABLE 7 6 Equipment Parameters and Permitted Translation Encodes Equipment Traditional Universal Parameter Module Module Module Number Cabinet Number DS1 Carrier ID Slot Numbers Note 1 ISDN PRI Trunks 5 and 18 Note 2 1 19 Note 3 Line Trunk Mode 5 and 18 Note 2 1 19 Note 4 OPS Line Only Mode 0 5 13 and 18 1 19 Note 5 NOTES 1 The circuit pack application type Field 14 will to a large degree determine which slots may be used 2 When a DSI MFAT carrier is configured with two DS1s physical slots 3 8 16 and 21 are available for other applications If only one DS1 is configured then six additional slots are available for other applications 3 When the slot is used for ISDN PRI trunk applications the adjacent right slot must be configured with the TN555 circuit pack except in nonfacility associated signaling NFAS arrangements that have no D channel on this DS1 link 4 When used for a mixture of lines and trunks two slots are required the adjacent right slot must remain vacant 5 When used for OPS line applications there is no requirement to leave a vacant slot to the right Actually all 19 slots 1 through 19 consecutively may be used to provide OPS However it is still recomended that the slot to the right remain vacant to accommodate future changes Used for assigning the framing format
191. d Service Features that can be received see the Service Type field description Specifies the expected number of digits to be contained in the called party number IE Field encodes and their descriptions are e A number within the range 0 to 16 the number of digits received must match the number that is administered in this field If the IXC is AT amp T and if the ISDN network service is MEGACOM 800 SDN or a switched digital service then a 4ESS may deliver from 0 to 7 digits Therefore if the service is correctly provisioned then the proper number and required number of digits will be delivered to the switch e No entry leave the field blank This will suffice for the case where the number of digits received is not significant ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 Called Number Del ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 7 149 Generally this field only specifies some of the leading digits that are contained in the called party number IE The digits received must match on a digit per digit basis what is administered in this field Field encodes and their descriptions are A series of numbers which may consist of from 1 to 16 digits corresponding to the required leading digits NOTE If this field is administered then the associated Called Len field must also be administered No entry leave the field blank This will suffice for the case where the digits r
192. d as system clock references unless it is known for certain that the incoming DS1 is locked to the AT amp T reference frequency Normally a DS1 facility terminating directly on a far end D4 channel bank is not locked to the AT amp T reference frequency Line Trunk Mode DS1 DMI BOS ANN35 or TN767 with TN555 Regarding the use of a line trunk mode DS1 DMI BOS for synchronization the following point should be noted Since it would be expected that a linet trunk mode DS1 would terminate at a class 5 or higher CO or at another switch the line trunk interface should be suitable for use as a primary or secondary clock reference or to be the timing master for another switch The slip count provided by the interface should also be used in the process of choosing a healthy clock reference However when the interface terminates on a D4 channel bank or equivalent that is not locked to the AT amp T reference frequency for its timing then the interface should not be used for synchronization DMI MOS ANN35 or TN767 with TNS555 System 85 DSI DMI MOS ANN35 will only terminate at a compatible computer The computer must always obtain its timing from the switch The switch should never select the DMI MOS link as a timing reference Although those circuit packs that support connections to remote modules operate at the DS1 s rate they are not the same as the DSI DMI ISDN PRI Remote module connections cannot be used as a clock synchronization r
193. d by translating the Group Type field as isdn pri 1 Will the switch provide ISDN PRI private network access or ISDN PRI public network access 2 If private network access you can translate the Service Type field as tie Depending on the particular application other service types may also be applicable such as tandem in particular if you want traveling class marks TCMs 3 If public network access then the identity of the interexchange carrier IXC or local exchange carrier LEC must be known Furthermore the particular carrier s ISDN network Services Features that are to be used must be known and defined in software translations NOTE The NETWORK FACILITIES screen lists by name and facility coding definition each of the currently available AT amp T ISDN network Services Features These are frequently called the Predefined Services Features If public network access is to an LEC or to an IXC other than AT amp T or if it is not defined then that carriers ISDN Services Features should be defined in the lower half of the screen 4 If public network access then translate the Service Type field as required such as cbc If the Service Type field is translated cbc then as an option a From 1 to 3 USAGE ALLOCATION PLANS may be defined b A time of day day of week ASSIGNMENT SCHEDULE consisting of up to six transition times per day may be defined for each usage allocation plan Alternately a usage allocation plan may be de
194. d require that the DS1 Interface also be administered for common channel signaling 24th Furthermore if avd is translated then the baud rate synchronization and duplex fields are displayed These three fields enable the trunk group to function with a modem pool A Data Originate code is required to start a modem pool call BCC This field is only displayed when JSDN PRI is enabled on the SYSTEM PARAMETERS CUSTOMER OPTIONS screen and when the Communications Type field is administered avd or data Trunk Type Establishes the physical type of incoming and outgoing trunks For tie trunk in out applications field encodes and their descriptions are e Auto e Immed start e Wink start e Delay dial With System 75 the digital loss plan is administered by entering a code with the Group Name field With Generic 1 the digital loss plan is administered with the following three fields Connect to The default is n Enter y if the trunk group terminates on a Digital Toll Office Toll STT Loss This field is only displayed condition that the Connected to Toll field is translated n Allowable entries are the default normal or option low Refer to chapter 4 The Digital Loss Plan for a description of the digital loss plan and for application information DTT to Allowable entries are the default normal or option low Refer to chapter 4 The Digital DCO LOSS Loss Plan for a description of the digital loss plan and for application information
195. d to forcibly ensure Suppression that the data meets Tl carrier ones density requirements The choice of data rates communications protocol and facility requirements discussed under System 85 procedure 260 field 9 also apply here Framing The choices are D4 or ESF previously called K The network diagram should Mode show the choice for the particular DS1 T1 span The other end and all intermediate equipment should be optioned accordingly ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 7 131 Signaling Mode DMI BOS The default option is common channel This option is the same as 24th channel or AVD for System 85 The alternate choices are ISDN PRI and robbed bit If ISDN PRI is optioned then the DMI BOS field disappears and the Connect field appears The choice of signaling mode used is dependent on the application If ISDN EXT is optioned Generic 1 R1V5 only the DMI BOS field disappears D channel related fields do not appear This option assings FAS NFAS to this DSI and D channel related data are administered in the SIGNALING GROUP screen Common channel signaling multiplexes all signaling information for channels 1 23 into the 24th channel This makes the full 64K bps bandwidth of channels 1 23 available for voice and or digital data transmission This capability is sometimes called Alternate Voice Data AVD The term AVD is a softwar
196. dentifier 7 46 Procedure 321 Word 5 AAR and ISDN Trunk Network Characteristics 7 48 Procedure 107 Word 1 ISDN Trunk Verification by Terminal Attendant and ATMS 7 49 Procedure 108 Word 1 ISDN Trunk Group Terminating Test Line Number Digits 7 50 Procedure 275 Word 4 ISDN Service Enable Disable 7 53 Procedure 276 Word 1 Other Feature Groups 7 54 Procedure 250 Word 1 SC DS1 Carrier Designation 7 54 Procedure 260 Word 1 DSI DMI ISDN PRI Physical Interface 7 56 Proecdure 262 Word 1 Additional DMI MOS ISDN PRI Facility Options Procedure 210 Word 2 LDN NPA and NNX Attendant Partition Assignments Procedure 014 Word 1 BCCOS Routing Options 7 80 Procedure 014 Word 2 BCCOS Data Options 7 82 Procedure 010 Word 4 Line Side B Channel ISDN Routing Options 7 84 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 Vili CONTENTS Procedure 101 Word 1 ISDN Trunk Group CDR and Digital Loss Plan 7 93 Procedure 012 Word 2 Name Database 7 100 Procedure 012 Word 3 Name Database 7 101 Procedure 279 Word 1 Network Facilities Coding 7 102 Procedure 309 Word 1 ARS Route Tables 7 104 Procedure 309 Word 5 ARS ISDN BCCOS 7 106 Procedure 321 Word 1 AAR Tables Generic 2 7 107 Procedure 321 Word 5 AAR ISDN and Other Feature Parameters 7 108 Procedure 107 Word 1 ISDN Trunk Verification by Terminal Attendant and ATMS 7 110 Procedure 108 Word 1 ISDN Trunk Group TTL Number Digits 7 111 SYSTEM 75 R1V2 AND
197. difference between a System 75 and Generic 1 is support of the TN767 circuit pack for both DS1 DMI and ISDN PRI Depending on whether a Generic 1 provides private network ISDN service or public network ISDN services whether the switch functions as an endpoint or as a tandem node will determine whether other features or screens should be administered with ISDN PRI Primarily these other features and screens include 1 AAR ARS Ten to seven digit conversion DCS uniform dialing plan SID prefix assignments Routing patterns Nonfacility Associated Signaling NFAS and D channel backup The SYSTEM PARAMETERS CUSTOMER OPTIONS screen displays these and other optional features New switches should come with the appropriate optional features already enabled Switch upgrades depending on the specifics may require that the CSSO alter the SYSTEM PARAMETERS CUSTOMER OPTIONS screen 2 3 4 Call by Call Service Selection 5 6 7 DS1 Circuit Pack Options The DS1 CIRCUIT PACK screen is used to define characteristics of the DS1 facility This screen requires that the circuit pack TN722 TN767 have been previously assigned to an equipment location carrier and slot by the CIRCUIT PACK ADMINISTRATION screen For ISDN PRI applications the screen has minor differences Therefore two screens are depicted The first is for DSI1 DMI BOS and the second is for ISDN PRI Screens are shown with default or recommended field options Figures DSI Circuit
198. digit of the trunk access code Permitted entries are 0 through 9 Assigns the third digit of the trunk access code Permitted entries are 0 through 9 Assigns the fourth digit of the trunk access code Permitted entries are 0 through 9 Defines the trunk type of a specific trunk group The ISDN PRI facility may be used to support several different trunk types These may include both conventional and the ISDN dynamic trunk types An important point to remember is that the service application such as MEGACOM MEGACOM 800 or SDN and incoming digits are the primary determining factors controlling which trunk type is selected To date trunk type 41 42 or 43 have been the trunk types used most frequently to support all ISDN applications including CBC ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 7 25 Incoming ISDN dynamic trunk type 120 calls to a System 85 may or may not specify an NSF Generally incoming calls from the public network will specify an NSF while calls from the private network will not specify an NSF For example if the NSF is delivered and it shows an SDN call then the System 85 defaults to trunk type 46 For all other incoming NSF values the switch will default to trunk type 30 For those incoming calls which do not deliver an NSF the switch will either use those interface endpoint trunks that are translated in procedure 116 or use a default that is dependent
199. digital loss plan 4 4 ISDN PRI trunk termination 5 29 sd node service connections 5 6 public network connections 2 6 restrictions A 2 touch tone capability 2 6 transaction network service TNS transmission availability 5 22 conditions digital data 9 error 10 synchronous 5 1 transparent port 6 10 6 12 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 IN 16 INDEX transport mode 23 7 8 7 82 traveling class mark TCM C 7 Bocl 24 0 display information ISDN PRI routing option service type trunk group assignments C 7 trunk access code FX2 8 713 ground start CO 6 11 group trunk group assigning trunk type to a C 6 cut through dialing digit sending ISDN PRI C 9 ITGI 2 18 members 7 96 Generic 1 7 144 System 75 R1V2 versus System 85 7 119 screen settings E 22 loop start CO 6 12 port family 6 10 RA 2 8 7 13 signaling E amp M 2 4 subnet_E 8 I a D4 channel bank 2 5 digital 6 70 tie terminating a 4 6 type 1086 3 oo 1096 3 o 120 C 6 and signaling type compatibility tables CBC 1 29 S trunk group Contd type Contd digital ground start 2 7 Direct Inward Dial DID 2 6 DMI 2 3 restrictions E amp M 2 7 ISDN dynamic 29 37 C 6 reverse battery 2 7 wink in wink out 2 4 verification by customer TVC C 8 by station TVS C 8 WATS 2 8 TSI 4 3 5 2 TTL 8 4 TTTN tuning up a DSI network TVC C 8 TVS C 8 U
200. e ANN11D or ANNIIE circuit pack automatically interrogates the far end and provides the required format For System 75 the proprietary format is administered by translating a n inthe DMI BOS field To select the DMI BOS format simply administer a y for the DMI BOS field V3 V4 A mode 1 data call requires a Line Trunk mode circuit pack with RBS option or ISDN ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 10 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 Field 9 V1 V4 Determines which line coding format will be used to forcibly ensure that the data meets Tl carrier ones density requirement The two choices are e Zero code suppression ZCS e Bipolar 8 zero code suppression B8ZS For a 56K bps call over a robbed bit facility use the ACCUNET switched digital service The ZCS line coding format scans each byte for the all zeroes octet and on detecting this bit sequence substitutes a one for the zero in bit position two The ZCS format is the most common and it is used widely The ZCS format can be used without any consideration of the communications protocol to transmit seven bit characters data at rates up through 56K bps via modems and multiplexers that do bit stuffing If the data communications protocol is based on the high level data link control HDLC protocol and data is transmitted as inverted HDLC then the ZCS option can be used for data rates up through 64K bps System 85 and System 75 data modules
201. e Most conventional trunk types specify as a part of their name an in out signaling sequence for default signaling types Actually these signaling sequences are disabled and type 20 signaling is used exclusively over ISDN facilities 3 Beginning with the 1 0 software load of Generic 2 and the 1 2 software load of System 85 R2V4 digits may be inferred when using the ISDN dynamic trunk type The default of 30 infers DID if necessary A default of 46 infers AAR ARS See Appendix C Administrative Procedure Summary for a complete explanation of this field Field 10 Used as a display only field The field displays the trunk type that was administered in procedure 100 word 1 Procedure 101 Word 1 ISDN Trunk Group CDR Digital Loss Plan and AVD Assignments Procedure 101 word 1 is used primarily to start CDR as well as translate the digital loss plan and AVD options Figure 7 13 Procedure 101 Word 1 Additional Trunk Group Translations System 85 R2V4 depicts this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 32 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 TIMED RECALL 10 Time E3 11 Level H 12 3y 14 WO DOIN HO BWNHH ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 101 WORD 1 TRUNK GROUP CHARACTERISTICS Balance B 16 Disconnect Supervision B Battery a 17 AVD E Incoming Prefix Digit vcs fF Touch Tone In AIOD Billing Number Touch Tone Out CDR Active
202. e attribute for a trunk It AVD allows pure 64K bps digital data to be transmitted over those DS1 trunks that use 24th channel signaling Although AVD trunks are designed for digital data transmission they may also be used for voice and voice grade data transmission However a pooled modem is required to transmit voice grade data over AVD trunks Due to a change in the evolving DS1 DMI protocol specification two methods for providing 24th channel signaling exist The two methods are not compatible with each other The earlier method is known as the AT amp T proprietary format conventional T1 test equipment cannot analyze it This latter version is known as the DMI BOS format T1 test equipment can analyze this format Either the AT amp T proprietary format or the DMI BOS format depending on the circuit pack configuration may be used with another System 75 or System 85 The DMI BOS format is required to provide 24th channel signaling capability with other vendors digital switches Common channel signaling both methods are not compatible with channel banks and multiplexers The TN722 circuit pack provides the AT amp T proprietary format the circuit pack does not provide DMI BOS The TN722B TN767 circuit pack may be administered to provide either the proprietary format or DMI BOS format Assigns the DS1 format Field encodes and their descriptions are n AT amp T proprietary This option assumes that common channel signaling is sele
203. e services provided by each connection any option restrictions and relevant synchronization issues The equipment used for completing the end to end connection may include any of the options described in chapter 3 DS7 Transmission and Cabling These options permit distances between endpoints of a few feet to thousands of miles Detailed information such as that required to install and administer a connection is contained in Port Types Installation Compatibilities and Administration Options and Requirments Common field problems relating to these connections are described in Appendix B Sample Installation and Maintenance Problems A complete description of synchronization is provided in chapter_5 Synchronization of Digital Facilities and loss adjustments are described in chapter 4 The Digital Loss Plan NETWORK DIFFICULTIES Two of the many difficulties that can exist on public and private networks are hyperactivity and glare Before describing connection arrangements the methods for dealing with these two difficulties is discussed Hyperactivity When a DS1 facility generates an abnormally high stimulus rate originating from an individual source over a certain amount of time such as rapid on hook and off hook conditions it is said to be hyperactive The call processing software can not handle the flood of stimuli resulting in dial tone delays Hyperactivity can be caused by bit errors on the facility misoptioned equipment or ha
204. e the far end D4 channel bank or equivalent is timed to the signal received from a DS1 DMI no slips should occur on a line only mode DS1 DMI facility Because of this slip counts from line only mode DS1 DMI should not be used in the process of determining the health of a clock reference that is they would tend to make the reference appear to be in better condition than it may be Line only mode DSI DMI should not be used as system clock references unless it is known for certain that the incoming DS1 DMI signal is locked to the AT amp T reference frequency Normally a DS1 DMI facility terminating directly on the far end D4 channel bank is not locked to the AT amp T reference frequency Trunk Mode DS1 DMI MOS TN767 For Generic 1 DS1 DMI MOS TN767 will only terminate at a compatible computer The computer must always obtain its timing from the switch The switch should never select the DMI MOS link as a timing reference NOTE For Generic 1 the TN722 may be used instead of the TN767 for non ISDN applications ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 5 32 SYNCHRONIZATION OF DIGITAL FACILITIES ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 6 PORT TYPES INSTALLATION COMPATIBILITIES This chapter describes the operating modes installation compatibilities and port types supported by DS1s Because of differences between Generic 1 and Generic 2 software and hardware appropriate distinctions are identified
205. e type of signaling required to support the trunk group From the software perspective and when applicable a trunk group is administered for either AVD or voice Trunk groups administered for AVD may be used for both voice and digital data applications and require a DS1 that is administered for 24th channel signaling Bearer Capability BC System 85 R2V4 introduced the administration attribute known as bearer capability BC The primary function of BC is to specify the transport mode and the channel requirements clear restricted needed for completing a data call BC is used for determing compatibility when non ISDN facilities are connected to ISDN facilities including originated calls terminated calls and tandem connections BC must be administered for all trunk groups every extension s class of service COS and all Automatic Route Selection ARS routing pattern preferences System 85 R2V4 For System 85 R2V4 there are the five different BC codes 0 Voice and voice grade data should be administered for DCP voice extensions analog lines analog trunks and data applications that use modems NOTE Except for 56K bps the trunk attribute AVD indicates 24th channel signaling and whether a modem pool must be inserted to complete the call ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 1 24 INTRODUCTION 1 Mode I data with the 56K bps option should be administered for 56K bps synchronous data applications MPDM
206. eceived are not significant The digit Del and digit Insert fields together provide the ability to do digit manipulation digit replacement on incoming calls It is the manipulated number that is used to route the call The Del field specifies the number of leading digits to be deleted from the Called Party Number IE Once the specified number of digits have been deleted the digits specified in the Insert field are prepended to the front of the Called Party Number Field encodes and their descriptions are A series of numbers which may consists of from 1 to 16 digits corresponding to the leading digits that are to be deleted This administration option may be used to solve many of the problems relating to cross dial plan mapping Application Example 1 If the called party number IE contains a 4 digit number that uniquely identifies an extension or hunt group but does not align with the required address because the switch has a 5 digit dial plan Then the appropriate leading digit may be inserted so that the call will route correctly Application Example 2 If the called party number IE contains the digits 8123 or 8567 but it is desired to route these calls to hunt groups with extensions 44123 and 44567 respectively Then the screen would have an entry for each number and the Del fields would contain a one and the Insert fields would contain the digits 44 NOTE The number of digits deleted cannot be greater than the number
207. ecord the slip counts for each DS1 are maintained for the last 24 consecutive intervals The slip count is used to determine if a DS1 span is experiencing errors and if so the severity of the errors type alarm If the primary facility uses 24th channel signaling and if the secondary facility uses RBS then the primary will always be on line unless a hardware event forces a switch to the secondary A software algorithm is used to select the facility primary or secondary that is on line for the cases where a Both primary and secondary facilities use the same type of signaling either 24th channel or RBS b The primary uses robbed bit and the secondary uses 24th channel signaling Criteria for Switching to the Secondary If as many as 50 of those spans that are administered for slip enable are experiencing slips with respect to the primary then a decision is made to switch to the secondary On switching to the secondary a software bit is set making the primary appear as though it has exceeded its maximum slip limit At this point the primary is not evaluated again for 1 hour Criteria for Switching Back to the Primary At the end of the 1 hour interval the slip count is analyzed If the primary slip count is less than 2 then a switch back to the primary is made Also if the primary has a slip count of 44 or less and if the secondary and 50 of those DS1s that are enabled for slip enable have reached their maximum slip count
208. ectory number LDN and NPA NXX assignments are completed thus relating these assignments to a particular attendant console or attendant partition Procedure 210 Word 2 Attendant Partition Assignments System 85 R2V4 depicts procedure 210 word 2 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 7 21 Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4 Field 5 ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 210 WORD 2 CONSOLE ASSIGNMENTS ATTENDANT PARTITIONS Console Number Attendant Partition Control LDN NPA NXX Designator enter command fea para FS ete Fe FELD JE tnpor Figure 7 8 Procedure 210 Word 2 Attendant Partition Assignments System 85 R2V4 Translates a console number Permitted encodes are any 2 digit number within the range of 1 through 40 NOTE The console must have previously been assigned in procedure 210 word 1 Assigns the attendant partition number Permitted encodes are any unused number within the range of 0 through 40 Assigns the one console in the attendant partition that will be the controlling console All other members of this group must have control denied Field encodes and their descriptions are Q For all but the controlling console 1 Only for the controlling console Assigns or associate the LDN with a particular console or console partition This number depends on the switch or private network numbering plan Assigns or
209. ed This may include voice and voice grade data BC code 0 and Mode 2 data BC code 2 Procedure 100 Word 1 Trunk Group Type Signaling and Dial Access ID Code Translating word 1 is the first step in establishing trunk groups Those trunk groups established for ISDN applications may be of the same design as those for non ISDN applications except for the type of signaling used Or they may optionally be designed to take maximum advantage of the ISDN capabilities Figure 7 10 Procedure 100 Word 1 Trunk Group Translations System 85 R2V4 shows procedure 100 word 1 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 24 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENT S SYSTEM 85 Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4 Field 5 Field 6 ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 100 WORD 1 TRUNK GROUP TRANSLATION 1 Trunk Group E DIAL ACCESS CODE TRUNK ID CODE 2 Digit 1 E 3 Digit 2 J 4 Digit 3 H 5 4 2E 6 Trunk Type E WAS Dial Access Restriction B 8 Personal CO Line Appearance Digit DISPLAY ONLY 9 Signaling Type E4 enter command Figure 7 10 Procedure 100 Word 1 Trunk Group Translations System 85 R2V4 Assigns a trunk group number Permitted entries are any unused number from 18 through 999 Assigns the first digit of the trunk access code Permitted entries are O through 9 for digits 0 through 9 and with 11 and 12 for the symbols and respectively Assigns the second
210. ed LED remains off following initialization a transient problem may be assumed to have occurred NOTE The circuit pack may fail the initialization tests for reasons other than bad hardware Known cases are port data interface or port data store problems and synchronization subsystem problems An example of the latter would be an online clock reference that has been externally looped to itself These problems are evidenced by all DS1s in a module or in the system failing to initialize properly ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 8 8 MAINTENANCE AND ALARMS Facility Alarms There are several types of facility alarms that may arise These are briefly described next Excessive Slips Data received from a DS1 facility is stored clocked into buffers on the circuit pack using a clock signal derived from the received signal Data is read from the same buffers using a clock derived from the master clock If at any time these two clocks are not phase locked data will be stored into the buffers at a rate different from the rate read from the buffers This results in underflow or overflow of the buffers called slips Slips result in the repetition or deletion of one 8 bit word for every channel The slip rate is monitored by the circuit pack The slip rate is used to determine if that DS1 being used as the system clock reference is functioning properly Slips cause pops in voice and voice grade data signals and can cause error
211. ed over a private network ISDN PRI transmission facility an IXC ISDN network is not used encode 0 must be translated Each network provider of ISDN service will have a different IXC identifier number When connecting to AT amp T ISDN network facilities encode 288 must be translated Numbers in the range 1 through 15 represent IXCs numbers in the range 16 through 999 are network IDs Procedure 321 Word 5 AAR ISDN and Other Feature Parameters This procedure is required for transalting ISDN trunk groups into the AAR plan NOTE When translating MEGACOM SDN and ACCUNET switched digital service calls you must first assign a network specific facility NSF index in field 1 of procedure 279 word 1 and then assign this same index in field 4 of this procedure to all patterns used for these types of calls Figure 7 53 Procedure 321 Word 5 AAR ISDN and Other Feature Parameters depicts this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 Ow wn ISDN Dynamic Trunk Type ISDN Network Service Value Bearer Capability COS ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 7 109 ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 321 WORD 5 AAR ISDN AND BEARER CAPABILITY COS Pattern Number Preference Number unnai Connected to CCO ON LINE f MAJOR MINOR RUN TAPE BUSY OUT IN USE WAIT enter command z Figure 7 53 Procedure 321 Word 5 AAR ISDN and Other Feature Parameters Generic 2 Field 1 Field
212. ed when the BCCOS does not support modem pools e Numbers between 0 and 255 These fields select the data rates 64000 56000 19200 9600 4800 2400 1200 300 or low speed supported by this modem pool Field encodes and their descriptions are 0 Not supported 1 Supported Defines if synchronization is 1 oris not 0 supported Defines if half 1 orfull 0 duplex operation is supported Defines if an external 1 or an internal 0 clock source is used Whenever a modem pool supports more than one data rate it is generally desirable to assign one data rate as a default or first choice Field encodes and their descriptions are numbers 1 through 9 which correspond to Low 300 64000 bps respectively ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 84 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 Procedure 010 Word 4 Line Side B Channel ISDN Routing Options Figure 7 39 Procedure 010 Word 4 Line Side B Channel ISDN Routing Options depicts this procedure ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 010 WORD 4 EXTENSION CLASS OF SERVICE RESTRICTIONS Class of Service Maximum Precedence Level ISDN Routing enter command Figure 7 39 Procedure 010 Word 4 Terminal COS Restrictions Generic 2 Field 1 When ISDN is administered each COS assignment must have an associated BC and ISDN routing assignment That is to say that whenever ISDN is enabled all COS assignments must also be translated fo
213. ed with two DS1s physical slots 3 8 16 and 21 are available for other applications If only one DS1 is configured then six additional slots are available for other applications To minimize confusion and eliminate the need for maintaining elaborate trunk to channel cross reference tables trunk group member assignments should match the DSI channel assignments for example trunk group member 1 on channel 1 For example using procedure 116 word 1 refer to DSI ISDN PRI Administration Channel Versus Trunk Assignments to determine which slot and circuit to translate for channel 1 Repeat this procedure by sequentially selecting DS1 channels 2 3 and so on and translating the appropriate slot and circuits as required Fields 1 5 These fields are used to translate the equipment location including slot and circuit channel location and to associate the equipment location channel with the particular trunk group translated in field 6 Field 6 Translates the trunk group Permitted encodes must be numbers with the range of 18 through 999 Field 7 Translates a particular number that functions as the night service number The digits depend on the particular application and its numbering plan Field 8 Disables a channel s signaling This disable function is required for establishing a dedicated switched connection Field encodes and their descriptions are O Signaling is enabled default value 1 Signaling is disabled This option is
214. eference USE OF GENERIC 1 AS A SYSTEM CLOCK REFERENCE To provide increased reliability it is recommended that for all cases the primary and secondary system clock references be placed in different modules Tips on how best to use DSIs as a clock reference are provided next Trunk Mode ISDN PRI TN767 ISDN PRI trunks may terminate on a 4ESS toll office SESS digital CO System 85 R2V4 Generic 1 Generic 2 or compatible vendor s switch Depending on other considerations any of these terminating connections may be selected as a primary or secondary synchronization reference ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 SYNCHRONIZATION OF DIGITAL FACILITIES 5 31 Trunk Mode Interface ISDN PRI Robbed Bit TN767 Since it is expected that a trunk mode DS1 would terminate at a class 5 or higher CO or at another switch the trunk interface should be suitable for use as a primary or secondary clock reference or to be the timing master for another switch The slip count provided by the interface should also be used in the process of choosing a healthy clock reference However when the interface terminates on a D4 channel bank or equivalent that is not locked to the AT amp T reference frequency for its timing then the interface should not be used for synchronization Line Only Mode DS1 DMI BOS TN767 When using a line only mode interface for synchronization purposes the following facts should be known e Sinc
215. either ISDN PRI or to the dial plan are discussed below For calls going out trunk groups bound for a Generic 1 via private tie trunks a 1 should not be sent Thus put a O in this field The analogous Generic 1 administration is the prefix digit in the ROUTING PATTERN screen This field is part of the subnet trunking feature If you want to dial a Generic with public network numbers NPA NXX XXXX but route the call over private tie trunks you must delete all the digits except for the station numbers This field works with procedure 309 words 3 and 4 Also procedure 103 word 4 must be set to 1 to allow subnet trunking The analogous Generic administration is in the No Deleted Digits and Inserted Digits fields in the ROUTING PATTERN screen ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 TIE TRUNK SETTINGS E 9 TABLE E 1 continued System 85 R2V4 Administration Settings PROCEDURE WORD FIELD REMARKS 309 l 11 For all ISDN PRI trunk groups this field should be 0 12 This field does not apply to the configuration and application discussed in this appendix because a System 85 R2V4 is connected to another communications system via private lines If it is connected to a 4 ESS 288 would be entered here which is the AT amp T network Thus you can leave this field blank for tie trunk groups connecting to a Generic 1 5 4 This field applies only to ISDN Dynamic trunk type 120 For the configuration a
216. el units should be verified for compatibility Verification includes a review of the administration options and where appropriate the option switch settings Each end of the channel must be fully compatible For example if at one end channel 1 is used as a tie trunk then channel at the distant end must also be used as a tie trunk Or if a group of channels for example 1 16 are administered for call by call CBC use at one end then the same group of channels must also be used for call by call If at one switch extended super framing ESF 24th channel signaling and the zero code suppression ZCS line code format are optioned then the distant end must be administered or optioned likewise 6 1 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 6 2 PORT TYPES INSTALLATION COMPATIBILITIES The 551V channel service units will only function with the ZCS line code format They will not pass B8ZS bipolar violations If the B8ZS line code format is used for copper carrier facilities then the 551V ST or equivalent NCTE should be installed and optioned accordingly The CDMs are T1 multiplexers that provide an economical means to independently access any of the 24 channels from a DS1 or T1 facility This access means is called per channel drop and insert capability One line interface unit the CDM DS1 connects to the compatible equipment such as a Generic 1 Generic 2 CEM or D4 channel bank The other line interface unit connects to t
217. en NOTE If the IXC is AT amp T and the public network connection is to a 4ESS digital switch that is configured with either 4e11 or 4e12 generic software then the Service Feature field must be completed for all entries except ACCUNET switched digital service For ACCUNET this field should be left blank however the BCC field must be administered n y n n n Ifa 4ESS is configured with 4e13 generic software then the Service Feature field must be completed for every entry including ACCUNET Band Permitted entries are numbers 0 through 255 which corresponds to outgoing WATS bands 0 through 255 NOTE This field is only displayed when the Service Feature field is translated outwats bnd Hunt Group ISDN PRI Applications This main reason for using this screen within an ISDN PRI environment is to support any of the call management call distribution systems Figure _7 88 Hunt Group Screen depicts this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 164 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 HUNT GROUP Page 1 of 6 Group Number _ Group Extension Group Type ucd Group Name Coverage Path COR 1 Security Code Message Center none ACD n Queue n Night Service Destination ISDN Caller Disp Figure 7 88 Hunt Group Screen Only the new ISDN PRI service application fields or those fields that require special or additional considerations are mentioned here IS
218. endpoints such as analog lines and DCP voice terminals must show their information transfer requirements in terms of a BC code The BC code is the mechanism by which specialized routing is provided for various categories of calls NOTE Once the BC code is assigned it is fixed and does not change with different calls Field encodes and their descriptions are 0 Voice and Voice grade data 1 Mode 1 data 56K bps 2 Mode 2 data subrate up to 19 2K bps 3 Mode 3 data also called packet mode 4 Mode 0 data 64K bps digital data Field 4 This field is used to populate part of the TCM IE and shows an ISDN PRI Routing option Field encodes and their descriptions are 0 For when any type of trunking facility is OK This option should be used when there are no specific requirements for ISDN PRI trunks Generally this will include all voice and voice grade data applications BC code 0 except those where user to user information transfer is desired bh When ISDN PRI trunking facilities are required Generally these applications include those COS groups established for Mode data BC code 1 Mode 3 data BC code 3 and Mode 0 data BC code 4 Mode 0 data depending on its origin may require a unrestricted channel Recall that an unrestricted channel is only provided by those ISDN PRI facilities that use the B8ZS line coding format N When any trunking facility will work but when ISDN PRI trunk facilities are preferr
219. eneric 1 or Generic 2 These connections are the most frequently used private network configurations Typically digital tie trunks are used to connect the switches However other trunk types such as ISDN dynamic trunk type 120 may be used These trunks may be used to transmit voice voice grade data and digital data If the two switches are colocated then there are no network facilities between the switches and any combination of signaling framing and line coding may be used Excluding the user network option all other options should be administered identically for both switches Whenever carrier facilities are used to connect the ISDN PRI endpoints the carrier facilities may place limitations if there are any on the permitted options When two or more switches are connected they must be synchronized one switch must be chosen as the timing master and the other must derive timing from the master Chapter 5 Synchronization of Digital Facilities describes synchronization procedures ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 NETWORK CONNECTIONS AND CONFIGURATIONS 2 13 System 85 or Generic 2 ISDN PRI to Another Vendor s Digital Switch When a System 85 or Generic 2 ISDN PRI connects to another vendor s customer premises switch another vendor s ISDN PRI or equivalent several items should be verified to ensure compatibility These include the interface electrical characteristics options and synchronization cap
220. eneric 2 transfers network specific information in codeset 6 leaving codeset 7 available for user specific information NOTE Codesets 1 through 5 are reserved for future standards expansion CBC Service Selection CBC trunk groups eliminate the need for dedicating specific B channels to a particular service CBC Service Selection can dynamically select individual B channels from a group of B channels and allocate those B channels to any of the subscribed services The selected B channel may function as a specific trunk type for a specific service during one call then later the same B channel may function as a different trunk type for a different service during another call The primary advantages of CBC Service Selection include ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 INTRODUCTION 1 31 e More efficient and effective use of ISDN PRI network access trunks e More access trunks available for call routing providing an improvement in the grade of service e Reduction usually in the number of access trunks needed to provide the required grade of service because of the increase in efficiency CBC Service Selection is a public network ISDN feature The AT amp T ISDN network provides CBC Service Selection for AT amp T ISDN nodal services such as MEGACOM service MEGACOM 800 service Software Defined Network SDN ACCUNET switched digital service and switched digital international To use CBC Service Selection the custome
221. eona OOOO O E e F6 FIELD F7 INPUT r8 CMDS Figure 7 35 Procedure 000 Word 4 NPA NXX Index Designator Field 1 Assigns a single extension number or the first extension number for a block of numbers The single number or block of numbers will be unique in terms that they relate to a single extension partition identification Field 2 Assigns the last extension number for a block of numbers ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 7 79 Field 3 Assigns the extension partition identification for the tenant services feature This number associates the single or block of extension numbers to a particular ISDN facility NPA NXX Designator Field 4 Associates an NPA NXX Designator with the previously defined extension Procedure 210 Word 2 LDN NPA and NNX Attendant Partition Assignments This procedure is used to configure the attendant consoles into groups known as attendant partitions Also LDN and NPA NXX assignments are completed thus relating these assignments to a particular attendant console or attendant partition Figure 7 36 Procedure 210 Word 2 LDN NPA and NNX Attendant Partition Assignments depicts this procedure ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 210 WORD 2 CONSOLE ASSIGNMENT ATTENDANT PARTITIONS Console Number Attendant Partition Control LDN NPA NXX Designator Connected to CCO ON LINE QY MAJOR MINOR RUN TAPE BUSY OUT IN USE en
222. equirement to have both V1 V4 Selects whether a DS1 facility translated in field 12 is to be used as the primary or secondary synchronization source to the switch Field encodes and their descriptions are Q The facility is not used as a synchronization source 1 The facility is the primary synchronization source 2 The facility is the secondary synchronization source NOTE The primary must be administered before the secondary The secondary must be removed before the primary Only slots translated 1 and 2 must be configured with synchronization cables These cables connect the backplane of the translated ANN11 ANN35 to the backplane of the TN463 The cables are identified as group 334 for intercabinet and group 361 for intracabinet applications cauTion A loop timing problem can be created if the synchronization sources are not administered correctly The loop timing problem exists as the result of an error where both switch endpoints for the same T1l span are administered as the primary This causes the clock frequency to vary widely and result in bringing down the switch Loop timing problems can be avoided by following a correctly engineered network synchronization diagram ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 7 13 Field 14 V3 V4 Field encodes and their descriptions are 0 Selects the DS1 DMI BOS channels used for both trunks and lines the l
223. er information e Called party name e Calling party name Data mode 3 parameters e Traveling class marks NOTE Those items identified with an asterisk can only be passed through the ISDN public network on an end to end basis whenever all interoffice signaling links use CCITT signaling system number 7 SS7 Field encodes and their descriptions are Dash only applicable whenever ISDN is not available 0 Recommended for all ISDN configurations both public and private network arrangements 1 When the optional ISDN IEs are not to be transmitted ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 7 31 Field 9 A CBC function used in conjunction with trunk verification by station TVS which specifies the requested network service The following table shows permitted field entries that support signaling type 20 Trunks Supporting Signaling Type 20 Trunk Description CoO 16 17 Note 1 18 19 20 Data 100 107 DID 30 31 DMI Note 2 108 109 FX 21 25 ISDN 120 Note 3 M S TIE 70 78 Special 2 5 6 50 58 62 65 67 90 93 TIE 32 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 WATS 26 27 28 NOTES 1 Trunk types preceded with an asterisk may be selected by trunk type 120 on an as needed Call By Call CBC Service Selection basis 2 Trunk types not included in these categories may not be translated for ISDN PRI servic
224. er to override the night service option that is administered on page 1 of the TRUNK GROUP screen Allowable entries are an extension the attendant or to leave blank if the Trunk Type field does not begin with auto Mode For DS1 tie trunk applications the default and only permitted entry is e amp m Type For DS1 DMI applications the default is T1 stan T1 standard Normally this field is not administered The default value is appropriate Ans Delay Allowable entries in milliseconds range from 20 to 5100 in intervals of 20 This should only be translated if delay dial were optioned Processor Interface Data Module ISDN PRI Applications Each ISDN PRI circuit pack maintains the 24th channel as the D signaling channel For the switch processor to communicate with the D signaling channel an administration link must be established between the processor and the D channel The procedure for establishing this link involves administering the following three screens e PROCESSOR INTERFACE DATA MODULE e PROCESSOR CHANNEL ASSIGNMENTS e INTERFACE LINKS Figure 7 75 Data Module Screen depicts this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 7 139 DATA MODULE Page 1 of 1 Data Extension Type procr infc Physical Channel Maintenance Extension ABBREVIATED DIALING List 1 HOT LINE DESTINATION Abbreviated Dialing Dial Code from a
225. erent interfaces can have different map numbers assigned For example one interface can map the TCM to codeset 7 while another interface can map the TCM to codeset 0 Table 7 8 Codeset Mapping Requirements summarizes the current codeset mapping requirements for Generic 2 Table 7 8 Codeset Mapping Requirements Codeset Map Opcode Map When Required Map from codeset 6 to codeset Map from opcode 8 to opcodelIf a System 85 R2V4 is present 7 outgoing 8 in both directions in an end to end ISDN network Map from codeset 7 to codese with Generic 2 this codeset 6 incoming mapping is required Map from codeset 6 to codeset Map from opcode 40 to opcode If a System 85 R2V4 is present 7 outgoing 40 in both directions in an end to end ISDN network Map from codeset 7 to codese with a Generic 2 this codeset 6 incoming mapping is required Figure 7 32 Procedure 280 Word 1 ISDN PRI Receive Transmit Codeset Mapping Generic 2 depicts this procedure ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 280 WORD 1 ISDN CODESET MAPPING 1 Codeset Map Number 2 Incoming Outgoing H MAPPED FROM CODESET INFORMATION ELEMENT 3 Codeset E 4 Information Element Opcode MAPPED TO CODESET INFORMATION ELEMENT Ds Codeset B 6 Information Element Opcode E DISPLAY ONLY 7 Available Map Number Mappings Ez rE enter command w CE E aa OOOO O E ee Fe FIELD F7 input Fa cups Figure 7 32 Procedure 280 Word 1 ISDN PRI
226. ert or not invert bits The PC ISDN Platform with 3270 Emulation requires a 3270C data module on the far end Options exist on the PC ISDN Platform with ASCII Terminal Emulation to allow the user to choose either 56K bps or 64K bps and to choose to invert or not invert bits Either mode 3 2 adaptive or mode 2 handshakes are used depending on the baud rate option setting If the setting is 19 2K bps or slower a mode 2 handshake is used Mode 3 operation is defined as synchronous when in 3270 emulation otherwise mode 3 operation on the PC ISDN Platform is defined as asynchronous Some applications where DCP and DMI formatted data are not used include the following a When 64K bps data is transmitted across DSI DMI ISDN PRI facilities via a dedicated switch connection or DSC to an endpoint such as a channel bank channel unit b When a point to point data application is done with CDMs to drop and insert DSO channels Here it is up to the user endpoints to ensure that the 1s density requirement is met The method used to provide ACCUNET switched digital service used by D4 channel banks also maintains the ls density requirement This method uses only seven of the eight bits for each DSO channel s 8 bit word to carry user data The remaining bit 8 is wired to a 1 MPDM MI1 is compatible with ACCUNET switched digital service IMPORTANT CONCEPTS Important concepts discussed in this section include ADDENDUM 1 December 19
227. ervice will have a different IXC identifier number When connecting to AT amp T ISDN network facilities the required number is 288 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 7 45 Procedure 309 Word 5 ARS and ISDN Trunk Network Characteristics This procedure is required for translating ISDN trunk groups into the ARS plan Figure 7 20 Procedure 309 Word 5 ARS and Transit Network Identifiers System 85 R2V4 depicts this procedure ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 309 WORD 5 ARS ISDN AND BEARER CAPABILITY COS ARS Plan E Pattern Number Preference Number ISDN Dynamic Trunk Type Network Service Value E Ow whe BEARER CAPABILITY 6 Voice or Voice Grade H Pisa Mode 1 Data 8 Mode 2 Data S 9 Mode 3 Data E 10 Mode 0 Data B enter command Figure 7 20 Procedure 309 Word 5 ARS and Transit Network Identifiers System 85 R2V4 Fields 1 3 The ISDN PRI does not place any new or additional considerations on translating these fields The codes digits translated are generally dependent on each ARS plan and other switch or network considerations ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 46 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 Field 4 Translates ISDN trunk type 120 only Recall that for ISDN applications the trunk type may be translated as fixed that is one specific type or dynamic whi
228. es 1 13 Figure 1 7 Alternate Mark Inversion 1 17 Figure 1 8 Example of B8ZS Line Coding Figure 1 9 ISDN Message Signaling Format 1 29 Figure 2 1 Example ITGI Configuration 2 17 Figure 2 2 AT amp T 6500 ISDN Advantage 2 20 Figure 3 1 NCTE Framing Configurations 3 6 Figure 3 2 On Premises Metallic Cable Configurations 3 8 Figure 3 3 Off Premises Metallic Cable Configuration 3 9 Figure 3 4 Nonmetallic Cabling Configurations 3 11 Figure 3 5 CEM and CDM Cable Configurations 3 12 Figure 4 1 End to End Loss Configuration Using Combination Tie Trunks 4 5 Figure 5 1 Options for Synchronization 5 2 Figure 5 2 Synchronization Hierarchy 5 5 Figure 5 3 Stratum Levels for the Synchronization Hierarchy 5 7 Figure 5 4 SCS Generic 2 5 8 Figure 5 5 Duplicated Synchronization Architecture and Cross Coupling 5 9 Figure 5 6 Tone Clock Synchronizer Nonduplicated Generic 1 5 12 Figure 5 7 Public Network External Clock 5 15 Figure 5 8 External Clock 5 16 Figure 5 9 External Clock Interface 5 17 Figure 5 10 External Clock Duplicated Synchronization 5 17 Figure 5 11 External and Internal Reference Levels 5 19 Figure 5 12 Nonpublic Network without Digital Switches 5 20 Figure 5 13 Proper Use of Backup Facilities 5 21 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 xiv CONTENTS Figure 5 14 Improper Use of Backup Facilities 5 22 Figure 5 15 Optimal Diverse Routing 5 23 Figure 5 16 Less Than Optimal Diverse Routing 5 24
229. es 5 8 are similar to Cases 1 through 4 respectively The only difference is that the Service Feature field is changed to other The remaining fields repeat the same conditions on a case by case basis Therefore cases 5 8 may serve to receive other incoming Services Features for example SDN or any of the Switched Digital Services Example Screen Entries for Cases 1 8 Figure 7 81 Trunk Group Screen Page 2 ISDN PRI for Cases 1 8 depicts this example TRUNK FEATURES Page 2 of 11 ACA Assignment n Long Holding Time hours 1 Short Holding Time secs 10 Short Holding Threshold 15 MIS Measured n Internal Alert n Used For DCS n PBX ID 1 Data Restriction n Maintenance Tests y Send SID n Send Name n Service Called Called Del Insert Per Call Night Feature Len Number SID ANI Serv mega800 5 855 mega800 5 8 mega800 4 mega800 Ta other N M other N M other N blank other bla blank Figure 7 81 Trunk Group Screen Page 2 ISDN PRI for Cases 1 8 Trunk Group Usage Allocation ISDN PW Applications If the trunk group Service Type field is administered cbc then up to 10 Service Feature specific digit treatments can be administered for each usage allocation plan refer to the CBC TRUNK GROUP USAGE ALLOCATION screen Page 3 of 11 NOTE Although each usage allocation plan may contain up to 10 entries a given Service Feature may only be listed once per plan ADDE
230. es are satisfactory In contrast B channels transmitting 64K bps digital data require that the connected channel have the same call characteristics the same BCC such as where an ISDN channel is required This information appears in the traveling class mark TCM IE layer 3 codeset 7 in System 85 R2V4 and in codeset 6 in Generic 2 Generic 1 For information about how BC is done for Generic 1 refer to the AT amp T DEFINITY 75 85 Communications System Generic I and System 75 and System 75 XE Feature Description 555 200 201 Generic 2 Generic 2 continues the bearer capability concept with bearer capability class of service BCCOS BCCOS is a set of attributes that is assigned to extensions AAR and ARS routing pattern preferences and trunk groups BCC is one of these attributes BCCOS determines such actions as call routing and modem pooling insertion based on the calling and called parties BCCs and information types that is clear or restricted You can assign up to 256 BCCOSs 0 255 where codes 0 through 9 are predefined as 0 Voice only used for voice application extensions such as DCP and ISDN BRI extensions analog lines and analog trunks 1 Mode 2 data used for EJA data terminations and DCP or BRI data modules that do not operate as packet mode data and are optioned for any of the following data rates low 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 or 19 2K bps 2 Mode 3 2 adaptive data used for data applications that can
231. essage Waiting Automatic Bearer Capability Class of Service Nu PWwNEH corey Universal Code Calling ID Connected to CCO ON LINEY Magor MINoR RUN TAPE BUSY out _IN USE enter command w les bata lf Fs neve F FIELD F7 input Fe cys Figure 7 34 Procedure 000 Word 3 Line Side BCCOS Designator ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 78 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 Procedure 000 Word 4 NPA NXX Index Designator Depending on how the switch is used procedure 000 word 4 may or may not be translated Specifically word 4 field 4 is used for partitioning ISDN or both and must be translated when a The switch transmits SID or connected number to the network b The switch provides unique extension number partitions Field 4 of procedure 000 word 4 need not be translated when the switch does not transmit SID or connected number to the network public or private If the switch contains more than one office code multiple NPA NNX designators may be needed Figure 7 35 Procedure 000 Word 4 NPA NXX Index Designator depicts this procedure ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 000 WORD 4 EXTENSION NPA NXX PARTITION ASSIGNMENT First Extension Extension Partition Le ei Last Extension 3a 4 NPA NXX Designator DISPLAY ONLY 5 Invalid Extension Connected to CCO ON LINE Q MAJOR MINOR RUN TAPE BUSY OUT IN USE enter command CC iC O
232. etween various types of calls the service type is specified as a part of the message Also included are BCC and NSF IEs The NSF IE identifies the feature or service provided by the network carrier such as MEGACOM service from AT amp T The called party IE is used to specify routing digits such as the North American dialing plan or RNX ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 1 30 INTRODUCTION Except for DCS the originating and terminating switches do channel negotiation to select a channel that is compatible with both endpoints Channel negotiation gives some control of the B channel used for a call If the originating endpoint chooses a B channel that is unacceptable to the terminating endpoint for example planned use of the channel by the terminating endpoint then the terminating endpoint can request a change in the channel to be used for that call Although Q 931 recommendations allow for an asymmetrical design that is a user to network protocol most ISDN PRI procedures on System 85 R2V4 Generic 1 and Generic 2 can be used symmetrically These communications systems can be administered as either the user side or as the network side When accessing a 4ESS switch SESS switch or vendor compatible toll office or CO the customer premises switch must have a user side interface For ISDN PRI links between two private network switches one link must be administered for the user side and the other for the network
233. even digit RNX XXXX numbers Customers can choose between 0 and 7 incoming digits to a switch Field 7 Assigns the dial access code restriction Field encodes and their descriptions are 0 Allows access to the trunk group via a dial access code 1 Restricts and only allows access to the trunk group for trunk testing and for providing unattended console service Field 8 Assigns the trunk group as a MFT CO line appearance For the ISDN application encode 0 is applied Field 9 Displays default signaling and verify that the type of trunk signaling is correct The ISDN feature uses message oriented signaling Therefore encode 20 should be used If the trunk signaling is not as desired then it may be changed with field 2 of word 3 Procedure 100 Word 2 Trunk Group Data Translations This word is used to administer data characteristics for each trunk group The ISDN feature does not place any new or additional requirements or restriction on the use of this procedure Selecting the appropriate translations requires the same basic considerations as previously Therefore a description for this procedure s fields is not provided Procedure 100 Word 2 Trunk Group Data Characteristics System 85 R2V4 depicts procedure 100 word 2 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 7 27 ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 100 WORD 2 TRUNK GROUPS DATA AND MODEM POOLING 1 Trunk Grou
234. everse battery DD delay dial LS loop start DOD direct outward dial MS main satellite DP dial pulse RLT release link trunk DT dial tone TT touch tone E amp M ear and mouth WDDFOT wink delay dial fail on timeout GS ground start WS wink start IS immediate start TABLE D 1 Trunk Signaling Cross References Trunk Procedure Feature Direction Signaling Procedure Description Encode Types Encode intercom N A none DP digit register N A none TT digit register N A none attendant digit register N A none switched loop N A JA attendant conference N A general purpose queing N A N A none DT detector N A N A none none EF none unused 2 way CCSA DD in out 2 way 2 way CCSA DD out wink in 2 way 2 way CCSSA DT out DD in 2 way 2 way CCSA DT out wink in 2 way E amp M DD in wink DD out wink DT E amp M WS in DD out wink DT E amp M DD in IS out E amp M WS in IS out l way in attendant completing auto in ay i GS LS DMI ISDN MOS E amp M auto in IS out E amp M auto in WS out ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 TRUNK TYPE AND SIGNALING TYPE COMPATIBILITY TABLES D 3 TABLE D 1 Trunk Signaling Cross References continued Trunk Procedure Feature Direction Signaling Procedure Description Encode Types Encode l way out DOD 17 co l way out GS 1 LS 19 DMI ISDN MOS 20 E amp M auto in IS out 28 E amp M auto in WS out 29 l way out DOD with party test 18 co
235. f premises stations OPS When a DS1 facility is used exclusively for lines it must be administered for RBS Also the facility cannot be used as a synchronization reference When a DS1 is administered for lines OPS it provides 24 channels that terminate in a remote D4 channel bank CDM or their equivalent Analog equipment location assignments are administered by procedure 000 word 1 with field 8 translated to a 2 The DSI OPS channels are translated to equipment locations individual extensions with procedure 000 word 1 with field 8 translated to a 9 rather than with procedure 116 that was used for trunks 5 Assigns that the DS1 is used to provide DMI MOS or ISDN PRI trunk facilities NOTE When encode 5 is administered procedure 262 is automatically translated with standard default options These default options should be rechecked later for consistency with the distant end refer to procedure 262 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 7 65 Field 15 Some facilities require that the contents of the D channel be inverted to guarantee that the minimum ones density be maintained that is ZCS line coding is used This field shows whether the D channel is inverted or not Field encodes and their descriptions are Dash not applicable or ZCS line coding is translated in field 9 The dash is appropriate for all applications of the AN
236. f you use the Subnet Trunking feature you need either PNA or ARS If you use the UDP feature you do not need PNA UDP software is a separate PEC having no prerequisite This option is not strictly required It allows you to dial the public network number of an endpoint on a System 85 but route the call over the private ISDN PRI tie trunk by converting the public network number to a private network number To administer this option ARS and UDP or PNA must be enabled All entries on the TEN DIGIT TO SEVEN DIGIT CONVERSION screen must be assigned Instructions for doing this can be found in DEFINITY 75 85 Communications System Generic I and System 75 Implementation Issue 1 February 1989 555 204 654 See pages 4 23 and 6 176 This option is not strictly required It is useful in setting up a uniform four or five digit dial plan between a System 85 R2V4 and a Generic 1 This feature works by converting an extension number to an RNX plus an extension number To administer UDP see DEFINITY 75 85 Communications System Generic 1 and System 75 Implementation Issue 1 February 1989 555 204 654 See pages 3 243 4 20 4 28 5 68 6 73 6 163 and 6 164 Feature Related System Parameters Screen Settings Following is an example of typical settings for this screen when a Generic is connected to a System 85 R2V4 via ISDN PRI tie trunks ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 TIE TRUNK SETTINGS E 13 FEATURE RELATED SY
237. fields are ignored by ISDN software Either encode 0 or 1 is satisfactory Procedure 103 Word 1 Network Trunk Group Translations This procedure is used to translate the trunk group network parameters Figure 7 44 Procedure 103 Word I Network Trunk Group Translations depicts this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 96 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 103 WORD 1 NETWORK TRUNK GROUP TRANSLATION Trunk Group Facility Restriction Level Network Trunk Main Tandem Incoming Tie to AAR ARS or APLT Authorization Code Required Bridge On Allowed Trunk Reservation Limit AAR ARS Prefix Oo OI HO BF WN PB Data Protection Permanent Remote Access Echo Suppressor AAR Conditional Routing Second TCM Digit Collection oororoprrnrnij Connected to CCO ON LINE MAJOR MINOR RUN TAPE BUSY OUT IN USE enter command da para JL Fs mr F6 FIELD F7 Input F8 CMDS Figure 7 44 Procedure 103 Word 1 Network Trunk Group Translations Generic 2 Field 1 Displays the trunk group number such as previously administered in procedure 100 and 101 Fields 2 13 The ISDN PRI does not place any new or additional considerations on translating these fields The encodes that are translated are generally dependent on each trunk group its application and the associated trunk groups Field 14 Specifies how the dialed digits are ou
238. fined as fixed meaning that the selected allocation plan is always in effect 6 For all Service Types each incoming type of Service Feature such as MEGACOM 800 and SDN may receive service specific incoming call handling treatment Included is the administration ability to request SID ANI on a per call basis to do digit deletion digit insertion on a per call basis or to effect night service routing based on attributes of the incoming call NOTE The determination of whether the switch will request SID ANI on a CBC basis depends on the station called and certain administration data for that station Advantages of CBC Trunking In a non CBC Service Selection environment specific DS1 channels must be preassigned and provisioned for each desired service To determine the proper number of trunks per service application requires extensive traffic engineering studies With such a study trunk groups can be designed to accommodate a customer s peak traffic for given service applications Furthermore the time when one service application encounters peak traffic may not coincide with when another service application encounters peak traffic As an alternative if multiple network services are accommodated with a single trunk group and that trunk group is provided with allocation and scheduling controls then significant trunking efficiencies are realized by distributing the traffic over the total number of available trunks CBC Usage Allocation Pla
239. gle carrier can provide up to 96 digital OPS ports Figure 6 1 Physical and Virtual Carrier Slot Relationships Line Only Mode shows the carrier slots physical versus virtual slot locations and their relationship to OPS port numbers ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 PORT TYPES INSTALLATION COMPATIBILITIES 6 7 Line Trunk Mode The line trunk mode of a DS provides the capability of mixing both lines and trunks on the same DS1 facility The DS1 works by default in line trunk mode unless the backplane strap is configured Here a DS1 provides the equivalent of six analog circuit packs each providing four ports The line trunk DS1 thus requires six slots one for the actual circuit pack and five as virtual slots Virtual slots mean the same thing for line trunk mode as they do for the line only interface with one variation virtual slots provide four ports for the line trunk mode versus eight ports for the line only mode System 85 hardware allows a maximum of four trunk circuits per slot Therefore line trunk mode only uses four backplane time slots from each of the six carrier slots Thus a maximum of four OPS ports may be administered for any one of the virtual or actual slots A maximum of two line trunk circuit packs may be configured in each carrier They may only be placed in slots 5 and 18 Therefore with line trunk mode the carrier will support a maximum of 48 digital trunks or 48 OPS ports Virtual slots
240. gnal occurs This bipolar violation monitor and removal feature is currently an inherent part of the MX3 M13 MX2 and MIC multiplexers as well as most vendors multiplexers ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 7 11 Field 10 V1 V4 This options enables 1 or disables 0 switching between the primary secondary or internal high accuracy clock The decision to switch from one source to the other is normally based on an internal slip count calculation software record However hardware events such as primary link failures may take precedence over any software controls Slips are caused by differences in clock frequencies A slip results in the deletion or repetition of a single frame Slips are not caused by noise on the line DS1 T1 spans that are used to provide the primary and secondary synchronization reference should be administered for slip enable 1 Since the switch software does this automatically this task is not mandatory but is a good procedure to follow Typically other DS1 T1 spans that are used for data applications and deemed important should also be administered for slip enable This excludes all T1 spans connecting channel banks unless the channel bank is externally timed Normally DS1 T1 spans that are used exclusively for voice and not assigned as the primary or secondary synchronization source should be administered for slip disable 0 The
241. goal is to keep that reference on line which minimizes slips for all those DS1 DMI Interfaces for which slips cannot tolerated The digital switch always maintains a slip count record for each DS1 Slip counts are calculated on a 24 hour continuous interval As a historical record the slip counts for each DS1 are maintained for the last 24 consecutive intervals The slip count is used to determine if a DS1 span is experiencing errors and if so the severity of the errors type alarm If the primary facility uses 24th channel signaling and if the secondary facility uses RBS then the primary will always be on line unless a hardware event forces a switch to the secondary A software algorithm is used to select the facility primary or secondary that is on line for the cases where a Both primary and secondary facilities use the same type of signaling either 24th channel or RBS b The primary uses robbed bit and the secondary uses 24th channel signaling The slip count can be viewed in procedure 625 test 1 Criteria for Switching to the Secondary Facility If 50 of the spans administered for slip enable are experiencing slips with respect to the primary then a decision is made to switch to the secondary When a System 85 switches to its secondary a software bit is set making the primary appear as though it exceeded its maximum slip limit The primary is not reevaluated for one hour Criteria for Switching Back to the Primary Facility
242. he 1 option no inversion is recommended for use when B8ZS is administered Field 16 V4 Only The DS1 DMI BOS applications should be administered with a The DMI MOS ISDN PRI applications should be optioned 0 for use when connecting to metallic copper cable Connections to fiber cable are not currently supported Therefore option one is not applicable Field 17 V4 Only This field is added to bring a System 85 R2V4 into compliance with EIA specification PIN 1429 This EIA specification relates to BOS MOS is defined by a CCITT specification Field encodes and their descriptions are Dash means not applicable The dash is appropriate for all applications of the ANNS35 circuit pack both DMI MOS and ISDN PRID 0 Appropriate for all applications of DS1 DMI BOS except when connecting to a switch that uses the Canadian style of signaling 1 Selected when connecting to a DS1 DMI BOS that uses the Canadian style signaling as specified in PN 1429 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 16 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 Procedure 262 Word 1 ISDN Board Parameters Procedure 262 is used in System 85 R2V4 and Generic 2 to administer DMI MOS ANN35 for other service facility options DMI MOS ISDN PRI only Figure 7 5 Procedure 262 Word 1 ISDN Board Parameters depicts procedure 262 word 1 ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 262 WORD T ISDN BOARD PARAMETERS EQUIPMENT LOCATION 1
243. he NCTE and T1 facility Dedicated data applications both point to point and multipoint can be connected to the CDM and inserted in selected channels At the receive end particular channels may be dropped from a DS1 or T1 facility by another CDM or routed through a dedicated switch connection DSC as required TABLE 6 1 Supported Digital Facilities DS1 DMI ISDN PRI Circuit Pack Suffix Compatibility Matrix Signaling System 85 R2 and G2 System 75 R1 and G1 Type Switch ANNI1 ANN35 TN555 TN767 Switch Version Note 1 G2 Only G2 Only Version V1 V4 G B C DI B C D E a j Ground Start C D E a a ii iiia Note 5 CO FX WATS RA Plus DID DMI BOS Note 3 V3 V4 G DSC analog data V3 V4 G Note 7 DMI MOS and ISDN V4 G2 Note 8 Loop Start a a CO FX WATS RA Note 5 OPS Line Note 6 C D a all Proprietary V1 V4 G2 B C D a V2 V3 G1 Note 2 NOTES 1 The ANNIIE and ANNIIC have similar functions with one exception the ANNIIE supports the DMI BOS 24th channel signaling format and the ANNIIC does not The DMI BOS format was added in addition to the proprietary 24th channel and robbed bit formats supported by ANNIIC The applications of these formats are summarized below in a feature comparison The ANNIIC and ANNIIE are compatible with respect to all other options not listed in this table including robbed bit RB signaling D4 ESF framing and ZCS B8ZS line coding ADDENDUM 1
244. identify by name the Service or Feature NOTE The name ACCUNET is used to access both domestic and international service Facility The ISDN PRI specification requires that each network capability be identified as Type either a feature 0 or service 1 Facility The ISDN PRI specification further requires that each service or feature be identified as Coding a e Parameterized Service e Parameterized Feature e Binary Service e Binary Feature ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 144 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 Trunk Group ISDN PRI Trunk Applications ISDN PRI trunk groups are defined by using the first page of the TRUNK GROUP screen Since ISDN PRI uses Message Oriented Signaling the format of this screen is somewhat different from the assigned basic DS1 service Page 2 administers certain features that are unique to ISDN PRI trunk groups Screen pages 3 and 4 are only displayed if the Service Type field on page 1 is administered CBC Screen pages 5 through 11 are used as required to assign group members Figure 7 79 Trunk Group Screen Page I ISDN PRI depicts this procedure TRUNK GROUP Page 1 of 11 Group Number Group Type isdn pri SMDR Reports y Group Name OUTSIDE CALL COR TAC Direction two way Outgoing Display Dial Access y Busy Threshold Night Service Queue Length 0 Service Type cbc Auth Code Usage Allot y Far
245. ield 14 of procedure 260 These entries should always be correct Field 5 BRI Only For ISDN PRI and DMI MOS applications the dash is appropriate ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 68 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 Field 6 Assigns this interface as the user 0 or the network 1 side When connected to a 4ESS the customer premises switch is always the user side When not connected to a 4ESS that is when connected to another switch one switch is the user side and the other the network side For MOS facilities such as DMI MOS and ISDN PRI each link must be segmented into user and network sides At a Generic 2 each MOS based facility connected to the public network is administered as the user side while other connections such as that to a 4ESS are administered as the network side For private network DMI MOS and ISDN PRI connections additional care must be exercised in defining user and network sides Specifically at each facility only one end must be administered as the user side 0 while the alternate must be defined as the network side 1 If the private network node is a tandem switch then that node may function as both user side and network side depending on the particular facility NOTE Whenever a Generic 2 connects to a host computer via MOS the computer should always be assigned as the network side Field 7 This field is used for administering one of four fa
246. ield 8 Fields 9 11 Field 12 Field 13 Field 14 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 7 33 Selects in out touch tone availability Field encodes and their descriptions are 0 When only rotary pulses are received via the trunk group 1 When either rotary pulses or tough tone can be accepted NOTE The ISDN PRI applications use the D channel to transmit and receive dialed digits Dialed digits are transmitted as ASCII characters Therefore for ISDN applications this field is ignored either option may be translated Assigns the trunk group to CDR record keeping Field encodes and their descriptions are 0O Trunk group usage not applicable for CDR recording 1 Trunk group usage will be recorded by CDR 2 Trunk group usage will be recorded account code is required Not used for ISDN applications This field is only applicable when CDR is being used and then only to change the default CDR timer value Field encodes represent intervals in l second increments The range is through 99 with dash being the default timer value of 6 seconds Administers the optional transmission loss assignments The encode translated depends on the network configuration and service application However the default 0 setting should always be used unless an NEC engineer is consulted Chapter 4 The Digital Loss Plan describes the digital loss plan and table 4 2 Digital Loss Plan Port to Port Losses in this same chapter list
247. ield is not administered The default value is appropriate Answer Allowable entries in milliseconds range from 20 to 5100 in intervals of 20 This Delay field should only be translated if delay dial were optioned DSI DMI Trunks The DS1 DMI trunks are defined by using the TRUNK GROUP screen This screen is somewhat equivalent to System 85 procedure 260 field 14 encode 1 Figure 7 61 Trunk Group Screen Page 1 DMI depicts this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 122 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V2 amp RIV3 TRUNK GROUP Page 1 of 5 Group Number Group Type dmi SMDR Reports y Group Name OUTSIDE CALL COR 1 TAC Direction two way Outgoing Display n Dial Access y Busy Threshold 60 Night Service _ Queue Length 0 Incoming Destination TRUNK PARAMETERS Trunk Type In out Incoming Rotary Timeout sec 5 Outgoing Dial Type tone Incoming Dial Type tone Disconnect Timing msec 500 Digit Treatment Digits ACA Assignment n Long Holding Time hours 1 Short Holding Time secs 10 Short Holding Threshold 15 Bit Rate 1200 Synchronization async Duplex full Incoming Dial Tone y Maintenance Test y Answer Supervision Timeout Suppress Outpulsing y Figure 7 61 Trunk Group Screen Page 1 DMI This screen is similar to the one for administering tie trunks The primary difference is related to data capabilities Bit Rate Synchronizatio
248. igit Digit Digit Digit Digit Digit OMANI HOB W NH Digit DISPLAY ONLY ike ONY HOF wWH DODO 10 11 12s 13 14 15 16 17 18 Trunk Type Connected to CCO ON LINE Y MAJOR MINOR RUN TAPE _BUSY OUT enter command C JE bama J Fs Hew Fe FIELD F7 INpuT Fe cps 108 Digit 9 10 aha aa 138 14 13 16 Digit Digit Digit Digit Digit Digit Digit WORD EMANAN AD ES ER ED E 1 Figure 7 24 Procedure 108 Word 1 ISDN Terminating Test Line Assignments System 85 R2V4 Field 1 Fields 2 17 Translates the termination for each trunk group that identifies the ISDN loop around terminating test line The terminating test line is required for B channel maintenance testing As part of the installation and ISDN PRI services provisioning process the terminating test line number assignment must be coordinated with the terminating switch Assigns digits for the terminating test line ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 52 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 7 53 GENERIC 2 Depending on whether the switch provides private network ISDN service or public network ISDN services whether the switch functions as an endpoint or as a tandem node will determine whether other features should be administered before ISDN PRI
249. igits be collected before trunk seizure this can be done on non ISDN trunks 2 Seize the trunk and do not outpulse any digits this is called digit sending 3 Seize the trunk obtain a start dial signal and then begin digit outpulsing this is called cut through dialing to the terminating switch The ISDN protocol requires that all dialed digits be collected before trunk seizure so cut through dialing cannot be provided for ISDN calls Since few applications use digit sending AAR or ARS software must be used to collect and process dialed digits If the switch is properly administered and the numbering plan data blocks are correct AAR or ARS software processes dialed digits based on data within the routing pattern and routing preference combinations resulting in the selection of a particular service or feature The routing pattern and routing preference combinations determine which outgoing trunk group is selected and whether ISDN PRI trunk signaling is used ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 1 28 INTRODUCTION Each call routed to an ISDN signaling trunk group generates a series of Q 931 messages over the D channel For example the calling party IE of the ISDN PRI setup message assembles the dialed digits as ASCII numbers that correspond to the defined numbering plan format Also included within the setup message are the BC requirements B channel identification and network specific facilities NSF If the requested fa
250. ility test circuit ADFTC 8 4 switch to another system 2 5 ANI 1 31 o ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 IN 2 INDEX ANNIIC ANNII1E feature comparison APLT 7 34 areacode 7 J9 oo arithmetic logic unit ALU 4 3 ARS 2 6 ATMS System 85 7 49 ooo AT amp T ISDN basic rate interface BRI nodal services primary rate interface PRI proprietary signaling 1 14 reference frequency 2 7 5 28 attendant partitions 7 20___________ Y OE Automatic Alternate Routing AAR BC 25 called CBC fear one 7 D feature parameters ISDN dynamic trunk group C 6 network characteristics network identifier routing tables automatic identified outward dialing AIOD automatic number identification ANI Automatic Route Selection ARS second dial tone 2 6 Automatic Transmission Measurement System ATMS Automatic Voice Network AUTOVON AUTOVON 34 availability of synchronization sources 5 28 availability transmission 5 22 AVD B B8ZS and ZCS differences 17 19 line coding 1 17 2 3 backup D channel modules 5 8 bandwidth 7 9 5 4 basic rate interface 7 136 o baud 7 136 BCM32000 2 10 bearer capability class BCC System 85 and Generic 2 differences channel 7 2 Bell System reference frequency 2 7 B channel a binary service format C 16 bipolar line coding 1 16 signal 7 2 violation 7 78 1 20 with 8 zero substitution B8Z
251. in the facility equipment and performance of the transmission facility For facility problems AT amp T maintenance responsibility ends at the network interface Circuit Pack Alarms There are several types of circuit pack alarms that may arise These are briefly described next Yellow LED On power up or initialization the microprocessor executes a thorough set of tests on the circuit pack hardware During this test sequence the green LED stays on Failure of any of these initialization tests is shown by a flashing yellow LED The yellow LED flashes following initialization because of power up or software requests but does not flash if any failures are detected while the interface is online Following successful initialization the yellow LED not flash until the circuit pack is administered and until the D channel is communicating with the far end As long as the D channel is up and communication is established the LED stays on to show a busy state Red LED The red LED is controlled by the microprocessor During this test sequence the green LED stays on If any background tests fail which the processor runs during normal online operation the red LED is turned on An example would be a failure of the tests run on the circuits that generate a DSI s signal If hardware problems exist then either the circuit pack will fail power up initialization tests or the red LED is turned on within several seconds of power up initialization If the r
252. ing e Leave word calling no AP e Leave word call transfer 8 When ISDN PRI facilities connect an ETN main to an ETN tandem the main must do additional routing since cut through operation is not permitted Dialed digits must first be collected and then the setup message transmitted to the tandem Automatic Voice Networks AUTOVON tandem tie trunk networks TTTN and Common Control Switching Arrangement CCSA or Enhanced Private Switched Communications Service EPSCS networks that use E amp M trunks cannot be served by ISDN PRI trunks DS1 facilities that use robbed bit inband signaling will work Generic 2 1 without universal modules will support AUTOVON service Generic 2 1 Issue 3 0 with universal modules will also support AUTOVON service ANI also known as the calling number identifier or CNI and as the calling line ID or CLID is currently regulated on a state by state basis When maintenance people are troubleshooting intrastate ANI related problems these regulations may or may not permit ANI to be passed ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 2 NETWORK CONNECTIONS AND CONFIGURATIONS This chapter provides a description of common connection arrangements with System 85 R2V4 DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 2 These connections include private network public network and those made through digital signal level 1 DS1 auxiliary equipment Also included is a description of th
253. ing 2 3 metallic cabling 3 2 ___ S i ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 IN 10 INDEX MFAT carrier 6 13 microwave digital radio 3 2 sd Minor Major alarm to errored seconds conversions 8 10 misframe 7 10 1 13 MO 8 6 mode data 0 Generic 20 25 __ S 0 System 85 1 24 S 1 Generic 2 25 1 System 85 2 Generic 2 1 24 2 System 851 24 S 3 Generic 27 25 3 System 85 24 o 3 2 adaptive Generic 21 24 64K bps 1 8 64K bps modes 0 3 1 2 adaptive mode 3 2 BC 7 46 switching 2 3 24 _ y O unknown analog Generic D 1 25 unknown digital Generic 2 voice Generic 2 1 24 ___ voice grade Generic 2 voice grade System 85 voice System 85 X 25 Generic 21 25 LAPD 3 1 2 3 IK Hz audio C 2 analog BCCOS data rates connected to digital switch 7 8 digital data 7 34 S disrupted transmission B 9 line only mode 6 6 pooling description 1 8 System 75 RBS 1 8 voice voice System 85 voice grade data voice grade data System 85 modem Contd ZCS ZCS format modular processor data module MPDM module backup 5 8 MTBF 5 22 MTCP 58 4 MTTR 5 22 Mu 225 law 1 8 multiplexer BCM 2 10 bipolar violation monitor 7 J0 O O bit stuffing CDM access of channels applications 2 9 framing foma Z line compensation A CEM applications 2 10 framing foma 78 line compensation A digitali BI SS E error detection capabilities
254. inisters many of the same parameters as procedures 100 and 101 do for System 85 Trunk Group Screen Page 1 Tie Trunk Group depicts this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 120 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V2 amp RIV3 TRUNK GROUP Page 1 of 11 Group Number Group Type tie SMDR Reports y Group Name OUTSIDE CALL COR 1 TAC 114 Direction two way Outgoing Display n Data Restriction n MIS Measured n Dial Access y Busy Threshold 99 Night Service Queue Length 0 Internal Alert n Incoming Destination _ Comm Type voice Auth Code n TRUNK PARAMETERS Trunk Type in out Incoming Rotary Timeout sec 5_ Outgoing Dial Type tone Incoming Dial Type tone Digit Treatment Digits Connected to Toll n STT Loss normal DIT to DCO Loss normal Incoming Dial Tone y Bit Rate 1200 Synchronization async Duplex full Answer Supervision Timeout 10 Figure 7 59 Trunk Group Screen Page 1 Tie Trunk Group Most fields require no unusual entries for DS1 tie trunk applications Only those that may require special attention are mentioned Comm Type The default is voice with avd and data being the alternate selections NOTE Trunk groups that are administered avd require that the DS1 also be administered for common channel signaling 24th Furthermore if avd is translated then Bit Rate Synchronization and Duplex fields are displayed These three fields enable
255. ir descriptions are O Specifies that the prefix digit one is not inserted NOTE This entry is appropriate when there are no Interchangeable CO Codes within the NPA If the destination number is seven digits or less for example NNX XXXX or a service code N11 then the digits are sent as dialed Furthermore for these type calls if the prefix digit one is dialed it is not deleted For 10 digit NPA NNX XXXX calls if the prefix one is dialed it is deleted 1 Specifies that the prefix digit one is sent if and only if the call is a 10 digit calls For this entry there may be Interchangeable CO Codes within the NPA 2 Specifies that the prefix digit one is sent for all 7 and 10 digit toll calls The associated toll list assigns which office codes are toll calls For this entry there may not be Interchangeable CO Codes within the NPA With this entry if the customer were to dial a one before a nontoll 7 digit call the call would route as a toll call Ww Specifies that the prefix digit one is sent for all toll calls regardless of the number of digits For this entry there may be Interchangeable CO Codes within the NPA This field is only used for public network ARS applications This field relates a specific ARS toll table to Prefix Marks two and three Permitted entries are numbers 1 through 32 Determines the number of digits deleted from the beginning of the digit string that is being prepared for sending Permitted entries a
256. is procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 7 89 ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 100 WORD 2 TRUNK GROUPS MODEM POOLING AND BCCOS des Trunk Group E 2 Bearer Capability Class of Service k MODEM POOLING Originate Mode Answer Mode Modem Type First Choice 7 Test Type F enter command C E ara O UUE EL _ Fe FIELD F7 INPUT F8 comps Figure 7 41 Procedure 100 Word 2 Trunk Group Data Translations Generic 2 Field 1 Specifies a particular trunk group The field encode will be the same as previously translated in procedure 100 word 1 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 90 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 Field 2 Assigns a BCCOS to the trunk group This field is used for non ISDN to ISDN tandem connections The permitted range of encodes is 0 through 255 Field encodes and their descriptions are 0 Voice Mode 2 Data Voice Unknown Digital mB w N PR Unknown Analog Voice Grade Data Mode 0 data Mode data a on U fee Mode 3 data 9 X 25 Packet Switched on B channel NOTE All calls use the BCCOS assigned to preferences in routing patterns as administered in procedures 309 word 1 and 321 word 5 If not assigned to preferences the preference will default to the BCCOS of the associated trunk group Procedure 100 Word 3 ISDN Trunk Group Signaling Optio
257. ises and in private networks Digital cross connects are the interconnection points between the cable and the connector for terminals multiplexers and transmission facilities Specifically the DS1 cross connect called DSX 1 is used to interconnect DS1s Several important concepts related to the DSX 1 are as follows e Connection to public network DS1 facilities is made at a DSX 1 cross connect This cross connect point and usually the equipment used to terminate a DS1 facility is the point of demarcation where customer premises responsibility for equipment ends and the network provider s responsibility for equipment begins e The signal present at the DSX 1 cross connect differs from the signal on the DS1 transmission facility in one important respect The transmission facility carries DC power which is used to power line repeaters and network channel terminating equipment NCTEs The signal at the DSX 1 cannot carry DC power e There exists a maximum cable distance from the DS1 or DS1 terminal equipment to the DSX 1 cross connect point 655 feet for 24 AWG cable However a cross connect point is not always required An example of when the cross connect point is not required would be a continuous cable that directly connects two DS1s For this case it is recommended that a phantom point midway on the cable be selected as the cross connect point With this arrangement the maximum permitted distance between the two DS1s is twice the val
258. istered in the first field then all extensions of the form 12XxXxX will match this row If 12 is administered here and 123 is also administered then all numbers of the form 12XXX_ except for 123XX will match this row For example if you wanted all extensions of the form 12XXX except for 123XX to be sent with the SID prefix 30346 andthe 123XxX extensions to be sent with the SID prefix 30353 then you would administer both 12 and 123 in this field in two different rows ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 E 30 TIE TRUNK SETTINGS TABLE E 10 continued SID Prefix Table Screen Settings Generic 1 FIELD SETTING REMARKS SID Prefix Enter the digits you add to the extension code digits to form a 10 digit SID number For example in the sample screen shown above if any extension of the form 65XXX places or answers a call the number sent to a System 85 on the far end will be 619 486 5XXX In the example the other numbers that would be sent are 619 496 6XXX 619 496 7XXX 619 496 8XXX Terminating Extension Group Screen Settings The only field on this screen applicable to ISDN PRI is the ISDN Caller Display field You must enter either grp name ormbr name_ to specify whether the TEG group name or member name is sent to the originating user when a member of a TEG answers Hunt Group Screen Settings The only field on this screen applicable to ISDN PRI is the ISDN Caller Display field You
259. it Conversion Time of Day Routing Uniform Dialing Plan Doop oe OMNKKK KOS Kwok KM Oe BK NOTE You must logoff amp login to effect the permission changes Figure E 1 OPTIONAL FEATURES Screen Table E 2 System Parameters Customer Options Screen Administration Generic l describes the administration settings for the fields of this screen relevant to the configuration shown in figure 1 TABLE E 2 System Parameters Customer Options Screen Administration Generic 1 FIELD SETTING REMARKS ARS ARS is required if you are using Ten Digit to Seven Digit Conversion If you are using subnet trunking or uniform dial plan with the ISDN PRI trunk to a System 85 you need either AAR PNA or ARS ARS Partitioning Y This field is factory set to y if ARS is ordered ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 E 12 TIE TRUNK SETTINGS TABLE E 2 continued System Parameters Customer Options Screen Administration Generic 1 FIELD SETTING REMARKS ISDN PRI Private Network Access PNA Ten Digit to Seven Digit Conversion Uniform Dialing Plan A y here turns on ISDN PRI ISDN PRI software is ordered by specifying attribute use 6 when ordering the TN767 DS 1 circuit pack PNA is analogous to AAR on System 85 Either this or ARS software is required for ISDN PRI If the Ten Digit to Seven Digit Conversion feature is used you must have PNA and ARS I
260. it trunk circuit identification number available from the circuit provider This is a new capability with Generic 1 It permits an individual trunk member to override the night service option that is administered on page of the TRUNK GROUP screen Allowable entries are an extension the attendant or to leave blank This field associates a signaling group to a trunk group member If a DS1 is assigned to only one signaling group then this number appears in the Sig Grp column This value cannot be changed that is a trunk cannot be moved from one signaling group to another from this screen To change a signaling group assignment use the SIGNALING GROUP screen If a DS1 is assigned to more than one signaling group no number appears in the Sig Grp column You must manually assign one of these preassigned signaling groups from 1 8 to this field SID Prefix Table ISDN PRI Applications If the Trunk Group field Send SID is enabled page 2 of the TRUNK FEATURES screen then the screen SID PREFIX TABLE must be administered Figure 7 85 SID Prefix Table Screen depicts this procedure SID PREFIX TABLE Page 1 of 5 Ext SID Ext Ext SID SID Code Prefix Len Code Prefix Prefix Figure 7 85 SID Prefix Table Screen ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERI
261. ity When the trunk group is routed over private network ISDN PRI transmission facilities then no IXC ISDN network is used and the zero 0 option must be translated Each network provider of ISDN service will have a different XC identifier number When connecting to AT amp T ISDN network facilities the required number is 288 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 106 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 Procedure 309 Word 5 ARS ISDN BCCOS This procedure is required for translating ISDN trunk groups into the ARS plan NOTE When translating MEGACOM SDN and ACCUNET switched digital service calls you must first assign a network specific facility NSF index in field 1 of procedure 279 word 1 and then assign this same index in field 5 of this procedure to all preferences used for these types of calls Figure 7 51 Procedure 309 Word 5 ARS ISDN BCCOS depicts this procedure ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 309 WORD 5 ARS ISDN AND BEARER CAPABILITY COS ARS Plan Pattern Number Preference Number ISDN Dynamic Trunk Type ISDN Network Service Value No PWN PE Bearer Capability COS HEHE Connected to CCO ON LINE QY MAJOR MINOR RUN TAPE BUSY OUT IN USE WAIT enter command Figure 7 51 Procedure 309 Word 5 ARS ISDN BCCOS Generic 2 Fields 1 3 The ISDN PRI does not place any new or additional considerations on translating these fields The codes and digits
262. k type value enclosed in Description parenthesis such as auto in is not valid on a universal module Procedure Procedure encode for this trunk type Encode Feature Defines the feature of the trunk type Trunk types of like feature are compatible The feature abbreviations include e APLT advanced private line termination includes both CCSA and EPSCS CAS Centralized Attendant Service CO central office DID Direct Inward Dialing ETN electronic tandem network FX foreign exchange ISDN PRI Integrated Service Digital Network primary rate interface MAIN SAT main satellite NA Not applicable trunk type doesn t provide switch to switch connectivity NDMI network digital multiplexed interface RA remote access TIE tie trunk WATS Wide Area Telecommunications Service ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 D 2 TRUNK TYPE AND SIGNALING TYPE COMPATIBILITY TABLES Direction Defines if the trunk type is capable of e Incoming and outgoing calls 2 way e Incoming calls only 1 way in e Outgoing calls only 1 way out Signaling The signaling types available with this trunk type When there are several signaling Types types available with this trunk type the default signaling type is listed first Procedure The procedure encode for the listed signaling type Encode NOTE Default signaling types are listed first LEGEND CAS Centralized Attendant Service LRB loop r
263. ks NOTE When connecting to a TN722B or ANNI11 circuit pack the recommended option is 0 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 7 67 Field 20 This display only field serves to show which cables contain which synchronization cables Procedure 262 Word 1 Additional DMI MOS ISDN PRI Facility Options Procedure 262 is used to administer the ANN35 and TN767 circuit packs Figure 7 29 Procedure 262 Word 1 Additional DMI MOS ISDN PRI Facility Options Generic 2 depicts this procedure ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 262 WORD 1 ISDN BOARD PARAMETERS EQUIPMENT LOCATION 13 PRI Interface Identifier EJ Module Cabinet 1 2 3 Carrier 4 Slot 5 COE e Circuit PRI PARAMETERS 6 Interface Type var Facility Test Code H 8 Terminal Endpoint Identifier PRI AND BRI LAYER 2 PARAMETERS gz Timer T203 10 Timer T200 11 Counter N200 E J T2 Counter K B Connected to CCO ON LINE QY MAJOR MINOR RUN TAPE BUSY OUT IN USE WAIT enter command O E eaa O O OE e F6 FIELD_ F InpuT Fe cMDs Figure 7 29 Procedure 262 Word 1 Additional DMI MOS ISDN PRI Facility Options Generic 2 Fields 1 4 Assigns the circuit pack to an equipment location These include the module number cabinet number port carrier number and slot number NOTE Entries for these four fields are the default values from translating a 5 in f
264. l Backup Generic 2 Identifies a particular D channel group number The range of encodes is 1 through 255 NOTE ISDN trunks are assigned to a specific equipment location in procedure 116 Procedure 116 is also used to assign ISDN PRI circuits to the D Channel group numbers Assigns a particular circuit pack as providing the primary D channel for the identified D channel group number Table 7 9 Codeset Differences depicts the permitted equipment ranges NOTE The ISDN PRI facility slot that is translated as the primary must have also been translated for 23B 1D signaling procedure 260 field 7 must use encode 0 Assigns a particular circuit pack as providing the backup D Channel which is optional for the identified D Channel Group Number Table 7 9 Codeset Differences depicts the permitted equipment ranges A prime objective for the design of each D channel group is to have members from two or more modules By accommodating this objective it is highly recommended that the Backup D Channel equipment location be a different module from that selected as the Primary D Channel The ISDN PRI facility slot that is translated as the backup must be translated for 23B 1D signaling procedure 260 field 7 must have encode 0 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 7 71 Procedure 262 Word 3 ISDN PRI Codeset Map Assignments Depending on the termina
265. l or universal and the physical equipment location refer to table 7 6 Equipment Parameters and Permitted Translation Encodes ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 56 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 Field 4 Translates a particular type of carrier such as DS1 MFAT module control or TMS to the equipment location identified by fields 1 3 For DS1 DMI ISDN PRI applications field encodes and their descriptions are 2 Universal Module Control 0 3 Universal Module Control 1 4 TMS 0 Control TMS 0 Growth Traditional Module Control 0 Yo on wo Traditional Module Control 1 8 TMS Control 9 TMS 1 Growth 10 Universal port 11 DS1 port carrier Depending on whether the purpose for translating this procedure is to assign the SC or to assign a DS1 port carrier will determine which encode to select Fields 5 10 DS1 DMI AISDN PRI does not place any additional requirements on translating these fields Field 11 Field encodes and their descriptions are 0 Translated for external synchronization when the carrier which is identified by fields 1 10 is not equipped with an SC 1 When the carrier module control or TMS is equipped with an SC NOTE The network synchronization diagram should be available and is required to determine how to properly synchronized the switch Fields 12 15 Not applicable for DS1 DMI ISDN PRI applications Therefore a dash is appropriate Procedure 2
266. l way out GS party test 2 2 way attendant completing in DOD 19 co 2 way GS 1 LS 19 DMI ISDN MOS 20 E amp M auto in IS out 28 E amp M auto in WS out 29 2 way with party test 20 co 2 way GS party test 2 l way in attendant completing auto in 21 FX l way in GS 1 LS 19 DMI ISDN MOS 20 E amp M auto in IS out 28 E amp M auto in WS out 29 l way out DOD 22 FX l way out GS 1 LS 19 DMI ISDN MOS 20 E amp M auto in IS out 28 E amp M auto in WS out 29 l way out DOD with party test 23 FX l way out GS party test 2 2 way attendant completing in DOD 24 FX 2 way GS 1 LS 19 DMI ISDN MOS 20 E amp M auto in IS out 28 E amp M auto in WS out 29 2 way with party test 25 FX 2 way GS party test 2 l way incoming attendant completing auto in 26 WATS l way in GS 1 LS 19 DMI ISDN MOS 20 E amp M auto in IS out 28 E amp M auto in WS out 29 l way out DOD 27 WATS l way out GS 1 LS 19 DMI ISDN MOS 20 E amp M auto in IS out 28 E amp M auto in WS out 29 l way out DOD with party test 28 WATS l way out GS party test 2 auto in WATS not administered 29 WATS l way in GS 1 IS DID 30 DID l way in LRB IS 30 E amp M IS in and out 4 DMI ISDN MOS 20 WS DID 31 DID l way in LRB WS 3 E amp M WS in wink DD out 11 DMI ISDN MOS 20 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 D 4 TRUNK TYPE AND SIGNALING TYPE COMPATIBILITY TABLES TABLE D 1 Trunk Signaling Cross References continued Trunk Description
267. lation package The PC PBX Connection in mode 2 uses a mode 3 2 adaptive handshake if the bit rate is set to 64K If the rate is set to 19 2K or slower a mode 2 handshake is used 3270 emulation on the PC PBX Connection requires a 3270C data module on the far end Mode 3 operation is defined as synchronous when in 3270 emulation otherwise mode 3 operation on the PC PBX Connection is defined as asynchronous Mode 2 on the 7500 series is implemented in the incoming to the 7500 direction only Outgoing calls requiring mode 2 speeds use mode 3 2 adaptive BC On outgoing mode 3 and mode 3 2 adaptive calls the 7500 series always inverts bits On incoming mode 3 and mode 3 2 adaptive calls the 7500 series checks the restriction bit in the low layer compatibility IE and either inverts or does not invert depending on the contents of the IE This is not done for mode 0 calls The algorithm used for the mode 3 2 handshake is different for DCP and the 7500 data modules When called the 7500 data module starts a mode 3 handshake If it receives a mode 3 or mode 2 handshake from the calling end within a specified number of seconds it switches to that mode If it does not receive a mode 3 or mode 2 handshake within that time it switches to mode 2 If it does not receive a mode 2 handshake within 15 more seconds it drops the call Options exist on the PC ISDN Platform with 3270 Emulation to allow the user to choose either 56K bps or 64K bps and to choose to inv
268. led length then this row does apply If another row exists with the same service and number length then the Called Number field is used to continue the row determination If the leading digits received with the incoming call match the digits specified in the Called Number field then this row applies to the call Therefore with this table a unique treatment can be given to any incoming call even if these calls are to the same service or have the same length of digits The remaining four fields specify the unique treatment for the call once the row is determined Together the Del and Insert fields are used to manipulate the incoming number ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 E 26 TIE TRUNK SETTINGS that routes the call The Per Call SID ANT field can be used to request SID ANI only for specific calls incoming on the group The Night Serv field is used to have calls of different types routed to different night destinations when night service is in effect This table is generally used when a Generic 1 is connected to the public network with several different services such as MEGACOM 800 service and ACCUNET Switched Digital Services but also has private network applications NOTE Administering this table is optional TABLE E 8 Trunk Group Screen Settings Page 2 Incoming Call Handling Table Generic 1 FIELD SETTING REMARKS Service Featur Tandem This field must match the Service Type field on the first
269. m 85 R2V4 Figure 7 14 Procedure 103 Word 1 Network Trunk Group Translations System 85 R2V4 Figure 7 15 Procedure 116 Word 1 DS1 Trunk Assignments to Equipment Circuit Location System 85 R2V4 Figure 7 16 Procedure 012 Word 1 Name Database Establish Key System 85 R2V4 7 40 Figure 7 17 Procedure 012 Word 2 Name Database Entry System 85 R2V4 7 42 Figure 7 18 Procedure 012 Word 3 Name Database System 85 R2V4 7 43 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 CONTENTS XV Figure 7 19 Procedure 309 Word 1 ARS System 85 R2V4 7 44 Figure 7 20 Procedure 309 Word 5 ARS and Transit Network Identifiers System 85 R2V4 7 45 Figure 7 21 Procedure 321 Word 1 AAR System 85 R2V4 7 47 Figure 7 22 Procedure 321 Word 5 AAR and Transit Network Identifiers System 85 R2V4 l 7 48 Figure 7 23 Procedure 107 Word 1 ATMS Terminating Test Line Assignment System 85 R2V4 7 50 Figure 7 24 Procedure 108 Word 1 ISDN Terminating Test Line Assignments System 85 R2V4 7 51 Figure 7 25 Procedure 275 Word 4 System COS and Miscellaneous Service Assignments Generic 2 7 53 Figure 7 26 Procedure 276 Word 1 Feature Group COS Generic 2 7 54 Figure 7 27 Procedure 250 Word 1 System Configuration Carriers Generic 2 7 55 Figure 7 28 Procedure 260 Word 1 Additional DMI MOS ISDN PRI Circuit Pack Assignments Generic 2 Figure 7 29 Procedure 262 Word 1 Additional DMI MOS ISDN PRI Facility Options Ge
270. m restricted to restricted depending on other attributes of the two BCCOS encodes ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 82 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 Fields 4 13 The translation parameters administered for fields 4 through 13 determine what actions the switch will take for the BCCOS specified in field 1 Regarding Generic 2 it is important to remember that the administration of the BCCOS determines when a modem pool member is added and not the particular trunk type By administering the BCCOS on an AAR ARS preference basis allows a single trunk group to support both circuit switched and modem pooled calls Field encodes and their descriptions are O Circuit switch the call 1 Insert a mode 2 modem pool 2 Block the call Fields 14 through 16 are the default capabilities assumed by the switch for an originating facility on this switch that does not have a BCCOS IE non ISDN The switch assumes these default capabilities are acceptable to the originating facility when it tries to connect the originating facility to the terminating facility These default capabilities are not the predefined BCCOSs that default through administration Field 14 Assigns a packet switched 1 oracircuit switched 0 call transport mode Field 15 Assigns aclear 1 orarestricted 0 channel type This relates to calls outgoing from an endpoint except for DMI modes 0 or 3 Field 16 The default BC class BCC Used fo
271. mode repeater 3 3 trunk mode link synchronization 5 1 link access procedure on the D channel LAPD local access and transport area LATA 2 7 exchange codel Z7 UUE exchange company LEC 5ESS 2 7 carrier facilities DS1 connections to DS1 reference B 11 _ NXX synchronization reference B 12 synchronization source 5 28 Look Ahead Interflow enabling Generic 2 System 85 loop timing 2 5 loop start CO trunk 6 12 LOS 5 9 5 13 5 14 8 9 loss CO DID trunk ports 4 6 combination tie trunk 4 6 digital 4 DS1 DMI ASDN PRI 4 6 extended range channel units 4 6 insertion 4 7 ISL digital low 4 1 of frame alignment LFA alarm 8 6 8 8 8 9 of signal LOS alarm 8 9 OPS ports 4 7 pad group 4 2 4 3 plan digital 4 plan implementation and provisioning Generic 4 3 Generic 2 4 2 port to port 4 1 4 4 total 4 trunk type 47 4 2 trunk type 70 4 2 via net 4 1 M maintenance and administration panel MAAP 7 1 O OE object MO 8 6 options or parameters Generic 1 7 132_ __ i O System 757 16 _ ___ S O test controller panel MTCP 8 4 Maintenance Related System Parameters screen seting En OoOo E master reference 5 4 MAUU I 30 S mean time between failures MTBF 5 22 mean time to repair MTTR 5 22 MEGACOM 800 DNIS A 1 service A 1 special access administration A message type IE 29 __ _ message associated user to user information MAUUDU 30 S O message oriented signal
272. module control carrier along with the TN460 module clock For multimodule systems the SC is located in the TMS carrier Fields 1 3 V1 V4 Identifies a module number 0 30 cabinet number 0 7 and physical carrier position 0 3 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 6 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIRMENTS SYSTEM 85 Field 4 V1 V4 Translates a particular type of carrier such as DS1 MFAT module control or TMS to the equipment location identified by fields 1 3 For DS1 DMI ISDN PRI applications the pertinent encodes are 4 TMS 0 control 5 TMS 0 growth 6 Module control 0 7 Module control 1 8 TMS 1 control 9 TMS 1 growth 11 DSI MFAT port carrier Select a particular encode based on the intended purpose for translating this procedure either to assign the SC or to assign a DS1 MFAT carrier Fields 5 10 V1 V4 DSI DMI ISDN PRI does not place any additional requirements on translating these fields Field 11 V1 V4 Field encodes and their descriptions are 0 When the carrier which is identified by fields 1 10 is not equipped with an SC When an external synchronization clock is used do not administer the SC The SC software functions are replaced by the hardware firmware contained within the external clock 1 When the carrier module control or TMS is equipped with an SC The network synchronization plan should be available and is required to determine how to properly synchronize the switch
273. n ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 60 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 Field 9 Assigns the line coding format that will be used to forcibly ensure that the data meets Tl carrier ones density requirement Field encodes and their descriptions are e Zero Code Suppression ZCS e Bipolar 8 Zero Code Suppression B8ZS The ZCS line coding format restricted scans each byte for the all zeroes octet and on detecting this bit sequence substitutes a one for the zero in bit position 2 The ZCS format is the most common and is used widely The ZCS format can be used without any consideration of the communications protocol to transmit 7 bit characters data at rates up through 56K bps via modems and multiplexers that do bit stuffing If the data communications protocol is based on the high level data link HDLC protocol that is mode 2 3 and data is transmitted as inverted HDLC then the ZCS option can be used for data rates up through 64K bps The data modules both DCP and BRI use the DCP protocol and BRI protocol respectively Both DCP and BRI are based on the null based DMI specification and therefore meet these requirements Those DS1 T1 facilities that use RBS and are optioned for ZCS maintain the ones density requirement by converting all zero octets in the transmit PCM stream of each channel to a string of seven zeros and a one This does not significantly affect voice and voice
274. n and Duplex Bit rate and data rate mean the same for System 75 applications ISDN PRI Trunks The ISDN PRI trunks are defined by using the TRUNK GROUP screen An enhancement for R1V4 and R1V5 is ISDN call by call service selection that allows a group of ISDN B Channels to be designated to carry calls to a variety of switched nodal services such as SDN MEGACOM MEGACOM 800 and or carry calls destined for different Interexchange Carriers such as AT amp T and GTE Information elements passed between the switch and the public switched network in the initial call setup message dynamically determine the feature and or service to be provided by the network on a call by call basis The ability to carry calls to a variety of switched nodal services takes advantage of call by call service selection You must specify a cbc trunk type to connect with this offering You can then define usage allocations to apportion a minimum and maximum number of members to CBC trunk groups for specific services and vary them based on the time of day and day of week You can also define incoming call handling treatments ICHT based on incoming service feature and incoming called number as ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1IV2 amp R1V3 7 123 e Enhanced digit manipulation e Request of CPN BN Calling Party Number Billing Number formerly SID ANI on a call by call basis e Night desti
275. n figure 3 3 On Premises Metallic Cable Configurations For a fee AT amp T Toll Offices can add echo cancelers DSX 1 NCTE PROTECTION pst NOTE CIRCUIT 655 FT MAXIMUM REPEATED DS1 LINE PROTECTION CIRCUIT 655 FT MAXIMUM NOTE Use of the office repeater is optional depending on the distance to the first T1 repeater unless it is needed to supply loop power Figure 3 3 Off Premises Metallic Cable Configuration ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 3 10 DS1 TRANSMISSION AND CABLING NONMETALLIC CABLING OPTIONS Many alternatives to DS1 metallic transmission facilities exist Some of these include systems that transmit a DS1 signal on light guide fiber microwaves infrared and radio waves All AT amp T network distribution systems NDS products are compatible Other systems should be compatible with System 75 and System 85 DS1s as long as the following conditions are met e The transmission system connects to a DS1 via a DSX 1 cross connect e The transmission system meets any special requirements for the application for example the transmission of bipolar violations if B8ZS line coding must be used Figure 3 4 Nonmetallic Cabling Configurations shows nonmetallic cabling transmission systems MICROWAVE MICROWAVE INTERFACE ccc INTERFACE DSI DMI LIGHT GUIDE LIGHT GUIDE INTERFACE INTERFACE DSX 1 DSX 1 DS1 DS1 INFRARED
276. n tariff and application an improved grade of service and customer premis control of networking the option cbc should be considered for public network applications Other options include any of the predefined or additional Services Features listed in the Name field of the NETWORK FACILITIES screen Also the options access tie and tandem are permitted Field encodes and their descriptions are y Enable usage allocation for those services provided by the trunk group Used to maximize customer control of the allocation of CBC trunk group members to services such as preventing a service from monopolizing the member of a group NOTE This option permits up to three usage allocation plans to be defined for the identified trunk group The term usage allocation is the ability to set both a minimum and maximum number of trunk members that an ISDN Service Feature may use at a given time Each usage allocation plan can set limits for up to 10 services features n Disable usage allocation for the trunk group default This option places restrictions on either the Services Features that can be carried on the trunk group or the number of calls that any one Service Feature can have at any given time This is the ISDN PRI test line associated with the far end s test equipment and is reserved exclusively for maintenance testing The test number should be assigned for both private and public networks There is one test number per trunk group As a part
277. n the particular location and application This 3 digit field should specify the NXX which is also called the office code of the local exchange company Permitted values must be those numbers within the range of 200 through 999 and must be the office code of the local exchange This 1 digit field specifies the thousands digit When not used it should contain When used digits O through 9 may be assigned Use this field only with three digit dial plans Do not use it with four or five digit dial plans Procedure 000 Word 3 Line Side BCCOS Designator This procedure assigns a BCCOS in field 5 to the extension shown in field 1 One implication of this COS is the pattern or preference selected for this extension on outgoing calls see the Procedure 309 and Procedure 321 Word 5 sections later in this chapter ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 7 77 The 10 BCs are defined in field 16 of procedure 014 word 1 This definition codes the BC information element IE in the setup message when the extension that is the extension in field 1 of procedure 000 word 3 accesses an ISDN PRI trunk for an outgoing call Figure 7 34 Procedure 000 Word 3 Line Side BCCOS Designator depicts this procedure ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 000 WORD 3 SINGLE TERMINAL MISCELLANEOUS FEATURES Extension Hot Line Dedicated Switch Connection Messages Audible M
278. nal Synchronization Clock 5 14 NETWORK SYNCHRONIZATION AND ENGINEERING 5 18 Selecting a Timing Source for the Switch 5 18 Internal Reference Selection Rules 5 19 External Reference Selection Rules 5 27 AVAILABILITY OF SYNCHRONIZATION SOURCES 5 28 CONCLUSIONS ON SYNCHRONIZATION 5 29 USE OF GENERIC 2 AS A SYSTEM CLOCK REFERENCE 5 29 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 vi CONTENTS 6 PORT TYPES INSTALLATION COMPATIBILITIES 6 1 Line Trunk Mode Port Grouping Rules 6 10 Supported Port Types 6 10 SYSTEM 85 DS1 OR DMI MOS TRADITIONAL MODULES ANN35 6 13 Operating Mode 6 13 Port Grouping Rules 6 14 Supported Port Types 6 14 Procedure 250 Word 1 DS1 Carrier Designation 7 5 Procedure 260 Word 1 DS1 DMI ISDN PRI Physical Interface 7 6 Procedure 262 Word 1 ISDN Board Parameters 7 16 Procedure 354 Word 3 NPA NXX Digits Assignment ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 CONTENTS vii Procedure 000 Word 4 NPA NXX Index Designator 7 19 Procedure 210 Word 2 LDN NPA and NNX Attendant Partition Assignments 7 20 Procedure 010 Word 4 Line Side B Channel BC and ISDN Routing Options 7 22 Procedure 100 Word 1 Trunk Group Type Signaling and Dial Access ID Code 7 23 Procedure 101 Word 1 ISDN Trunk Group CDR Digital Loss Plan and AVD Assignments Procedure 309 Word 5 ARS and ISDN Trunk Network Characteristics Procedure 321 Word 1 AAR Assignments and IXC ISDN Network I
279. name specifies that the TEG member name will be sent to the originating extension Signaling Group ISDN PRI Applications RIV5 Only When the Dsi CIRCUIT PACK screen has the Signaling Mode field administered as isdn ext the SIGNALING GROUP screen is used for FAS and NFAS administration For FAS this screen designates the D channel used as the signal channel for all B channels on that board For NFAS this screen designates the D channel pairs used for D channel backup It also provides for the assignment of Interface IDs to DS1 interfaces within the Signaling Group A signaling group can correspond to more than one DS1 The ps1 CIRCUIT PACK screen shows how B channels and their associated signaling D channel are related Figure_7 90 Signaling Group Screen depicts this procedure NOTE The TRUNK GROUP screen must be used after administering this screen to assign individual trunks to trunk groups ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 166 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 SIGNALING GROUP Page 1 of 1 Group Number 1 Associated Signaling n Primary D Channel 1B1524 Group Number Associated Signaling Primary D Channel Secondary D Channel Trunk Brd Secondary D Channel 1B1624 Trunk Brd Interface ID Trunk Brd Interface ID 1B15 1B16 1B17 H A o a a o G a o N 1 2 3 4 Oi 6 ae 8 9 0 1 N Figure 7 90 Signaling Group
280. nation Figures 7 62 Trunk Group Screen Page I ISDN PRI Trunk Group Trunk Group Screen Page 2 ISDN PRI Trunk Group Trunk Group Screen Page 3 CBC Usage Trunk Group Screen Page 4 CBC Usage and 7 66 Routing Pattern Screen depict this procedure TRUNK GROUP Page 1 Group Number Group Type isdn pri SMDR Reports y Group Name OUTSIDE CALL COR 1 TAC Direction two way Outgoing Display n Dial Access y Busy Threshold 60 Night Service Queue Length 0 Service Type cbc Auth Code n Usage Alloc n Far End Test No TRUNK PARAMETERS Loss Plan pbx eia Digital Conn Loss normal Bit Rate 1200 Synchronization async Duplex full Figure 7 62 Trunk Group Screen Page 1 ISDN PRI Trunk Group ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 124 TRUNK FEATURES ACA Assignment MIS Measured Used for DCS Maintenance Tests Service Called Feature Len ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V2 amp RIV3 Internal Alert Data Restriction Send CPN Send Name Per Cal CPN BN 1 Night Serv Figure 7 63 Trunk Group Screen Page 2 ISDN PRI Trunk Group Trunk Allocation Plan 1 Min Chan Service Max Feature Chan Service Feature Trunk Allocation Plan 2 Min Chan CBC Trunk Group Usage Allocation Max Chan Service Feature Min Chan Trunk Allocation Plan 3 Max Chan
281. nchronization Problems B 12 DACS B 12 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 CONTENTS TYPICAL PHYSICAL INTERFACE CONNECTION PROBLEMS Specific Cabling Options System 85 DSI DMI to System 85 DS1 DMI Colocated Arrangement System 85 DS1 DMI to System 75 DS1 DMI Colocated Arrangement System 85 DMI to Host Computer System 85 DS1 DMI Direct to a NCTE System 85 DS1 DMI BOS to a CEM or CDM C ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURE SUMMARY PROCEDURE 000 WORD 3 Generic 2 Only PROCEDURE 000 WORD 4 System 85 R2V4 amp Generic 2 PROCEDURE 010 WORD 4 System 85 R2V4 amp Generic 2 ISDN Routing Parameters System 85 R2V4 amp Generic 2 BC System 85 R2V4 Only PROCEDURE 012 System 85 R2V4 amp Generic 2 PROCEDURE 100 WORD 1 System 85 R2V4 amp Generic 2 PROCEDURE 100 WORD 2 Generic 2 Only PROCEDURE 100 WORD 3 System 85 R2V4 amp Generic 2 PROCEDURE 103 PROCEDURE 107 WORD 1 System 85 R2V4 PROCEDURE 108 WORD 1 System 85 R2V4 PROCEDURE 116 WORD 1 System 85 R2V4 PROCEDURE 210 WORD 2 System 85 R2V4 PROCEDURE 260 WORD 1 System 85 R2V4 PROCEDURE 262 WORD 1 System 85 R2V4 PROCEDURE 262 WORD 3 Generic 2 Only amp Generic 2 amp Generic 2 amp Generic 2 amp Generic 2 amp Generic 2 amp Generic 2 PROCEDURE 275 WORD 4 System 85 R2V4 amp Generic 2 PROCEDURE 279 WORD 1 Generic 2 Only PROCEDURE 280 WORD 1 Generic 2 Only PROCEDURE 309 WORD 5 System 85 R2V4 Field 4 ISDN
282. ncoming and Outgoing Translations C 13 TABLE D 1 Trunk Signaling Cross References D 2 TABLE D 2 R2V4 Alternate Signaling Type Translations D 6 TABLE D 3 Signaling Type Compatibility D 7 TABLE D 4 Signaling Type Definitions D 8 TABLE E 1 System 85 R2V4 Administration Settings E 1 TABLE E 2 System Parameters Customer Options Screen Administration Generic 1 E 11 TABLE E 3 DS 1 Circuit Pack Screen Settings Generic 1 E 16 TABLE E 8 Trunk Group Screen Settings Page 2 Incoming Call Handling Table Generic 1 E 26 TABLE E 9 Routing Pattern Screen Settings Generic 1 E 28 TABLE E 10 SID Prefix Table Screen Settings Generic 1 E 29 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT PURPOSE Over the past several years basic digital signal level 1 DS1 service has evolved to include new capabilities and thereby support more sophisticated applications The three prime applications are 1 Digital multiplexed interface with bit oriented signaling DMI BOS 2 Digital multiplexed interface with message oriented signaling DMI MOS 3 Integrated Services Digital Network primary rate interface ISDN PRI Since these three applications merely build on each proceeding application and extend basic DS1 service they are covered in a single document This document is reissued as issue 4 to 1 Include coverage for the 551V ST network channel terminating equipment NCTE also called the
283. nd application described in this appendix dedicated trunk groups should be used A should be assigned in this field 5 This field applies to connections to central office or toll switches not to connections to other private communications systems A should be assigned here 6 10 Use these fields to assign BCs to be supported by preferences For example if you want a trunk group to be used for mode 0 and mode 1 calls only assign mode 0 and mode 1 to all appropriate preferences containing that trunk group If the BC of the originating terminal does not match that of the preference that preference will be skipped over The analogous Generic 1 administration is in the BCC fields in the ROUTING PATTERN screen 321 l Administer the same as procedure 309 word 1 5 Administer this procedure the same as you would proc 309 word 5 The only difference is you are using AAR patterns instead of ARS patterns 107 ATMS terminating test line digits for and station features 106 This procedure is display only It shows far end maintenance busyout near end ISDN busyout and far end ISDN busyout Generic 1 Administration Settings This section describes the ISDN PRI specific administration settings for a Generic 1 connected to a System 85 R2V4 in the configuration shown in Each required administration screen is shown with an example of the appropriate settings After each screen is a table explaining each of the settings rel
284. neric 1 and Generic 2 to a4pss2J3 O O S OE System 85 R2V4 Generic 1 or Generic 2 to a DACS 2 15 pulse code modulation PCM 8 5 1 Q Q recommendations R2V4 alternate signaling type translations D 6__ RBS 1 8 1 14 1 34 2 5 2 7 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 INDEX IN 13 RBS Contd S and CDM 2 10 and D4 channel banks 2 5 ae bee and DACS 2 8 ea Intra LATA calls 2 7 eno DN BOS ae and DSI facilities 7 60_ SSE and T1 facilities a PETE E and VBR signaling differences d mode 1 data calls AY on primary secondary facilities VB red alarm 8 5 reference facility primary 5 24 secondary 5 24 tegeng iS iE AT amp T 2 7 5 28 Bell System 2 7 primary 5 23 secondary 5 23 selection rules external 5 27 internal 5 19 remote frame alarm RFA 8 9 repeater line 3 3 S T1 3 9 tes restricted channel C 17 definition 7 18 digital data 1 9 C 3 reverse battery E amp M signaling 2 6 RFA 8 9 RNX 1 29 0 robbed bit signaling B8ZS 2 7 D4 framing 2 5 DS1 1 14 DS1 DMI BOS connection to D4 channel bank 2 5 inband 34 0 VBRI2 S O voice grade data calls 7 8 ZCS 2 5 2 7 Routing Pattern screen settings D channel 5 1 9 ee reference facility 5 24 reference frequency 5 23 synchronization reference blue alarm 8 0 Generic 1 5 11 Generic 2 5 7 Generic 2 assignment 7 63 _ System 75 5 11 System 85 5 7 System 85 assignment 7
285. neric 2 Figure 7 30 Procedure 262 Word 2 ISDN PRI D Channel Backup Generic 2 7 70 Figure 7 31 Procedure 262 Word 3 ISDN PRI Codeset Map Assignments Generic 2 7 71 Figure 7 32 Procedure 280 Word 1 ISDN PRI Receive Transmit Codeset Mapping Generic 2 Figure 7 33 Procedure 354 Word 3 NPA NXX Digits Assignment Generic 2 7 76 Figure 7 34 Procedure 000 Word 3 Line Side BCCOS Designator Figure 7 35 Procedure 000 Word 4 NPA NXX Index Designator 7 78 Figure 7 36 Procedure 210 Word 2 LDN NPA and NNX Attendant Partition Assignments 7 79 Figure 7 37 Procedure 014 Word 1 BCCOS Routing Options 7 81 Figure 7 38 Procedure 014 Word 2 BCCOS Data Options 7 83 Figure 7 39 Procedure 010 Word 4 Terminal COS Restrictions Generic 2 Figure 7 40 Procedure 100 Word 1 Trunk Group Type Signaling and Dial Access ID Code Generic 2 Figure 7 41 Procedure 100 Word 2 Trunk Group Data Translations Generic 2 Figure 7 42 Procedure 100 Word 3 ISDN Trunk Group Signaling Options Generic 2 Figure 7 43 Procedure 101 Word 1 ISDN Trunk Group CDR and Digital Loss Plan Generic 2 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 XVi CONTENTS Figure 7 44 Procedure 103 Word 1 Network Trunk Group Translations Generic 2 7 96 Figure 7 45 Procedure 116 Word 1 DS1 DMI ISDN PRI Trunk Assignments Generic 2 7 97 Figure 7 48 Procedure 012 Word 3 Name Database Generic 2 7 102 Figure 7 49 Procedure 279 Wor
286. network A SESS may or may not be synchronized to the AT amp T reference frequency A SESS has a lower stratum clock higher accuracy than a System 85 or Generic 2 Therefore this issue should be verified for each specific configuration ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 2 16 NETWORK CONNECTIONS AND CONFIGURATIONS ISDN PRI INTRA SWITCH CONNECTIONS ISDN PIR links may also be used to connect certain AT amp T features to the switch to enhance feature performance The following products used ISDN PRI trunks in this manner Generic 2 ISDN PRI with the Integrated Telemarketing Gateway Interface The Integrated Telemarketing Gateway Interface ITGI feature provides an interface between a Generic 2 1 Issue 3 0 and an Integrated Telemarketing Gateway ITG ITG is a hardware and software package that provides a gateway between the switch and call center software enabling the call center software to monitor and control certain incoming outgoing and internal calls The ITG software resides on an AT amp T 3B2 computer and the call center software resides on a separate host computer Since the call center software is not part of the ITGI feature the customer is responsible for obtaining and developing this software Compared to a telemarketing operation a call center operation has a broader scope A telemarketing operation typically handles only incoming calls A call center operation handles high volumes of incoming and o
287. ngs that can be administered for a digital tie trunk can also be administered for an analog tie trunk except for alternate voice data AVD common type trunks A tie trunk port presents an interface of a channel unit requiring tie trunk signaling to a far end D4 channel bank Since six types of tie trunk channel units use the same digital signaling format there may not be a one to one relationship between a DS1 DMI tie trunk port and the channel unit on which it terminates at a channel bank The six types of channel units are types I H and HI 2 wire E amp M and types I II and III 4 wire E amp M While these channel units have the same digital interface they differ in their analog voice interfaces 2 or 4 wire and in the type of E amp M analog signaling to which DS1 DMI signaling states are converted type I II or MI A Generic 1 analog tie trunk is a 4 wire type I E amp M trunk Thus a DSI DMI tie trunk port can be considered to be the same and a 4 wire type I channel unit or its equivalent could be used to interface to a DS1 DMI tie trunk port at the far end It appears that any of the other five types of E amp M channel units could be used as well although this capability has not been tested DMI Trunks The DMI trunks are used to provide 64K bps data connectivity to a host computer or to provide both voice and 64K bps data connectivity to private or public networks that support DMI BOS signaling These trunks must be op
288. nk layer Field 10 V4 Only This field defines a value for the N200 counter The value determines the maximum number of frame retransmissions The permitted range is from 1 through 10 with 3 being the default value Field 11 V4 Only This field defines a value for the K counter The value determines the maximum number of outstanding or unacknowledged information I frames The range of permitted values is from 1 through 10 with 7 being the default value NOTE Administration values for these procedure 262 timers and counters must be coordinated with the other terminating end Procedure 354 Word 3 NPA NXX Digits Assignment This word and procedure are used to administer the ISDN numbering plan area NPA Depending on the switch configuration there may be more than one ISDN numbering plan Contents of these fields make up a part of the station identification number SID The SID is transmitted in the calling number IE part of the setup message or connect party number part of the connect message Procedure 354 Word 3 NPA NXX Assignment System 85 R2V4 depicts procedure 354 word 3 NOTE This word need not be translated unless the application requires that SID or the connected number be transmitted to the network ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 7 19 ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 354 WORD 3 NPA NXX ASSIGNMENT NPA NXX Designator EJ
289. nk that transmits B channel signaling information with that particular DS link assign a 0 here If this facility contains all ISDN B channels 24B assign a 1 here The 24B option is also called NFAS It is required for those ISDN PRI links that have their B channel signaling information transmitted over a different ISDN PRI link For each ISDN PRI facility using NFAS that facility must be translated as part of a D channel group in procedure 116 word 1 Each D channel group number must be associated with a particular ISDN PRI facility that transmits the signaling for all links within the group The 23B 1D ISDN PRI equipment location that provides this capability is called the primary D channel Reliability may be increased by administering an alternate 23B 1D ISDN PRI equipment location as the backup D channel as administered with procedure 262 word 2 Offers the choice of 24th channel or RBS The choice of signaling method used is dependent on the application The DS1 DMI BOS applications may be translated for either option However non NFAS ISDN PRI applications always require that 24th channel signaling be selected With NFAS it is possible that no D channel exists for this DS1 link 24th channel signaling multiplexes all signaling information for channels 1 through 23 into the 24th channel This makes available the full 64K bps bandwidth of channels 1 through 23 for voice and or digital data transmissio
290. nks such as a System 85 R2V4 or Generic 2 DMI MOS link to a host computer must be administered with encode 0 the default value ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 7 69 Field 9 The field accepts encodes from 0 through 255 which correspond to 1 second intervals for a maximum elapsed time of 4 minutes and 15 seconds The default value for this T203 timer is 30 30 seconds This timer functions to monitor the facility data link and specifies the maximum time allowed without frames being exchanged on a data link layer connection Field 10 The field accepts encodes from 0 through 255 which correspond to 0 1 seconds per increment for a maximum range of 25 5 seconds The default value for this T200 timer is 10 1 second This timer functions to monitor multiple frame operation on the data link layer Field 11 This field defines a value for the N200 counter The value determines the maximum number of frame retransmissions Permitted are 1 to 10 with 3 being the default value Field 12 This field defines a value for the K counter The value determines the maximum number of outstanding or unacknowledged information I frames Permitted values are 1 to 10 with 7 being the default value NOTE Administration values for these procedure 262 timers and counters must be coordinated with the other terminating end Field 13 NFAS PRI Only Use to specify NFAS arrangements populate
291. ns The trunk type and signaling type attributes are translated as individual parameters Figure 7 42 Procedure 100 Word 3 ISDN Trunk Group Signaling Options depicts this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 7 91 ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 100 WORD 3 TRUNK GROUPS SIGNALING AND OTHER PARAMETERS Trunk Group E J Signaling Type Glare e Retry Outgoing Maintenance Busy Out Seizure Incoming Permanent Seizure Failure Threshold Optional ISDN Information Inhibited Network Service Value OND BF WHE panna DISPLAY ONLY 10 Trunk Type enter command s CLF ata O F er Fe FIELD F7 input Fe CMDs Figure 7 42 Procedure 100 Word 3 ISDN Trunk Group Signaling Options Generic 2 Field 1 Specifies a trunk group Permitted entries include any not already used number within the range of 18 to 999 Field 2 Specifies the signaling type for the trunk group For ISDN use signaling type 20 Field 3 For all ISDN trunking applications except DCS glare is resolved by the ISDN protocol Therefore this field is ignored for ISDN applications Glare is discussed in more detail in chapter 2 Network Connections and Configurations Specifically ISDN negotiates the losing call to a different channel if the original channel is preferred Exclusive calls such as DCS are not negotiated and the user hears the reorder
292. ns control the trunk groups so that dedicating a trunk group to an ISDN application is not needed However the administration ability to establish dedicated or static trunk groups still exists By implementing usage allocation plans the customer can optimize the CBC trunk group without involving any of the IXC LEC network services personnel The flexibility to control the CBC trunk is built into Generic 1 changes are transparent to the network provider ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 7 143 Network Facilities ISDN PRI Applications This screen is from the user perspective display only However the Customer Support Service Organization CSSO may administer add new services or features as required In terms of comparison this screen is somewhat equivalent to procedure 279 word 1 Figure 7 78 Network Facilities Screen depicts this procedure NETWORK FACILITIES Predefine Services Features Facility Facility Name Type Coding Name Type Coding outwats bnd 1 00001 megacom 800 1 00010 operator 0 00101 megacom 1 00011 sub operator 0 00110 Inwats 1 00100 sdn 1 00001 wats max bnd 1 00101 accunet 1 00110 ids 1 00111 i800 1 01000 multiquest 1 10000 Additional Services Features Facility Facility Name Type Coding Name Type Coding Figure 7 78 Network Facilities Screen Name Up to 15 alphanumeric characters that uniquely
293. ntains information about the following features e Integrated Telemarketing Gateway Interface ITGI Integrated Telemarketing Gateway ITG and ISDN Advantage including general descriptions on these unique applications of PRI trunks e Look Ahead_Interflow while currently documented on page 1 28 has expanded general descriptive information and additional administrative support information Trunk Type and signaling Type Compatibility Tables is a new group of trunk tables e Miscellaneous cosmetic changes Nature of the Addendum Pages The addendum pages in this package may be of up to three types e Replacement pages contain new or changed information indicated by margin rule marks in text or hand symbols lt r or in tables and figures They are to replace existing pages in your document e Supplement pages contain all new information They are to be added to your document e Errata pages contain lists or descriptions of corrections to be noted by hand in your document Instructions for Handling Addendum Pages Instructions for handling the addendum pages are as follows ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADD 2 ADDENDUM DESCRIPTION Chapter Type of Change Pages Affected Table of Contents Replacement all pages About This Replacement all pages Replacement Chapter 1 Replacement 1 21 to 1 32 hapter_2 Replacement 2 1 to 2 2 hapter Replacement 2 11 to 2 16 hapter 3 Replacement all pages
294. nterface Name The name as assigned on the network diagram ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 130 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 Line Refers to the distance between the switch and the network channel terminating Compensation equipment NCTE CDM CEM DSX 1 cross connect T1 office repeater or other equipment The compensation setting is for the total distance between the switch and the endpoint Table 7 15 Line Compensation Values summarizes compensation TABLE 7 15 Line Compensation Values Compensation Value Distance Feet 000 to 133 133 to 266 266 to 399 399 to 533 533 to 655 NOTE Compensation values assume 22 gauge ABAM or 24 gauge PDS cables Two colocated switches can be up to 1310 feet apart with compensation on both systems set to the maximum values If 26 gauge PDS cables are used distances are reduced as shown in The T1 office repeaters or T1 line repeaters can be used when the on premises distance limitation is exceeded A T1 office repeater is required at each end of the connection to provide an interconnection range of up to 3000 feet Each repeater only provides regeneration for the receive direction The T1 line repeaters can be used to accommodate distances up to 6000 feet between switches The T1 line repeaters can be used in tandem to accommodate greater distances Zero Code Specifies the line coding format ZCS or B8ZS that will be use
295. o assign individual trunks to this trunk group Enter the port location in the Port field Enter the trunk group member s name in the Name field The name can be up to ten characters A good practice to follow here is to use the circuit identification from the local exchange as the member name If you have problems in the T1 pipe having this identification will allow the T1 facility providers to troubleshoot the circuit faster The TRUNK GROUP screen fields in table E 8 Trunk Group Screen Settings Page 2 Incoming Call Handling Table Generic 1 comprise an incoming call handling table The table consists of up to 12 rows of seven columns per row The first three columns constitute a key that together select which row or unique treatment should apply for an incoming call on the group The remaining four columns specify the treatment to be provided for a call that matches the key The first column or field of the key is the Service Featur field If an incoming call is for a service listed in a row in the incoming call handling table see table E 8 then that row may specify the treatment for the call depending on the other two columns of the key The Called Len field is used to continue the row determination If the number of digits received with the incoming call match the number of digits in the Called Len field for calls to the matched service then this row may apply If no other row also contains a matching service and cal
296. ocation of the circuit pack that is the primary synchronization reference NOTE The primary will be one of those DS1 circuit packs that has previously been administered with slip detection y The Location Name and Slip actually slip detection fields list the DS1 circuit packs administered on the DS1 CIRCUIT PACK screen The primary and secondary source must be selected from this list Secondary The 3 character location of the circuit pack that is the secondary synchronization reference There is no requirement that a secondary source be provided However it is a good practice The Command Line Feature set provides four executable commands for controlling and monitoring synchronization They are e Disable e Enable e Status e Set ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 118 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V2 amp R1IV3 Network Facilities ISDN PRI Applications This screen is from the user perspective display only However the Customer Support Service Organization CSSO may administer add new services or features as required In terms of comparison this screen is somewhat equivalent to procedure 279 word 1 Figure 7 58 Network Facilities Screen depicts this procedure NETWORK FACILITIES Predefined Services Features Facility Facility Name Type Coding Name Type Coding outwats bnd 1 00001 megacom 800 1 00010 operator 0 00101 megacom 1 00011 sub operator 0
297. oes not want the outgoing trunk group name displayed but does desire the dialed number to remain on the display 1 The user desires to display the name of the outgoing trunk group for example ISDN SDN MEGACOM CBC NOTE For a tandem interworking call the name of the incoming trunk group is transmitted in the display IE of the ISDN PRI outgoing trunk group Field 5 Assigns the method used to define the name Field encodes and their descriptions are 0 Add a new name or change an existing name requires that the name change be made with word 2 1 Copy the name from the extension or trunk group displayed in field 6 Field 6 This field is used with field 5 to copy an existing name to the extension or trunk group identified in field 1 Field encodes and their descriptions are e 000 through 99999 for extension and directory numbers Whether the number is three four or five digits depends on the numbering plan e 18 through 999 for trunk group numbers Procedure 012 Word 2 Name Database This word is used to translate a name up to a maximum of 30 characters Figure 7 47 Procedure 012 Word 2 Name Database depicts this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 7 101 ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 012 WORD 2 NAME DATABASE ENTRY 1 Segment El CHARACTER ENCODES haracter haraacter haracter haracter haracter haracter haracter
298. oice switched gain remote access 64 N A N A none 0 LC15 contact interface 65 N A N A none 0 CAS incoming RLT 66 CAS l way in E amp M RLT in 14 audio 67 N A N A none 0 UCD delayed recorded announcement 68 N A N A none 0 unused 69 way in IS 70 Main Satellite 1 way in E amp M MS IS 15 way out IS 71 Main Satellite l way out E amp M MS IS 15 2 way IS both ways 72 Main Satellite 2 way E amp M MS IS 15 way in WS 73 Main Satellite 1 way in E amp M MS WS 16 way out WS 74 Main Satellite l way out E amp M MS WS 16 2 way WS both ways 75 Main Satellite 2 way E amp M MS WS 16 way in DD 76 Main Satellite 1 way in E amp M MS DD 17 way out DD LT Main Satellite l way out E amp M MS DD 17 2 way DD both ways 78 Main Satellite 2 way E amp M MS DD 17 unused 79 84 2 way CO with voice switch gain 85 co 2 way none 0 l way in WATS with voice switch gain 86 WATS l way in none 0 unused 87 89 vectoring recorded announcement 90 N A N A aux equipment 7 ACD recorded announcement 1 90 N A N A aux equipment 7 ACD recorded announcement 2 91 N A N A aux equipment 7 ACD queue of origin announcement 92 N A N A aux equipment 7 malicious call trace recorder 93 N A N A aux equipment 7 unused 94 97 power meter interface 98 N A N A none 0 alarm interface 99 N A N A none 0 tone detector for modem pool 100 N A N A none 0 modem trunk for modem pool 101 N A 2 way analog line loop 27 pooled data module trunk for modem pool 102 N A 2 way S Channel signaling 18 ADDENDUM 1 De
299. om service associated B channels are busied out Usually but not always this problem is transient and disappears before a yellow alarm is sent If this is a chronic problem in a particular configuration administration of the NFAS B channel group can be an effective solution Another category of hyperactivity involves digital communications protocol DCP equipment DCP hyperactivity is not directly relevant to DS1 digital multiplexed interface DMI or ISDN PRI and is not discussed in detail here DCP hyperactivity and DS1 hyperactivity are handled similarly Glare Glare is the simultaneous seizure of a two way trunk by two communications systems resulting in a standoff Because of ISDN s inherent negotiation capabilities glare handling on ISDN PRI trunks is different from that for other trunks When both sides of the trunk are seized at the same time and setup messages cross on the D channel two rules are used to decide which side wins succeeds in making a call on that channel and which side loses backs off or moves to a different trunk The first rule is evaluated using a parameter indicated in the Channel ID information element IE called the preferred exclusive option This option specifies that either the channel is the only one that can be used for this call or that the call can be completed over a different channel specified by the destination switch if the indicated channel is busy The full benefits of using the prefe
300. on of group 380 and group 506 when connecting to a universal module or H600 when connecting to a TN767 and applicable length Greater Than 4310 Feet When distance between DSIs is greater than 4310 feet line repeaters are required Line repeaters regenerate the signal for both the receive and transmit directions NCTEs and their associated DC power supplies if necessary are also required for this configuration NCTEs are used to provide power to the line repeaters over the line ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 3 8 DS1 TRANSMISSION AND CABLING Line repeaters may be placed up to 3000 feet from the NCTEs and line repeaters may be spaced up to 6000 feet apart NCTEs must still be within 655 feet of their respective DSls When using two line repeaters DSIs can be up to 13 310 feet apart This distance may be extended in increments of 6000 feet by using additional line repeaters Figure 3 2 C On Premises Metallic Cable Configurations shows this configuration pet 655 FT eee wz 655 FT gt gt MAXIMUM MAXIMUM DSX 1 PHANTOM POINT A DIRECT DISTANCE OF 1310 FT OR LESS NCTE DSX 1 DS1 DSX 1 OFFICE OFFICE REPEATER REPEATER DS1 655 FT J 655 FT MAXIMUM 3000 FT OR LESS MAXIMUM B DISTANCE OF 1311 FT TO 4310 FT DSX 1 et NCTE T1 LINE REPEATER 655 FT 3000 FT OR LESS MAXIMUM 6000 FT OR LESS gt DSX 1 T1 LINE DS1 NETE REPEATER 655 FT 3000 FT OR LE
301. on or Subnet Trunking There are two extensions on the SN261B on a System 85 R2V4 that can be called for testing purposes One extension is for analog testing and one is for digital testing These extensions must be administered on System 85 R2V4 The analogous System 85 R2V4 administration is in procedure 108 word 1 When connected to a System 85 R2V4 the display and TCM IEs must be sent in codeset 7 For connections to Generic 2 this will change to the default codeset 6 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 TIE TRUNK SETTINGS E 25 TABLE E 7 continued Trunk Group Screen Settings Generic 1 FIELD SETTING REMARKS Max Message Size 128 128 bytes is the largest message a System 85 R2V4 can To Send receive Connected to no This is a private network arrangement without connection to a Toll toll office Send SID y Assign a y here if you want the calling party s station number and or connected party s number sent to a System 85 R2V4 on the far end The analogous System 85 R2V4 administration is in procedure 100 word 3 field 8 Send Name Y Assign a y here if you want the calling party name and or connected party name to be sent to the far end System 85 R2V4 The analogous System 85 R2V4 administration is in procedure 100 word 3 field 8 Group Member A trunk group member is an individual trunk associated with Assignments a single port on the TN767 Refer to the Port Assignments Record t
302. oo y repeater 3 9 o O timing 5 23 tandem tie trunk network TTTN 34______ TCM C 7 display information ISDN PRI aE trunk group assignments C 7 TEG 7 164 tenant service terminal balance TE 4 5 terminal equipment connections CDM 2 9 CEM 2 10 terminating a DS1 at a channel bank 4 6 CO DID trunk ports 4 6 OPS ports 4 7 tie trunk ports 4 6 Terminating Extension Group screen settings extension group TEG test line TTL 8 4 C amp test repeater 3 3 ooo tie trunk aao OOOO S SEY D4 channel bank 2 5 digital 6 1 6 10 terminating ports 4 6 time multiplexed switch TMS apparent failure B 9 Generic 2 carrier translation equipped with SC SC location SCS location 5 8 System 85 time multiplexed switch TMS Contd System 85 Contd carrier translation 7 6 equipped with SC 7 6 id SCS location time slot interchanger TSI 5 2 timing channel bank loop 5 3 external 5 18 rules 5 27 internal 5 18 rules 5 19 master slave network considerations 5 19 System 75 or Generic 1 5 11 System 85 or Generic 2 5 7 switch source selection 5 18 unreferenced 5 18 T limbo 8 5 TMS apparent failure B 9 Generic 2 carrier translation 7 56 ss equipped with SC SC location SCS location 5 8 System 85 carrier translation 7 6 ssid equipped with SC 7 6 SCS location 7 5_ i TN767 administration 5 9 cabling 5 9 compensation values TNS toll office 2 6 D4 channel banks 6 4 __
303. or call reference and message type Figure 1 9 ISDN Message Signaling Format shows the message signaling format FIRST OCTET PROTOCOL DISCRIMINATOR CALL REFERENCE MESSAGE TYPE INFORMATION ELEMENTS OPTIONAL INFORMATION ELEMENTS LAST OCTET Figure 1 9 ISDN Message Signaling Format IEs may be one or more octets long depending on the element type There are 133 different IE identifiers called codepoints grouped into eight functional categories codesets 0 through 7 How trunk groups are constructed and how ISDN supported features are administered determines which B channels may be selected to originate and terminate a particular call Generally any B channel may be used with both originating and terminating calls so a particular channel may support a variety of applications and trunk types In Generic 2 this capability is called ISDN dynamic in Generic 1 it is called call by call CBC For both Generic 1 and Generic 2 this feature is called CBC Service Selection Administration software also allows services to be dedicated to specific channels by assigning a channel to a particular trunk type In this way the switch always provides enough trunks for a particular type of service Channels administered for specific services are not available for ISDN dynamic uses With CBC Service Selection calls requesting various types of services are routed on a call by call basis over the same ISDN channels To distinguish b
304. oup translations selected in procedure 100 word 2 24th channel signaling is the only required service facility option All others framing format and line coding format are DMI application independent However the distant computer and all intermediate T1 transmission equipment must be compatible A loop timing problem can be created if the synchronization sources are not administered correctly The loop timing problem exists as the result of an error where both switch endpoints for the same T1 span are administered as the primary This causes the clock frequency to vary widely and result in bringing down the switch Loop timing problems can be avoided by following a correctly engineered network synchronization diagram NOTE Neither DMI BOS nor DMI MOS may be used to provide synchronization to the switch 2 Selects the DSI DMI BOS facility that provides 24 lines called OPS ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 14 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 DS1I OPS Related Translations When a DS1 facility is used exclusively for lines it must be administered for RBS Also the facility cannot be used as a synchronization reference When a DS1 is administered for lines OPS it provides 24 channels that terminate in a remote D4 channel bank CDM or their equivalent Each analog line circuit pack provides eight circuits Therefore one DS1 OPS replaces three analog circuit packs
305. p E MODEM POOLING 13 Originate Mode DATA RATE 14 Answer Mode 64000 56000 19200 9600 4800 2400 1200 300 HEA Modem Type 16 Clock F 17 First Choice H 18 Test Type 19 Host Access Clock Synchronous no oOoooOooon enter command m Figure 7 11 Procedure 100 Word 2 Trunk Group Data Characteristics System 85 R2V4 Procedure 100 Word 3 ISDN Trunk Group Signaling Options With System 85 R2V4 the two attributes trunk type and signaling type are separated and translated as individual parameters Procedure 100 Word 3 Trunk Group Trunk Type Signaling Type Translations System 85 R2V4 depicts the procedure for translating the signaling type and associating that attribute to a particular trunk group or trunk type ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 28 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 ODI HROPWNE DISP 10 Outgoing Maintenance Busy Out Seizure ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 100 WORD 3 TRUNK GROUPS SIGNALING AND OTHER PARAMETERS Trunk Group Glare Signaling Type a B Retry Incoming Permanent Seizure Failure Threshold Optional ISDN Information Inhibited Network Service Value LAY ONLY Trunk Type Ezy Connnected to CCO ON LINE MAJOR MINOR RUN TAPE BUSY OUT IN USE WAIT ente r command CO OO JEO E DATA U E ee Ee FIELD JE nur Fe CMDs Figure 7 12 Procedure
306. page of the TRUNK GROUP screen For connections to a System 85 R2V4 this field should be tandem if TCMs are sent or tie if TCMs are not sent Called Len Enter the number of incoming digits expected If the service type is tandem 7 or 10 digits are expected Called Number This field allows you to specify the leading digits on incoming calls that you want to match Del Enter the number of leading digits you want deleted This field combined with the next field allows you to treat calls that match the leading digits in special ways These fields are analogous to the DID Additional Digit and AAR ARS Prefix Digit fields in procedures 101 and 103 in System 85 R2V4 Insert Enter the digits to be inserted in this field Per Call SID ANI This field only applies to ISDN PRI connections to the public network Leave it blank Night Serv Enter an extension to which you want calls routed after hours This field allows you to specify different night service destinations for different rows types of calls in the table Dial Plan Screens Settings You must set up a dial plan that allows you to originate or tandem calls to and to receive calls from a System 85 R2V4 Since many ways exist to do this this appendix does not cover the details of how to set up the dial plan For consistency and troubleshooting purposes the dial plan implementation on the Generic 1 should match that of the System 85 R2V4 For example if a System 85 R2V4 use
307. pattern is identified by a unique number known as the pattern number A maximum of 254 different patterns may be administered Each pattern may contain up to six different trunk groups six alternate trunk routes Once a routing pattern is accessed the call processing software will depending on trunk group compatibility both FRL and BCC and trunk member availability select the trunk groups in decreasing order of preference that is 1 2 6 NOTE Both ISDN PRI private networks and ISDN PRI public networks require that one or more ROUTE PATTERN screens be administered For private networks the RNX tables must be translated Each RNX table serves as a pointer to one or more pattern numbers For public networks the appropriate HNPA FNPA and or RHNPA tables must be translated These tables serve as a pointer to one or more different pattern numbers Figure 7 87 Routing Patterns Screen depicts this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 7 161 Pattern Number Grp No FRL NPA ROUTING PATTERNS Page 1 of 1 Pattern Number Pattern Assignments Enter Up To 6 Doe wWwNnP Dower wr pe Grp FRL NPA Prefix Toll No Del Inserted ITXC No Mark List Digits Digits BCC Value Service Feature QO TD 3 A Band Band Band Band Band Band Figure 7 87 Routing Patterns Screen Permitted
308. pendent on facilities used but older digital radio equipment may still be in place that only supports D4 The extended superframe ESF format consists of a better framing algorithm and therefore provides more reliable error detection than D4 ESF is preferred for T1 spans from System 75 to System 75 System 75 to Generic 1 System 75 to Generic 2 System 75 to System 85 System 85 to System 85 System 85 to Generic 1 and System 85 to Generic 2 The D4 format should be selected for Tl spans connecting D4 channel banks and CDMs since they do not typically support ESF V1 V4 Selects per channel signaling or common channel signaling This option deals with the way signaling bits are constructed for each DSO channel The default option is per channel signaling 0 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 7 9 Field 8 V1 V4 Offers the choice of 24th channel or robbed bit signaling RBS The choice of signaling method used is dependent on the application The DS1 DMI BOS applications may be translated for either option However ISDN PRI applications always require that 24th channel signaling be selected With RBS information is transmitted in the least significant bit LSB position of each channel every six frames This effectively limits the channel s use to voice and voiceband analog data applications Digital data ports connected to Digital Communications Protocol D
309. ppears with its default value of network R1V5 only If isdn ext is entered here for FAS NFAS the Connect and Interface fields see below do not appear The SIGNALING GROUP screen is used to administer D channel related data This field defaults to network if the signaling mode is isdn pri You must change this to pbx because the far end is a System 85 R2V4 After entering pbx the interface field is displayed Enter user ornetwork One system must be administered for user and the other for network This field is for glare control The analogous System 85 R2V4 administration is in procedure 262 word 1 field 5 A y should be assigned if a Generic 1 is a synchronization source The analogous System 85 R2V4 administration is in procedure 260 word 1 field 13 This screen must be administered to be consistent with the overall synchronization plan of the network in which the two systems reside Consistent with current methods and procedures an AT amp T entity has responsibility for generating the synchronization plan For further information on this subject refer to DEFINITY 75 85 Communications System Generic I and System 75 Implementation Issue 1 February 1989 555 204 654 page 5 159 Synchronization Plan ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 E 18 TIE TRUNK SETTINGS Processor Interface Data Module Screen Settings The Generic 1 interface to ISDN PRI requires a synchronous asynchronous processor in
310. procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 7 81 ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 014 WORD 1 BEARER CAPABILITY CLASS OF SERVICE CALL OPTIONS 1 Bearer Capability cos E DEFAULT CAPABILITIES 2 Transport Mode 14 Transport Mode Bi Information Type Aig Information Type 16 Bearer Capability CALL TYPES AND ACTION TAKEN 4 Voice E 5 Voice Grade Data H 6 Mode 0 7 Mode 1 8 Mode 2 H 9 Mode 3 J 10 Unknown Digital Tis Unknown Analog s L2 Mode 3 2 H T3 Xe 25s B Connected to CCO ON LINE Qf MAJOR MINOR RUN TAPE BUSY OUT IN USE WAIT enter command Figure 7 37 Procedure 014 Word 1 BCCOS Routing Options Field 1 Translates new additional BCCOS numbers Field encodes and their descriptions are e Dash is used when the BCCOS does not support new numbers e Numbers between 0 and 255 Field 2 Assigns the transport mode Field encodes and their descriptions are O Circuit switch the call 1 Packet switch the call 2 Both circuit and packet Field 3 Specifies whether the endpoint is unrestricted 1 or restricted 0 with respect to incoming calls It is the AAR ARS software that routes calls This software will block calls from an unrestricted type to a restricted type As a contrast the software will route calls from a restricted type to an unrestricted type Furthermore the software will route calls fro
311. ps established for ISDN applications may be of the same design as those for non ISDN applications except for the type of signaling used Or they may optionally be designed to take maximum_advantage of the ISDN capabilities such as with the Integrated Telemarketing Gateway or ITG Figure _7 40 Procedure 100 Word 1 Trunk Group Type Signaling and Dial Access ID Code depicts this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 86 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 100 WORD 1 TRUNK GROUP TRANSLATION 1 Trunk Group DIAL ACCESS CODE TRUNK ID CODE Digit lt Digit Digit a Ff WN oon Digit Trunk Type Ez Dial Access Restriction Personal CO Line Appearance Oo OI OD Public Network Access Egress MOC DISPLAY ONLY 10 Signaling Type Ez Connected to CCO ON LINE Qf MAJOR MINOR RUN TAPE BUSY OUT IN USE WAIT enter command Figure 7 40 Procedure 100 Word 1 Trunk Group Type Signaling and Dial Access ID Code Generic 2 Field 1 Assigns a trunk group number Permitted entries include any not already used number within the range of 18 through 999 Field 2 Assigns the first digit of the trunk access code Permitted entries are 0 through 9 for digits 0 through 9 and with 11 and 12 for the symbols and respectively Field 3 Assigns the second digit of the trunk access code Permitted entries include digi
312. r connected number to the network public or private ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 20 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 If the switch contains more than one office code multiple NPA NNX designators may be needed Figure 7 7 Procedure 000 Word 4 NPA NXX Partition Assignment System 85 R2V4 depicts procedure 000 word 4 ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 000 WORD 4 EXTENSION NPA NXX PARTITION ASSIGNMENT First Extension Last Extension Extension Partition NPA NXX Designator DISPLAY ONLY 5 Invalid Extension Connected to CCO ON LINE Q MAJOR MINOR RUN TAPE I BUSY OUT IN USE enter command TCE Eaa ESC FS HELP F FIELD F7 iNPOT F8 cMDs Figure 7 7 Procedure 000 Word 4 NPA NXX Partition Assignment System 85 R2V4 Field 1 Assigns a single extension number or the first extension number for a block of numbers The single number or block of numbers will be unique in terms that they relate to a single extension partition identification Field 2 Assigns the last extension number for a block of numbers Field 3 Assigns the extension partition identification for the tenant services feature Field 4 Associates an NPA NXX Designator with a range of extensions Procedure 210 Word 2 LDN NPA and NNX Attendant Partition Assignments This procedure is used to configure the attendant consoles into groups known as attendant partitions Also listed dir
313. r an outgoing call BC IE except for BRI modes See chapter 1 Introduction for more information about BC and BCC Field encodes and their descriptions are Voice Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 0 A gt WwW N Be O Voice grade data Unknown digital x nD Ww Unknown analog Mode 3 2 X 25 Oo Procedure 014 Word 2 BCCOS Data Options This procedure is used to define the data capabilities for the modem pools The data rates selected are dependent on local requirements and the particular type of analog modem used Figure 7 38 Procedure 014 Word 2 BCCOS Data Options depicts this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 1 Bearer Capability COS DATA RATE y 3 4 Ss 6 7 8 9 14 Default Data Rate Connected to CCO ON LINE Q MAJOR MINOR RUN TAPE BUSY OUT IN USE WAIT 64000 bps 56000 bps 19200 bps 9600 bps 4800 bps 2400 bps 1200 bps 300 bps 10 Low Speed ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 7 83 ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 014 WORD 2 BEARER CAPABILITY CLASS OF SERVICE DATA OPTIONS OOOO Synchronous Duplex Clock NOW enter command e Cie F3 pata J sd mr F6 FIELD F7 INPUT F8 CMDS Field 1 Field 2 10 Field 11 Field 12 Field 13 Field 14 Figure 7 38 Procedure 014 Word 2 BCCOS Data Options Translates BCCOS modem pool support Field encodes and their descriptions are e Dash is us
314. r connected number This feature is called ISDN PRI Call Identification in Generic 1 terminology For more details see DEFINITY 75 85 Communications System Generic I and System 75 Feature Description Issue 5 February 1989 555 200 201 Refer to the section titled Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate Interface Also refer to DEFINITY 75 85 Communications System Generic I and System 75 Implementation Issue 1 February 1989 555 204 654 See page 4 57 The TRUNK GROUP screen must also be administered to send call identification information Following is an example of typical settings for this screen when a Generic 1 is connected to a System 85 R2V4 via ISDN PRI tie trunks ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 TIE TRUNK SETTINGS E 29 SID PREFIX TABLE Ext Ext SID Ext Ext SID Ext Ext SID Len Code Prefix Len Code Prefix Len Code Prefix 5 65 61948 5 66 61949 5 67 61949 5 68 61949 Figure E 13 SID PREFIX TABLE Screen TABLE E 10 SID Prefix Table Screen Settings Generic 1 FIELD SETTING REMARKS This field and the next constitute a key that determines which row of the table to apply to a call Enter the number of extension digits in the dial plan For example if you are on a five digit dial plan enter 5 You can also use this table if you have a mixed numbering plan Ext Code This field allows groups of extensions to be administered If 12 is entered here for example and 5 was admin
315. r defined table 4 not C800 or muliquest not 01000 Preserve in user defined abe 2 multiquest 10000 Remove from user defined abe 2 multiquest not 10000 Remove from user defined tabe 5 not i800 or multiquest 10000 J Preserve in user defined table 6 not i800 or multiquest not 10000 Preserve in user defined table 2 NOTES 1 The Facility Code includes Facility Type and Facility Coding 2 No changes in the behavior on incoming and outgoing calls 3 An incoming call with this user defined code point will no longer be recognized For an outgoing call that used this code point use the 101000 i800 code point 4 An outgoing call will behave the same For an incoming call it is treated like i800 5 An incoming call with this user defined code point is no longer recognized For an outgoing call that used this code point use the 110000 multiquest code point 6 An outgoing call will behave the same For an incoming call it is treated like multiquest Trunk Group Trunk Group Members For System 75 R1V2 and R1V3 there are three applications for a DS1 tie and DMN refer to table 7 6 Equipment Parameters and Permitted Translation Encodes Tie Trunks The DS1 tie trunks are defined by using Page 1 of the TRUNK GROUP screen this is the same as for analog tie trunk groups Trunk members are added to the GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS screen pages 2 through 5 This series of screens adm
316. r example if a trunk board has a D channel then this board must be signaled by only one D channel pair that is one signaling group Here this trunk board can have only one interface ID But if a trunk board has no D channel all channels are B channels this board can be signaled by D channels in this and other signaling groups This ID associates this trunk board to the D channels that will provide signaling for it so that a board can be listed in more than one signaling group Here this trunk board can have several interface IDs ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 168 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 MAINTENANCE AND ALARMS 8 7 Summary of Generic 1 Maintenance Capabilities Since Generic 1 implements the same DS1 DMI and ISDN PRI protocols as Generic 2 both switches provide the same maintenance capabilities Since Generic 1 DSIs provide comprehensive detection capabilities the switch usually detects errors caused by network facilities even though an alarm will not trip ALARMS Unlike analog port circuit packs a DS1 has two categories of alarm signals circuit pack level and facility Service may be interrupted by either of these alarms Circuit pack level alarms show problems with the circuit pack Facility alarms show incorrect administration of the interface cabling between the two switch interfaces failures
317. r premises switch must manage access to these nodal services System 85 R2V4 Generic 1 and Generic 2 all provide CBC service selection Because of architectural differences these communications systems provide different levels of implementation From the customer premises switch perspective a CBC trunk group may be designed to support incoming nodal services outgoing nodal services or both System 85 R2V4 Generic 2 CBC Implementation The following describes details of CBC on System 85 R2V4 and Generic 2 1 With System 85 station identification number automatic number identification SID ANI can be requested on per trunk group basis but not from the network on a per call basis Therefore if the particular trunk group provides CBC service selection then all calls regardless of the particular nodal service must provide SID ANI At service provisioning time the customer will determine whether to subscribe to this network service From the AT amp T network perspective this service is available in either of two formats e SID ANI provided on every call e SID ANI provided on request call by call Regardless of which format is selected ANI or SID can be ordered exclusively or the service can be ordered as ANI preferred but will accept SID 2 Except for trunk type 120 Generic 2 does not use the NSF value for processing incoming calls Incoming calls are routed based on the number of digits delivered and the format of those digi
318. r procedure 010 word 4 COS assignments must be within the 2 digit range of 1 through 63 Field 2 This field s encodes are only useful for AUTOVON applications Dash is appropriate for ISDN applications ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 7 85 Field 3 This field shows the ISDN PRI routing option Field encodes and their descriptions are O Any type of trunking facility is OK The 0 option should be used when there are no specific requirements for ISDN PRI trunks Generally this will include all voice and voice grade data applications BC code 0 except those where user to user information transfer is desired for example SID display hb ISDN PRI trunking facilities are required Generally these applications include those COS groups established for Mode 1 data BC code 1 Mode 3 data BC code 3 and Mode 0 data BC code 4 NOTE Mode 0 data depending on its origin may require a restricted channel Recall that an unrestricted channel is only provided by those ISDN PRI facilities that use the B8ZS line coding format N Any trunking facility will work but ISDN PRI trunk facilities are preferred This may include voice and voice grade data BC code 0 and Mode 2 data BC code 2 Procedure 100 Word 1 Trunk Group Type Signaling and Dial Access ID Code Translating word 1 is the first step in establishing trunk groups Those trunk grou
319. ral density at the DSX 1 cross connect point By using the power requirements of this pulse shape and the known dB loss for the permitted cable types a maximum cable distance from a DS1 circuit pack to a DSX 1 cross connect point may be determined For either building wiring or shielded cable the two cable types approved for DS1 DMI ISDN PRI interconnections maximum distance between the DS1 DMI ISDN PRI and a DSX 1 cross connect point is 655 feet If transmission terminal equipment not providing a DSX 1 is used this maximum distance may be different When applicable refer to the installation manuals for the appropriate terminal equipment Network Channel Terminating Equipment NCTE The Network Channel Terminating Equipment NCTE also called a channel service unit CSU is considered customer premises equipment and is always required when connecting to network provided metallic transmission facilities NCTEs may also be required on some customer premises applications For example if the on site distance between the two endpoints is such that office repeaters or line repeaters are required then NCTEs or their equivalent must be used NCTEs are generally not required when nonmetallic facilities such as fiber and microwave are used Features provided by most NCTEs include e Offering bipolar signaling return to zero operation balanced to ground design zero DC component on signal outputs DSX 1 between the customer s terminal equipment
320. raming from end to end see Configurations C and F in figure 3 D TABLE 3 2 FS and ES Threshold Switch Settings DIP ESF T1 NCTE ESF T1 NCTE Switch Standalone Multiline Name 3 Switch Switch Number Number ANAAAAAAT OOOO COOO oooo OOOO 0000 0000 NOTES 1 ESF means ESF framing from end to end see Configurations A and D in 2 ESF D4 means ESF framing over the span with D4 framing to the switch see Configurations B and E in figure 3 1 3 D4 means D4 framing from end to end see Configurations C and F in figure 3 1 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 DS1 TRANSMISSION AND CABLING 3 5 TABLE 3 3 Configuration A and B Switch Settings ESF T1 NCTE ESF T1 NCTE Standalone Multiline 1 2 3 1 a 3 Namen J conci Switch Dflt ESF ESF D4 Number Number D4 DIP Switch C o C o NA NA NA C C C 0 0 0 o C C C o O 0 0 o C o 0 C O o 0 C o 0 C 0 0 0 0 0 C C C C 0 0 0 C C C 0 NA NA C 0 C C 9 SW6 1 Cs 0 0 0 SW7 1 O 0 o 0 SW6 2 O 0 0 0 SW7 2 O3 0 o 0 SW6 3 0 0 O o SW7 3 0 0 O 0 SW6 4 C C C C SW7 4 C C C C Config SW6 5 C C C C SW7 5 C C C C A SW6 6 oO NA NA NA SW7 6 o NA NA NA SW6 7 Og NA NA NA SW7 7 O9 NA NA NA SW6 8 C C C C SW7 8 0 oO 0 0 NOTES 1 ESF means ESF framing from end to end see Configurations A and D inffigure 3 1 2 ESF D4 means ESF framing o
321. rcuit pack provides the AT amp T proprietary format the circuit pack does not provide DMI BOS The TN722B circuit pack may be administered to provide either the proprietary format or DMI BOS format Assigns the DS1 s format Field encodes and their descriptions are n AT amp T proprietary This option assumes that common channel signaling is selected otherwise RBS is used y DML This option is equivalent to a 1 in field 14 of procedure 260 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 116 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V2 amp R1V3 Maintenance Options or Parameters Slip This option enables y or disables n switching between the primary secondary and Detection internal high accuracy clock The decision to switch from one source to the other is based on an internal slip count calculation NOTE Those DS1 T1 facilities that are used to provide the primary and secondary synchronization reference should be administered for slip detection y Typically those other DS1 T1 spans that are used for data applications and deemed important should also be administered for slip detection All T1 spans connecting channel banks are excluded unless the channel bank is externally timed Normally DS1 T1 spans that are used exclusively for voice and which are not assigned as the primary or secondary synchronization source should be administered for slip detection n Refer to the network synchronization diagram to
322. rdware failures Severe or long lasting hyperactivity can overload the communications system with more messages than it can processs Without intervention and corrective action this could result in degradation or even loss of service on the switch On Generic 2 special software handles hyperactivity by executing the following steps 1 Detecting the presence of possible hyperactivity 2 Identifying a suspected source of hyperactivity 3 Examing the suspected source 4 Arresting the message flow from the suspected port usually protecting the communications system from excessive stimuli 2 1 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 2 2 NETWORK CONNECTIONS AND CONFIGURATIONS 5 Counting the number of messages and comparing this to other trunks 6 Determining whether a channel is hyperactive 7 Maintenance busying out a virtual trunk group with hyperactive channels or returning cleared channels to normal service For more information about troubleshooting hyperactivity refer to DEFINITY Communications System Generic 2 Maintenance Repair Strategies 555 104 118 Normal though temporarily high levels of ISDN PRI D channel signaling can sometimes create apparent hyperactivity This happens most often with nonfacility associated signaling NFAS when many B channels are associated with a particular D channel This problem is handled similarly to that described above with the exception that hyperactive D channels are removed fr
323. re e 000 through 99999 for extension and directory numbers NOTE Whether the number is three four or five digits depends on the numbering plan e 18 through 999 for trunk group numbers Procedure 012 Word 2 Name Database This word is used to translate a name up to a maximum of 30 characters Figure 7 17 Procedure 012 Word 2 Name Database Entry System 85 R2V4 depicts this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 42 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 012 WORD 2 NAME DATABASE ENTRY 1 Segment g CHARACTER ENCODES Character haracter haracter haracter haracter Q C C Character C Character Cc haracter Ww OI HOP WHE OOOOH Character Character 10 2 Bis 4 De 6 Ta 8 Dy 0 1 1 1 enter command Figure 7 17 Procedure 012 Word 2 Name Database Entry System 85 R2V4 Field 1 Identifies one of three 10 character fields Field encodes and their descriptions are 1 Used for characters 1 through 10 2 Used for characters 11 through 20 3 Used for characters 21 through 30 There exists 94 different encodes 00 12 14 15 17 96 which correspond to numbers 0 through 9 lower case letters upper case letters and special characters The Manager II help screen or the document AT amp T System 85 Release 2 Version 4 Administration Procedures 555 103 506 may be used for determining the desired
324. re numbers within the range of 0 through 11 NOTE The insertion or deletion of the NPA is done with the Prefix Mark and the NPA is not included in the number of digits deleted or inserted Specifies the digits to be inserted at the beginning of the digit string that is being prepared for sending For ISDN PRI private networks enter a blank For ISDN PRI public networks the interexchange carrier s three digit identification should be translated If this field is left blank for public network connections then the presubscribed common carrier is assumed ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 7 163 BCC Values Each routing pattern preference 1 through 6 has an associated BCC Value field Therefore when a preference is translated the associated BCC must also be translated A trunk group preference must be valid for one or more BCC values Permitted entries are y to enable the value and n to disable the value A route can only be selected when there is compatibility a match with the BCC of the call originating extension or facility and a BCC value specified in the routing pattern Service Feature This field is not used by the AAR software but is required by the ARS software if the trunk group specified is CBC Permitted entries include any of the predefined or additional Services Features listed in the name field of the NETWORK FACILITIES scre
325. rent distance limitations from 24 gauge cable ANN11Cs do not contain components that suppress unwanted emissions Therefore when an ANNIIC is used either at one or both ends of a connection PDS cables cannot be used Shielded twisted pair cable DCC 5 24 TSA is required Between 1310 and 4310 Feet When the distance between DS1s exceeds 1310 feet repeaters are required to regenerate the signal If the total distance is less than 4310 feet NCTEs containing office repeaters may be used at each end of a DS1 facility as shown in figure 3 2 B On Premises Metallic Cable Configurations Generally the repeater module is ordered separately from the NCTE The repeater module circuit is then installed within the NCTE housing as a part of the installation process Office repeaters only regenerate signals that are received from the transmission line span NCTEs must be within 655 feet of their respective DS1 or the distance between the NCTEs should not exceed 3000 feet Using NCTEs and office repeaters permits a total maximum distance of 4310 feet NCTEs must be powered by a DS1 line or an external DC power source Each NCTE connects to its respective DS1 DMI or ISDN PRI via a 15 pin D connector on the rear of the NCTE NOTE PDS cabling should not be used for connecting to or between NCTEs For equipment cabinet to NCTE connections use DCC 5 24 TSA cables with appropriate connectors such as ED1E434 11 group 181 group 370 group 380 the combinati
326. requires 4 digits Case 1 and 2 both require 5 digits but specify an 8 as the leading digit and therefore do not match For Case 4 the Called Len and Called Number fields are blank which matches any number regardless of the number of digits or digit format Case 5 e Service Feature field is specified as other e Called Len field is specified with a requirement of N digits for example N 5 e Called Number field is specified with M leading digits where M is a number of digits less than N for example the three digits 855 Case 6 e Service Feature field is specified as other e Called Len field is specified with a requirement of N digits for example N 5 e Called Number field is specified with M leading digits where M is a number of digits less than N for example the single digit 8 Case 7 e Service Feature field is specified for example other e Called Len field is specified for example N e Called Number field is not specified that is left blank Case 8 e Service Feature field is specified for example other e Called Len field is not specified that is left blank ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 7 153 e Called Number field is not specified that is left blank NOTE Case 8 is the least restrictive nonrestrictive and will match all calls not handled by any other case Applications for Cases 5 8 Cas
327. riately Remove pages 8 7 to 8 8 from document and discard replace with those supplied Remove all pages from document and discard replace with new appendix supplied Add new appendix to document Remove all pages from document and discard replace with new Index supplied ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 CONTENTS ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT XXI PURPOSE XXI INTENDED AUDIENCES AXN xxii PREREQUISITE SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE HOW TO MAKE COMMENTS ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT XXV 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 1 1 FUNDAMENTALS OF DS1 SIGNALS Channels 1 7 Framing Formats 1 10 Signaling Types 1 14 Line Coding Formats 1 16 ISDN Call Processing 1 27 CBC Service Selection 1 30 Networking Restrictions and ISDN PRI Limitations 2 NETWORK CONNECTIONS AND CONFIGURATIONS 2 1 iii ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 iv CONTENTS DS1 DMI PRIVATE NETWORK CONNECTIONS 2 3 Generic 1 Generic 2 System 75 or System 85 to Another System 2 3 Host Computer to Another System 2 3 IBM IDNX Multiplexer to Another System 2 4 Other Vendor Digital Switch to Another System 2 4 Analog Switch to Another System 2 5 OPS to Another System Via a D4 Channel Bank 2 5 DS1 DMI PUBLIC NETWORK CONNECTIONS 2 6 4ESS to Another System Special Access Connection 2 6 SESS to Another System 2 7 DACS to Another System 2 8 Analog CO to Another System Via a D4 Channel Bank 2 8 DS1 DMI TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS 2 9 CDM 2 9
328. riber foreign exchange 4 7 subscriber loop interface module SLIM 2 7 superframe D4 1 10 framing format 1 15 supported digital facilities port types Generic 1 DS1 DMI BOS synchronization 4ESS to another system 2 7 accuracy 5 4 architecture System 75 and Generic 1 5 11 System 85 and Generic 2 5 7 computers in private networks 2 4 conclusions 5 29 O digital facilities 5 engineering 5 8 hierarchy 5 3 layers 5 5 levels bit 5 character 5 1 frame 5 1 message 5 1 time slot 5 1 link 5 1 misconceptions 5 28 need for 5 1 network 5 5 18 planfS 29 0 plan screen settings primary reference 5 4 secondary reference 5 4 software operation System 85 and Generic 2 5 9 sources 5 28 special access applications synchronous transmission 5 system clock reference using Generic 15 30 ___ O using Generic 2 synchronize System Parameters Customer Options screen seting ETT ooo S SES System 75 administration options and requirements and Generic 1 synchronization architecture 5 11 and Generic 1 synchronization software operation 5 12 System 85 administration options and requirements administration settings digit collection C 8 synchronization architecture 5 7 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 INDEX IN 15 System 85 Contd synchronization software operation 5 9 traditional module equalizer settings metallic cable 3 13 T Tl definition 3 digital carrier multiplexe 62 o
329. ric 1 then any entry will work Currently System 85 R2V4 Generic 2 all releases of 4ESS and 5ESS only support 128 The fields on page 2 of the TRUNK GROUP screen comprise an incoming call handling table The table consists of up to 12 rows of seven columns per row The first three columns constitute a key that together select which row or unique treatment should apply for an incoming call on the group The remaining four columns specify the treatment to be provided for a call that matches the key The first column or field in the key is the Service Feature field If an incoming call is for a service listed in a row in the incoming call handling table then that row may specify the treatment for the call depending on the other two columns of the key The Called Len field is used to continue the row determination If the number of digits received with the incoming call match the number of digits in the Called Len field for calls to the matched service then this row may apply If no other row also contains a matching service and called length then this row does apply If another row does exist with the same service and number length then the Called Number field will be used to continue the row determination If the leading digits received with the incoming call match the digits specified in the Called Number field then this row applies to the call Therefore with this table a unique treatment can be given to any incoming call even if these calls
330. ric 2 is connected to a 4ESS assign a network specific facility NSF in procedure 279 word 1 Each interexchange carrier which provides public network ISDN service must have a unique identifier number Furthermore each carrier may provide multiple ISDN services and ISDN features that must be individually identified via a Network Specific Facility NSF coding value A NSF is an ISDN IE sent in the setup message that is used to identify the network or feature associated with the call When connected to a 4ESS a Generic 2 must send the appropriate NSF for MEGACOM SDN and ACCUNET switched digital service calls MEGACOM 800 service calls do not require an NSF since it is an incoming only service and the Generic 2 cannot tandem it to another switch as a MEGACOM 800 call Assign AAR and ARS routing preferences in procedures 309 word 5 and 321 word 5 Assign the same NSF index from field 1 of procedure 279 word 1 in field 5 of both of these procedures For procedure 309 word 5 the value entered in field 5 along with the value entered in field 12 of procedure 309 word 1 the IXC ISDN network identifier determine the NSF IE for calls routed over this ARS plan pattern or preference An NSF IE is not sent if a value is not entered If field 5 has no value but an IXC ISDN network identifier is specified the network identification is specified with the transit network selection IE instead of the network specific facilities IE For proced
331. rmance Quality Analysis System 85 R2V4 to 4ESS Via ISDN PRI Access System 85 R2V4 to DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 1 via ISDN PRI Access HOW TO MAKE COMMENTS ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT 365 287 100 365 165 1011S 365 160 101IS 855 351 105 555 037 234 555 037 238 555 037 237 555 025 204 999 100 305 326 201 555 025 102 190 404 120 555 037 232 555 037 233 Reader comment cards are behind the table of contents of this document While we have tried to make this document fit your needs we are interested in your suggestions for improving it and urge you to complete and return a reader comment card If the reader comment cards have been removed from this document please send your comments to AT amp T Technical Publications Department Room 31c32 11900 North Pecos Street Denver Colorado 80234 xxvi ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT INTRODUCTION 1 3 ISDN is a collection of international recommendations that are evolving toward adoption as a CCITT telecommunications standard These recommendations are based on the following objectives 1 To provide the user with end to end digital connectivity which in theory will be independent of the network provider 2 To use the end to end digital connections as shared integrated facilities thus permitting the same channel to be used alternately for voice data or imagery video 3 To permit users access to these new services by a limited set of multipurpose c
332. rred option are only reached if both switches can negotiate A System 85 or Generic 2 having full negotiation capabilities always sends a preferred indication with one exception NOTE In a DCS environment negotiation is impossible so the exclusive option is used The 4ESS in ISDN Phase 2 always uses the preferred option In terms of glare if both calls are exclusive or both calls are preferred the second rule described below is used to decide which call wins If one call is exclusive and the other preferred the exclusive call wins the trunk The second rule is based on the translation field Interface Type in procedure 262 word 1 which is set to either network or user This field always has opposite settings on either side of the PRI When a System 85 R2V4 or Generic 2 is connected to the AT amp T public network or a central office CO it is translated as user Otherwise such as when several switches are networked together the choice of network or user is optional When glare occurs and both calls are preferred or both are exclusive the network side wins ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 NETWORK CONNECTIONS AND CONFIGURATIONS 2 11 The assignment of CEM channels must be coordinated with the DS1 DMI BOS channel assignments on the switch This is necessary so that only voice and voice grade data channels are compressed and so that digital data or 24th signaling channels pass through uncompressed The CEM doe
333. s AAR only with a 4 digit dial plan then so should the Generic 1 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 TIE TRUNK SETTINGS E 27 Routing Patter Screen Settings This screen is used to build the routing patterns for ISDN PRI calls made to a System 85 R2V4 The patterns are selected using the HNPA FNPA RHNPA and RNX tables The only ISDN PRI specific fields in this screen are the IXC BCC value and Service Featur fields The BCC value fields can be used to route calls based on their ISDN BCs and low layer compatibilities such as voice versus mode 1 digital data The subnet trunking feature is also present in this screen in the No Del Digits and Inserted Digits fields Following is an example of this screen when a Generic is connected to a System 85 R2V4 via ISDN PRI tie trunks Pattern Number 2 NPA Prefix Toll No Del Inserted Mark List Digits Digits 619 619 619 619 BCC VALUE Service Feature 01234 ynynn nynnonn nnynn nnnyn nnonnnn nnononnn Figure E 12 ROUTING PATTERN Screen The allowed BCC values and a description of these values are 0 Voice or voice grade data 1 Mode 1 data Mode 2 data Mode 3 data Mode 0 data Se W N Table E 9 Routing Pattern Screen Settings Generic 1 describes the ISDN PRI specific settings for this administration screen For information on how to set the other fields see DEFINITY 75 85 Communications System Generic 1 1 and System 75 Implementa
334. s in digital data signals An example for a type of problem that will cause slips is having both switches at each end of a DS1 facility administered as timing masters instead of one being a master and the other using the received DS1 s signal from the master as a timing reference Excessive Misframe and CRC Errors Misframes and cyclic redundancy check CRC errors may be produced by marginal or faulty line repeaters NCTE noise on the transmission line or by the circuitry that generates the framing pattern or CRC at the transmit end Bit errors in a DSI s signal are detected via misframes when D4 framing is used and via CRC errors when ESF is used The microprocessor keeps count of the number of misframe or CRC errors and uses the count to process the minor and major alarms The misframe or CRC count is used in choosing clock references for the switch Also an unterminated transmission line could generate noise that looks like an DSI s signal The absence of a framing pattern or continuous CRC errors is used to show that it is not a DS1 LFA Alarm The receive DS1 s signal should contain either the D4 or ESF framing pattern Which framing pattern is determined by administration details The ANN35 has two green LEDs that function to show local and remote framing status Normally both green LEDs will be on when the near end and far end are framing properly When the top green LED is off the near end interface cannot frame up on the D
335. s not place any restriction on a DSI DMI BOS between the switch and the CEM Therefore this interface may use either D4 or ESF framing 24th channel or robbed bit signaling and either ZCS or B8ZS line coding However CEMs have the following considerations e The type of signaling used on the compressed DS1 DMI BOS facility e The selection of compressed and uncompressed channels e The use of echo cancelers e The use of a processor that allows remote administration and maintenance of the CEM Only the first two options will be discussed here The other options along with additional specific information may be obtained from CEM Description Installation and Maintenance 365 287 100 and BCM32000 Solitaire Description Installation and Maintenance 365 287 115 Three types of mutually exclusive signaling are used with the compressed DS1 facility between the two CEMs These signaling types are different from the signaling types used by DSI DMI BOS The first type of signaling is variable bit robbed VBR It is similar to RBS in that it is an inband type of signaling The VBR type is sometimes also called RBS even though it is a different type from that associated with DSI DMI BOS When VBR signaling is used e VBR signaling is the default signaling type supplied with the basic CEM unit e VBR signaling is the only signaling type that allows a DS1 facility to carry the maximum of 48 compressed voice or voice grade data channels e Tandem
336. s port to port loss values Field encodes and their corresponding loss plan are listed as follows O default The Digital Fixed Loss Plan Always use this setting unless you consult an NEC engineer ISL Tie Trunk EIA Tie Trunk NO FR NOTE This option is recommended for Special Access Connections to a 4ESS ISL Digital Central Office FIA Digital Central Office A W Digital Toll Office Analog Toll Office AUTOPLEX NETWORK Interface V AUTOPLEX NETWORK Interface Y co vA wv WwW Assigns whether a trunk is toll restricted 1 or unrestricted 0 NOTE This field is ignored by the ISDN software Either encode is satisfactory ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 34 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 Field 15 Advanced Private Line Termination APLT services are not applicable in the ISDN PRI environment Therefore for trunk groups using ISDN PRI facilities this field is ignored Refer to Appendix C Administrative Procedure Summary for more information about the dynamic 120 trunk types Field encodes and their descriptions are 0 When APLT services are not available for analog or DS1 DMI BOS facilities 1 When APLT services are available for analog or DS1 DMI BOS facilities Field 16 Assigns whether disconnect supervision is 1 oris not 0 provided NOTE The ISDN PRI protocol provides disconnect supervision Therefore this field is ignored by ISDN software Field 17 V4 Only A
337. s system DCS network configurations 32 DMI administration 7 23 all Os octet 1 18 bit oriented signaling 1 14 BOS digital tie trunks 2 3 line only mode restrictions terminating 4 6 channel description 2 digital data 1 8 endpoints 2 3 fundamentals 7 7 hyperactivity 2 2 ___ ___ message oriented signaling 1 14 MOS 2 3 DS1 applications 1 2 operating modes 7 20 port losses DS1 4 6 private network connections 2 3 public network connections 2 6 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 IN 6 INDEX DMI Contd DS1 Contd RBS 8 links to DACS 2 8 signaling types 2 14 terminal equipment connections 2 9 trunk 6 S S OE vendor support 2 4 with CDMs 2 10 DMI MOS 1 14 DNIS A 1 DS1 ls density requirement 2 17 24th channel signaling 1 14 administration channel assignments Generic 2 channel assignments System 85 channel versus trunk assignments 7 38 all Os octet 7 18 AMI 1 16 assignments C 10 B8ZS line coding 17 bitre o E bit stream 2 18 bundling signaling CDM 2 9 channel bank termination 4 6 circuit pack screen settings connections 2 7 O cross connect field A 7 D4 framing 2 10 definition 2 1 delta channel DMI BOS Generic 16 4 __ __ O line only mode line trunk mode ISDN PRI port losses 4 6 private network connections 2 3 public network connections 2 6 terminal equipment_connections 2 9 DSX 1 cross connect 3 1 echo 3 9 encoding technique 8 endpoints 2 3 FA
338. signaling method called nonfacility associated signaling NFAS NFAS allows a D channel on one PRI facility sometimes called a PRI pipe to provide signaling for B channels on this same and other PRI pipes On a point to point basis all B channels controlled by a D channel called a signaling group in Generic 1 and a D channel group in Generic 2 must be administered in the same order so the sequence of channel IDs match that is the channel IDs of the terminating ISDN facility must match the channel IDs of the originating facility For example if two DS1s connect a Generic 1 to a Generic 2 and the Generic 1 lists B channels 1 23 of the first facility followed by B channels 1 11 of the second facility in a NFAS signaling group the Generic 2 must also list in the same order B channels 1 23 of the first facility followed by B channels 1 11 of the second facility in its NFAS D channel group Without administering NFAS for a trunk B channel the Interface Identifier octet of the channel ID IE may be omitted for calls made on that trunk For example if an ANN35 is not administered for NFAS it is a 23B 1D interface but no channel ID is sent on the D channel messages for those trunks If however this same interface is administered for NFAS and the D channel controls the B channels on the same board it is still a 23B 1D board but now the channel ID is sent ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 INTRODUCT
339. signaling mode used is dependent on the application Common channel signaling multiplexes all signaling information for channels 1 23 into the 24th channel This makes available the full 64K bps bandwidth of channels 1 23 for voice and or digital data transmission This capability is sometimes called Alternate Voice Data AVD The term AVD is a software attribute for a trunk AVD allows pure 64K bps digital data to be transmitted over those DS1 trunks that use 24th channel signaling Although AVD trunks are designed for digital data transmission they may also be used for voice and voice grade data transmission However a pooled modem is required to transmit voice grade data over AVD trunks Due to a change in the evolving DS1 DMI protocol specification two methods for providing 24th channel signaling exist The two methods are not compatible with each other The earlier method is known as the AT amp T proprietary format conventional T1 test equipment cannot analyze it This latter version is known as the DMI BOS format T1 test equipment can analyze this format Either the AT amp T proprietary format or the DMI BOS format depending on the circuit pack configuration may be used with another System 75 or System 85 The DMI BOS format is required to provide 24th channel signaling capability with other vendors digital switches Common channel signaling both methods are not compatible with channel banks and multiplexers The TN722 ci
340. software information about the call Outgoing calls can be initiated by an agent using a data terminal or by the call center software ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 3 DS1 TRANSMISSION AND CABLING Digital signal level 1 DS1 is the specification for a particular digital signal format DS1 interfaces should not be confused with T1 digital carriers T1 is a specific transmission system Tls are used to transmit digital signals of the DSI DMI ISDN PRI format This chapter describes the different methods of transmitting DS1 from one point to another A digital transmission network consists of the following four major parts e Terminals e Multiplexers e Cross connects e Transmission facilities Terminals are the endpoints of the network They generate and terminate digital signals The DS1 DMIASDN PRI channel division multiplexers CDMs and channel expansion multiplexer CEMs are examples of terminal transmission equipment Digital multiplexers provide interfaces between the different bit rates in the digital network The DS1 is the lowest level the DS4 is the highest level The DS4 contains 4032 64K bps channels and has a line bit rate of 274 176M bps When a System 75 or System 85 DS1 DMI ISDN PRI signal is routed over facilities provided by a vendor such as AT amp T the signal may be multiplexed on and off higher rate digital lines on the way to its final destination Multiplexers may also be used on customer prem
341. sparent 6 10 6 12 types 6 1 preequalized signal 3 13 preferred exclusive optionp 2 premises distribution system PDS 2 5 premises distribution system PDS wiring 2 5 prerequisite skills and knowledge xxii lt PRI pipe primary D channel 7 5 1 9 facility 7 74 7 61 S rate interface PRI reference facility 5 24 reference frequency 5 23 synchronization reference 8 10 Generic 1 5 11 Generic 2 5 7 System 75 5 11 System 85 5 7 private network connections private network connections Contd 4ESS to another system 2 6 administration System 85 and Generic D E 8 analog switch to another system 2 5 compatibility issues 2 4 DS1 DMI 2 3 Generic 1 Generic 2 System 75 or System 85 to Another System 2 3 host computer to another system 2 3 IBM IDNX multiplexer to another system 2 4 ISDN PRI2 J2 0 OPS to another system 2 5 other vendor digital switch to another system 2 4 System 85 or Generic 2 ISDN PRI to another vendor digital switch 2 73 s s SCSCSY System 85 R2 to a System 85 R2V4 Generic 1 or Generic 2 Processor Channel Assignment screen settings En Sd Processor Interface Data Module screen settings protocol discriminator 7 29 public network connections SESS to another system 2 7 analog CO to another system 2 8 DACS to another system 2 8 DS1 DMI 2 6 Generic 2 ISDN PRI with ITGI ISDN PRI 2 J3 o O System 85 or Generic 2 ISDN PRI to a SESS System 85 R2V4 Ge
342. ssigns whether the trunk group may be used to support modem pool calls Field encodes and their descriptions are 0 When AVD is not provided that is insert a modem This includes voice and digital data This option is required for all trunk groups that support modem pool calls including voice and digital data 1 When the AVD option is provided that is do not insert a modem Procedure 103 Word 1 Trunk Group Digit Collection and Trunk Side BC This procedure is used to translate the trunk group network parameters Figure 7 14 Procedure 103 Word 1 Network Trunk Group Translations System 85 R2V4 depicts procedure 103 word 1 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 7 35 ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 103 WORD 1 NETWORK TRUNK GROUP TRANSLATION _ Trunk Group Facility Restriction Level E _ Network Trunk Main Tandem H Incoming Tie to AAR ARS or apt E Authorization Code Required Bridge On Allowed E Trunk Reservation Limit E _ AAR ARS Prefix 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Data Protection Permanent g Remote Access Echo Suppressor AAR Conditional Routing H Second TCM B Digit Collection E Bearer Capability E Connected to CCO ON LINE Q MAJOR MINOR RUN TAPE BUSY OUT IN USE enter command e JC Fz ata lsd HELP Fe FIELD F7 INPUT re cups Figure 7 14 Procedure 103 Word 1 Network Trunk Group
343. ssue 4 E 2 TIE TRUNK SETTINGS PROCEDURE TABLE E 1 continued System 85 R2V4 Administration Settings WORD FIELD REMARKS 260 1 4 10 Enter the address of the ANN35 that you want to administer The analogous Generic administration is in the Location field of the Ds 1 CIRCUIT PACK screen This field is to assign either D4 or ESF Fe framing format ESF framing should be assigned here If ESF is assigned and if the ESF T1 CSU is optioned to pass ESF through transparently then the misframes registered in procedure 620 are a count of the CRC 6 errors At present no standard exists to show acceptable ranges of CRC 6 errors ESF framing is especially important in data applications because it can reframe automatically on a loss of frame alignment A D 4 framed DS 1 can be reframed only by returning all channels to the idle state The analogous Generic 1 administration is in the Framing Mode field of the Ds 1 CIRCUIT PACK screen Assign PCS in this field This stands for per channel signaling The analogous setting in Generic 1 is automatic when ISDN PRI is used Assign 24th channel signaling here Robbed bit signaling RBS is not allowed This administration is analogous to the Signaling Mode field of the Ds 1 CIRCUIT PACK screen in Generic 1 Assign either ZCS or B8ZS here The ISDN PRI specification recommends B8ZS Currently not all facility equipment is necessarily B8ZS compatible Z
344. ssumed that all cabling remains inside and is not exposed to foreign potentials such as lightning and needs no appropriate protection Since all equipment is on customer premises the customer is responsible for maintaining the equipment On Premises Metallic Cable Configurations shows the various possible on premises metallic cabling configurations ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 DS1 TRANSMISSION AND CABLING 3 7 Direct Under 1310 Feet If two DSIs are separated by no more than 1310 feet or no more than 655 feet to the same DSX 1 cross connect point then they may be connected directly without the need of additional equipment The cross connect point is generally not required and the connection may consist of a single continuous 1310 foot cable Figure 3 2 A On Premises Metallic Cable Configurations shows this configuration Because ANN11Ds ANNIIEs TN722Bs and TN767s contain components that suppress unwanted emissions from a DS1 standard premises distribution system PDS cables may be used to interconnect these interfaces The PDS wiring may only be used when connecting directly between System 75 and System 85 DSls Other equipment is not guaranteed to meet FCC emission requirements when used with unshielded cable Allowable PDS cables include the following cable types or their electrical equivalents e All 24 gauge PDS cable e 26 gauge PDS cable of types ARTM BKTA or AFTW NOTE A 26 gauge cable has diffe
345. st Type 100 67380 Test Type 102 67382 Test Type 105 67385 ISDN TEST CALL Extension 67920 LOSS PLAN Leave Blank if no Extra Loss is Required Minimum Number of Parties in a Conference Before Adding Extra Loss Figure E 3 MAINTENANCE RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS Screeen The only ISDN PRI specific field in this screen is the ISDN Test Call Extension field You should enter the extension that this System 85 R2V4 should call when it does an ISDN test This screen is described in detail in DEFINITY 75 85 Communications System Generic I Installation and Test Issue 1 February 1989 555 204 104 chapter 6 Activate System Dial Plan Record Screen Settings This screen does not directly relate to the use of ISDN PRI trunks It must be completed however to implement the dial plan between the two communications systems If UDP is used the DIAL PLAN RECORD screen has two parts The first part is page 1 The second part consists of pages 2 6 The second part is the UDP screen administration For details on how to administer these screens see DEFINITY 75 85 Communications System Generic I and System 75 Implementation Issue 1 February 1989 555 204 654 pages 5 68 5 74 Dial Plan Also refer to DEFINITY 75 85 Communications System Generic I and System 75 Feature Description Issue 5 February 1989 555 200 201 pages 3 257 3 259 Dial Plan and 3 457 3 461 Single Digit Dialing and Mixed Station Numbering ADDENDUM 1 December
346. stem R2V4 it must map the TCM IE from codeset 6 to codeset 7 When connected to a 4ESS this mapping is necessary only if an R2V4 is present in an all ISDN SDN network Also note that the whereas Generic 2 implements it in codeset 6 by default If Generic 2 must pass TCMs to or from a opcode value of the TCM IE and display does not need to be mapped to a different value Codeset mapping is implemented here as follows 1 A E In field 1 assign an index in the range 0 to 15 In field 2 select Incoming In field 3 select a codeset to be mapped in the incoming direction In field 4 select an opcode IE belonging to the selected codeset In field 5 select the codeset on the Generic 2 to which the incoming codeset from field 3 is to be mapped In field 6 select the opcode on the Generic 2 to which the incoming opcode from field 4 is to be mapped Steps 2 through 6 can be repeated up to 256 times for the incoming case When Outgoing is selected in field 2 repeat steps 3 through 7 For every incoming mapping there should be an identical outgoing mapping All of the above steps can be repeated up to 16 times the number of map numbers available For each ANN35 or TN767 containing a primary D channel to which you want codeset mapping assign the map numbers in procedure 262 word 3 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 7 73 NOTE Diff
347. support excessive slip rate based on switching between the primary secondary or internal high accuracy clocks The decision to switch from one source to the other is normally based on an internal slip count calculation software record However hardware events such as primary link failures may take precedence over any software controls Slips are caused by differences in clock frequencies A slip results in the deletion or repetition of a single frame Slips are not caused by noise on the line Those DS1 T1 spans that are used to provide the primary and secondary synchronization reference should be administered for slip enable 1 Since the switch software does this automatically this task is not mandatory but is a good procedure to follow Typically those other DS1 T1 spans that are used for data applications and that are deemed important should also be administered for slip enable This excludes all T1 spans connecting channel banks unless the channel bank is externally timed Normally those DS1 T1 spans that are used exclusively for voice and that are not assigned as the primary or secondary synchronization source should be administered for slip disable 0 The goal is to keep that reference on line which minimizes slips for all those DS1s for which slips can t be tolerated The digital switch always maintains a slip count record for each DS1 Slip counts are calculated on a 24 hour continuous interval As a historical r
348. te like a System 85 R2V4 that is Generic 2 will insert modem pool members and block calls Table 1 3 Bearer Capability Class of Service lists the default values for common switch parameters TABLE 1 3 BCCOS Switch Parameter Default Value Analog Lines All trunks except Host Access AAR ARS Preferences Host Access trunks DCP data modules both lines and trunks BRI extensions gt oe NOTE Extensions with multiple appearances must have the same BC administered for each appearance BCCOS is implemented by doing the following five steps 1 Define a BCCOS in procedure 014 word 1 Fields 2 16 of this procedure determine how the extension preference or trunk group assigned a BCCOS will treat calls made to that extension preference or trunk group This treatment is based on the BC and information type fields of the BCCOS of the calling extension or trunk 2 Assign a BCCOS to extensions in procedure 000 word 3 Field 1 assigns a BCCOS to an extension number This assignment affects the pattern or preference selected for this extension on outgoing calls see step 4 below ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 1 26 INTRODUCTION The 10 BCs are defined in field 16 of procedure 014 word 1 This definition codes the BC IE in the setup message when the extension entered in field 1 of procedure 000 word 3 accesses an ISDN PRI trunk for an outgoing call DCP only When a Gene
349. ted Therefore this option is not applicable Field 17 This field is added to bring System 85 R2V4 into compliance with EIA specification PIN 1429 This EIA specification relates to bit oriented signaling BOS message oriented signaling MOS is defined by a CCITT specification Field encodes and their descriptions are Dash not applicable NOTE The dash is appropriate for all applications of the ANN35 and TN767 circuit packs both DMI MOS and ISDN PRID 0 Appropriate for all applications of DS1 DMI BOS except when connecting to a switch that uses the Canadian style of signaling 1 Used when connecting to a DS1 DMI BOS that uses the Canadian style signaling as specified in PN 1429 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 66 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 Field 18 Field 19 Loop length refers to the total cable distance between the switch and the NCTE CDM BCM32000 DSX 1 cross connect and T1 office repeater Traditional modules may contain the ANN11 and or ANN35 circuit packs Both circuit packs contain DIP switches for setting the compensation value refer to Therefore software administration is not applicable and the should be administered for traditional modules Universal modules may contain the TN767 circuit pack Line compensation value be administered in software Table 7 7 TN767 Compensation Values identifies the appropriate administration en
350. ter command Lz Figure 7 36 Procedure 210 Word 2 LDN NPA and NNX Attendant Partition Assignments Field 1 Translates a console number Permitted encodes are any 2 digit number within the range of 1 through 40 NOTE This console must be previously assigned in procedure 210 word 1 Field 2 Assigns the attendant partition number Permitted encodes are any unused number within the range of 0 40 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 80 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 Field 3 Assigns the one console in the attendant partition that will be the controlling console All other members of this group must have control denied Field encodes and their descriptions are 0 For all but the controlling console 1 Only for the controlling console Field 4 Assigns or associate the LDN with a particular console or console partition The number is dependent on the switch or private network numbering plan Field 5 Assigns or associate the NPA NNX designator with the console or console partition The encode must be the same as that defined in procedure 354 word 3 Procedure 014 Word 1 BCCOS Routing Options This procedure is required to administer the attributes of each BCCOS assignment Generic 2 permits up to a maximum of 256 different numeric assignments The switch software is supplied with numbers 0 through 8 already defined Each number 0 through 8 has different default parameters Therefore e
351. terface circuit pack TN765 Each TN765 has four ports links for supporting BX 25 and or ISDN applications Up to two TN765 8 links are possible in a multiple carrier cabinet or one 4 links in a single carrier cabinet The TN765 has data modules PDMs integrated into its ports These processor interface data modules must have extensions assigned to them just as if they were external MPDMs This screen is used to administer these extensions See DEFINITY 75 85 Communications System Generic 1 and System 75 Implementation Issue 1 February 1989 555 204 654 page 5 148 Processor Interface Data Module for further information Following is an example of this screen when a Generic 1 is connected to a System 85 R2V4 via ISDN PRI tie trunks DATA MODULE Page I of 1 Data Extension 67967 Type procr intf Physical Channel 2 Name cos 1 COR 1 Maintenance Extension ABBREVIATED DIALING Listl HOT LINE DESTINATION Abbreviated Dialing Dial Code From above list ASSIGNED MEMBERS Stations with a data extension button for this data module Ext Name Ext Name Figure E 6 DATA MODULE Screen Table E 4 Processor Interface Data Module Screen Settings Generic 1 describes the administration settings for this screen ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 TIE TRUNK SETTINGS E 19 TABLE E 4 Processor Interface Data Module Screen Settings Generic 1 FIELD Data Extension Type Physical Channel N
352. terminating connections may be selected as either a primary or secondary synchronization reference ISDN PRI configurations may be established with an ANN35 or with a TN767 with or without a TN555 depending upon the D channel configuration of the TN767 A brief description of these three boards and their general use for ISDN PRI is given next The ANNI11 is the DS1 board used with all System 85s and with traditional modules in Generic 2 The ANNS35 is the ISDN PRI board used with System 85 R2V4 and Generic 2 traditional modules The TN767 is the DSI ISDN PRI board used with System 75 Generic 1 and Generic 2 universal modules The TN555 is the packet adjunct used with Generic 2 universal modules If the TN767 has a D channel on it it needs a TN555 located in the adjacent virtual slot Line Only Mode DS1 DMI BOS ANNI11 or TN767 When using a line only mode interface for synchronization purposes the following facts should be known ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 5 30 SYNCHRONIZATION OF DIGITAL FACILITIES e Since the D4 channel bank or equivalent at the far end will be timed to the signal received from a DS1 no slips should occur on a line only mode DS1 facility Because of this slip counts from line only mode DS1s should not be used to determine the health of a clock reference that is they would tend to make the reference appear to be in better condition than it may be e Line only mode DS1s should not be use
353. the ISDN interface ID within the channel ID IE This information must match exactly on each end of the facility and the encode must come from the premise switch as described in Technical Publication 41459 Field encodes and their descriptions are e Dash the only value for non NFAS arrangements e Any number within the range of 0 through 31 for NFAS arrangements Procedure 262 Word 2 ISDN PRI D Channel Backup This procedure is currently only applicable for certain ISDN PRI connections Specifically those B channel groups that use NFAS Each of these groups is identified by a unique number known as the D Channel group number For NFAS fields 2 through 5 define the D channel for a signaling group Figure 7 30 Procedure 262 Word 2 ISDN PRI D Channel Backup Generic 2 depicts this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 70 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 Field 1 Fields 2 5 Fields 6 9 T ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 262 WORD 2 ISDN NFAS D CHANNEL BACKUP D Channel Group Number E PRIMARY D CHANNEL EQUIPMENT LOCATION Module 3 Cabinet ie 4 5 2 Carrier Slot BACKUP D CHANNEL EQUIPMENT LOCATION 6 Ta Bis 9 Module Cabinet Carrier Slot DISPLAY ONLY 10 Number of Trunks Assigned to This D Channel Group enter command e ies bata ES wet Ee Freep Figure 7 30 Procedure 262 Word 2 ISDN PRI D Channe
354. the maximum values If 26 gauge PDS cables are used distances are reduced as shown in table 3 7 System 85 Traditional Module Equalizer Settings Metallic Cable The T1 office repeaters or T1 line repeaters can be used when the on premises distance limitation is exceeded A T1 office repeater is required at each end of the connection to provide an interconnection range of up to 3000 feet Each repeater only provides regeneration for the receive direction The T1 line repeaters can be used to accommodate distances up to 6000 feet between switches The T1 line repeaters can be used in tandem to accommodate greater distances Assigns the line coding format ZCS or B8ZS that will be used to forcibly ensure that the data meets Tl carrier ones density requirements The same considerations regarding the choice of data rates communications protocol and facility requirements that were discussed under System 85 procedure 260 field 9 apply here The choices are D4 or ESF previously called F The network diagram should show the choice for the particular DS1 T1 span The other end and all intermediate equipment should be optioned accordingly ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V2 amp RIV3 7 115 Signaling Mode DMI BOS The default option is common channel This option is the same as 24th channel or AVD for System 85 The alternate choice is robbed bit The choice of
355. the module control carrier along with the TN460 module clock For multimodule systems the SC is located in the TMS carrier The SC should have previously been assigned in procedure 250 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 7 63 Field 13 Assigns whether a DS1 facility translated in field 12 will be used as the primary or secondary synchronization source to the switch Field encodes and their descriptions are 0 Assigns that the facility is not used as a synchronization source 1 Assigns that the facility is the primary synchronization source 2 Assigns that the facility is the secondary synchronization source NOTE The primary must be administered before the secondary The secondary must be removed before the primary Traditional modules may be configured with the ANN11 and or ANN35 circuit packs Only the slot translated 1 primary and or the slot translated 2 secondary must be configured with synchronization cables These cables connect the backplane of the translated DS1 to the backplane of the TN463 The cables are identified as group 334 for intercabinet and group 361 for intracabinet applications When traditional modules are translated field 20 will display the number code 99 which shows that the switch could not read information from the DS1 circuit pack Universal modules may be configured with the TN767 circuit pack The intercabinet cable group 503
356. ting switch it may be necessary to administer a Codeset Map Assignment and convert from one codeset or codepoint to a different codeset or codepoint This administration assignment is required for ISDN PRI links originating on a Generic 2 and terminating on a System 85 R2V4 Figure 7 31 Procedure 262 Word 3 ISDN PRI Codeset Map Assignments Generic 2 depicts this procedure ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 262 WORD 3 ISDN LINK PARAMETERS EQUIPMENT LOCATION Module Cabinet 2 3 Carrier 4 Slot 5 Circuit HAA 7 Hyperactivity Management 6 Codeset Map Number H Connected to CCO ON LINE Q MAJOR MINOR RUN TAPE BUSY OUT IN USE WAIT enter command Figure 7 31 Procedure 262 Word 3 ISDN PRI Codeset Map Assignments Generic 2 Fields 1 4 Assigns a particular equipment location circuit pack to be given a codeset map number Table 7 9 Codeset Differences depicts the permitted equipment ranges Field 5 Assigns whether the circuit pack is BRI or PRI dash is appropriate for ISDN PRI Field 6 Assigns a codeset map number The permitted range is 0 through 15 Number selection is arbitrary however a suggestion is start with 0 and select higher numbers as needed When Codeset map numbers are translated they are assigned on a D Channel Group number basis All ISDN PRI circuits within a D Channel Group must be administered with the same Codeset Map Number ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 5
357. tion Issue 1 February 1989 555 204 654 page 4 20 Routing Patterns ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 E 28 TIE TRUNK SETTINGS BCC Value Service Featur TABLE E 9 Routing Pattern Screen Settings Generic 1 SETTING SID Prefix Table Screen Settings REMARKS Leave this field blank for this application 101288 is the interexchange long distance carrier code for AT amp T Since this is a private network this field does not apply This is where Generalized Route Selection GRS is implemented If you want only certain types of calls to be routed to specific trunk groups enter a y for those types of calls in the desired preference Enter n for those types of calls you do not want routed over that trunk group For example if you want only mode 0 calls 64K bps raw data routed only on the trunk group in the second preference you would enter a y in the second preference under BCC value 4 and n for every other field in the BCC 4 column If another type of call tries to go out over that trunk group it will skip to the next preference For further details of how to route calls using GRS see the Bearer Capability section in chapter 1 Introduction Leave this field blank It applies to network services such as MEGACOM8 service or WATS Since this is a private network this field does not apply This screen allows you to decide which extensions will be used to send calling party and o
358. tion of DMI that requires trunk types other than 108 or 109 ANNIIC may be used in any R2 switch supporting DS1 trunks However there is one caveat that applies to switches supporting DMI host trunk types 108 and 109 System 85 R2V3 and later If the ANNIIC is administered for 24th channel signaling it will use the proprietary type This means that it will work as long as it is connected to a System 75 or System 85 but will not work if connected to another vendor s DMI BOS endpoint using trunk type 108 or 109 Setting the Application Type field of procedure 260 to DMI BOS prevents the associated ANNI1 board from being used as a clock reference by a system clock synchronizer This is only useful when the ANNI1 connects to a host Here the host loop times to the switch and cannot be used as a clock reference An ANNIID is equivalent to an ANNIIE The E suffix came from adding a fiber interface to the ANNIID However the fiber connectivity was not pursued ANN11Ds were produced in limited numbers for System 85 R2V4 The DMI BOS signaling supported by ANNIIE from System 85 R2V3 and later should not be confused with DMI MOS supported by ANN35 Primary Rate Interface from System 85 R2V4 and later The TN380B module processor and ANN11B DS1 are manufacture discontinued MD and are not available for R2V3 or later versions For duplicated modules both modules must always be equipped with the same type of module processor both
359. tioned for the DMI BOS 24th channel signaling format The DMI specification requires one of the four following trunk types wink in wink out wink in auto out auto in wink out and auto in auto out though Generic 1 does not restrict other trunk types from being administered These trunk types are administered the same way as other trunk types GENERIC 1 ISDN PRI All operating modes and supported trunk types of Generic 1 DS1 DMI BOS are supported for Generic 1 ISDN PRI In addition ISDN PRI is available with a TN767 Refer to Administration Options and Requirements for specific administration information ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 6 6 PORT TYPES INSTALLATION COMPATIBILITIES SYSTEM 85 DS1 TRADITIONAL MODULES ANN11 The operating mode and supported port types for System 85 DS1 ANN11 in traditional modules are described next Operating Modes The two operating modes and grouping rules are described next Line Only Mode The line only mode of a DS1 allows up to 24 analog stations and optional modems to be remoted through a DS1 facility A D4 channel bank or its equivalent is required at the off premises end NOTE Each DSI MFAT carrier may contain a maximum of four DS1 circuit packs that function in line only mode These circuit packs may only be located in physical carrier slots 0 5 13 and 18 For a DSI to function in line only mode rather than line trunk mode those slots containing the
360. tions If a transmission test line is used its type should be specified Fields 3 18 Assigns digits for the terminating test line and TVS NOTE Procedure 107 words 2 7 need only be translated whenever ATMS is used Procedure 108 Word 1 ISDN Trunk Group TTL Number Digits This procedure is used to assign the terminating test line number used in test 3 of maintenance procedure 648 that identifies the particular B channel used for ISDN PRI testing purposes This test line number must be assigned for both private and public network configurations Whether more than one terminating test line number is needed depends on the number of ISDN PRI links and whether they terminate on more than one switch Figure 7 55 Procedure 108 Word 1 ISDN Trunk Group TTL Number Digits depicts this procedure ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 108 WORD 1 ISDN TERMINATING TEST LINE ASSIGNMENT 1 Trunk Group TERMINATING TEST LINE TELEPHONE DIGITS Digit OE Digit Digit Digit Digit Digit Digit Ka Bii 4 Sa 6 Fa 8 Ors OI DO PB WN eH OOOO Digit OOM DISPLAY ONLY 18 Trunk Type Connected to CCO ON LINE MAJOR MINOR RUN TAPE BUSY OUT IN USE enter command Ea dS ewe fre Fret F7 input Fe cups Figure 7 55 Procedure 108 Word 1 ISDN Trunk Group TTL Assignment Generic 2 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 112 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2
361. tone In either case the network has priority over the user when both calls are preferred or exclusive This capability is administered in field 5 of procedure 262 word 1 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 92 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 Field 4 Retry permits multiple attempts to seize a busy trunk from the specified trunk group This field is primarily applicable for those trunk groups routed over analog facilities and uses trunk types 41 42 43 46 or 47 Depending on the particular configuration retry may or may not be applicable for ISDN applications Field encodes and their descriptions are O Multiple retry is not desired that is retry not active NOTE The ISDN PRI protocol contains an automatic retry capability Whenever trunk type 120 is selected the zero 0 encode is required 1 Recommended for ISDN applications where the 40 series of trunk types is used This encode enables a double try single retry and thus provides slightly improved call completion particularly for large trunk groups that span across more than one transmission facility Field 5 Not applicable for ISDN applications encode must be 0 for not active Field 6 Not applicable for ISDN applications encode must be O for not active Field 7 Not applicable for ISDN applications encode must be 0 for no failure threshold NOTE This field is only applicable for analog trunk facilities It permits the user
362. tpulsed Field encodes and their descriptions are Q Digit outpulsing may overlap digit reception 1 All digits must be received before outpulsing may start All ISDN applications regardless of the trunk type require that a 1 be translated in this field Digit outpulsing does not begin until all digits are received Then digits are outpulsed as ASCII characters per the ISDN recommendations Procedure 116 Word 1 DS1 DMI ISDN PRI Trunk Assignments For more information see chapter _6 Port Types Installation Compatibilities Each analog trunk circuit pack provides four circuits that are administered by using procedure 150 Conversely each DS1 provides 24 circuits channels that are administered by using procedure 116 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 7 97 For traditional modules each DS1 MFAT carrier will support a maximum of two DS1s each occupying one slot and located in slots 5 and 18 When a DSI DMI ISDN interface trunk applications is located in slot 5 it uses the six slots 0 1 2 5 6 and 7 When the interface is located in slot 18 it uses the six slots 13 14 15 18 19 and 20 Figure 7 45 Procedure 116 Word 1 DSI DMI ISDN PRI Trunk Assignments depicts this procedure ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 116 WORD 1 DS1 AND ISDN TRUNK ASSIGNMENTS EQUIPMENT LOCATION Module Cabinet Slot 1 2 3 Carrier 4 5 Circuit
363. translated are generally dependent on each ARS plan and other switch and network considerations Field 4 Translates the ISDN trunk type The network SERVICE application and any associated application requirements will determine the appropriate trunk type Furthermore trunk type selection should be coordinated with previous assignments from procedure 100 word 1 Table 7 12 Network Services Network Features lists the current AT amp T network services network features and for most applications the recommended trunk type ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 7 107 Field 5 Specifies the network service that is requested Refer to table 7 12 Network Services Network Features for the appropriate encode NOTE When translating MEGACOM SDN and ACCUNET switched digital service calls you must first assign a network specific facility NSF index in field 1 of procedure 279 word 1 and then assign this same index in this field to all patterns used for these types of calls Field 6 Assigns a BCCOS to the preference Permitted numbers include any previously defined BCCOS from procedure 014 word 1 Procedure 321 Word 1 AAR Tables Generic 2 This procedure is used for translating controlling the Automatic Alternate Routing feature Figure 7 52 Procedure 321 Word 1 Automatic Alternate Routing Route Tables Generic 2 depicts this procedure ENHANCED MODE PROCE
364. ts These conditions the number and format of the digits may impose restraints on the use and administration of CBC Service Selection 3 System 85 R2V4 introduced a new trunk type known as ISDN dynamic ISDN dynamic trunk types can only be used with ISDN PRI facilities Most other trunk types may be used with ISDN PRI as well as other facilities ISDN dynamic trunk types are useful where more than one trunk type is needed only one trunk group is available and provisional routing digits are inadequate for the current application 4 Each AT amp T ISDN PRI nodal service MEGACOM 800 SDN ACCUNET switched digital service may be provisioned to deliver from 0 to 7 digits ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 1 32 INTRODUCTION Generic 1 CBC Implementation The following describes details of CBC on Generic 1 l 2 The SID ANI number can be received either per trunk group or per call When receiving calls over a CBC trunk group define the usage allocation plans These plans prevent a particular nodal service from monopolizing a trunk group or being deprived of the minimum number of trunks On Generic 1 the service type field on the trunk group form permits entries such as CBC access tie and tandem When CBC is administered the call processing software analyzes the NSF for incoming calls for called party number or length The other entries do not analyze the NSF but permit CBC Service Selection
365. ts 0 through 9 Field 4 Assigns the third digit of the trunk access code Permitted entries include digits 0 through 9 Field 5 Assigns the fourth digit of the trunk access code Permitted entries include digits 0 through 9 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 7 87 Field 6 Defines the trunk type of a specific trunk group The ISDN PRI facilities may be used to support several different trunk types These may include both conventional trunk types as well as the ISDN dynamic trunk type An important point to remember is that the particular service application and the incoming digits are the primary determining factors that control which trunk type is selected Most service applications may be supported over ISDN facilities by either a conventional trunk type or ISDN dynamic Table 7 10 Trunks Supporting Signaling Type 20 shows some permitted field entries that support signaling type 20 NOTE Trunk types not included in the categories listed in table 7 10 may not be translated for ISDN PRI service Most conventional trunk types specify as a part of their name an in out signaling sequence Actually these signaling sequences are disabled and type 20 signaling is used exclusively over ISDN facilities TABLE 7 10 Trunks Supporting Signaling Type 20 Trunk Trunk Description Type 2 way CCSA APLT 12 15 CO 16 17 Note 18 20 Data 100 107 DID 30
366. ue specified to a DSX 1 cross connect 3 1 ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 3 2 DS1 TRANSMISSION AND CABLING Digital transmission facilities are used to transmit digital signals from one location to another Many different digital transmission systems exist of which T1 is one The type of facility used depends primarily on the distance between the endpoints but other requirements may also affect facility selection For example an application may require nonmetallic facilities as opposed to metallic ones for reasons specific to that application Examples of some of the DS1 transmission facilities available are T1 Outstate T1 OS FT3 Lightwave and Microwave Digital Radio DR 18 or DR 23 Details of these transmission systems are not provided here Several different interconnection options and considerations exist for a System 75 System 85 DEFINITY Generic 1 and Generic 2 for DS1 DMI SDN PRI such as cable types distance limitations and switch settings that are unique to the particular unit of equipment These options and considerations are described in the following sections METALLIC CABLING OPTIONS Metallic cable is usually used to connect a DS1 to a DSX 1 cross connect Specific cable configurations depend on the application and if intervening transmission terminal equipment is in use DSX 1 Distance Limitations The DSX 1 specification defines a particular pulse shape that guarantees an allowable power spect
367. umber is not used An Example Application that uses SID Assume that the switch has a 5 digit dial plan For illustration purposes assume that a company has its billing department extensions 31000 through 31999 and sales department extensions 41000 through 41999 located on the same switch Furthermore assume that the billing department does not want their individual extension numbers displayed on the far end but rather wants the company s LDN for example 201 235 3000 displayed On the other hand the sales department does want their individual calling party s number displayed rather than the company s LDN SID Prefix Table Screen Sample Application depicts the appropriate translations to achieve these objectives NOTE If the SID Prefix field is blank then neither the calling party name or calling party extension number is displayed ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 160 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 75 R1V5 amp GENERIC 1 SID PREFIX TABLE Page 1 of 5 SID SID Prefix Prefix Prefix 2012353000 20123 Figure 7 86 SID Prefix Table Screen Sample Application Routing Patterns ISDN PRI Applications NOTE The ROUTING PATTERN screen only relates to outgoing calls page 2 of the TRUNK GROUP screen only relates to incoming calls A routing pattern is a set of trunk groups that carry calls to a particular switch Each routing
368. up and connect messages Figure 7 16 Procedure 012 Word 1 Name Database Establish Key System 85 R2V4 depicts the first of three related procedures ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 7 40 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM 85 ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 012 WORD 1 NAME DATABASE NAME TO BE DISPLAYED Extension VDN or Trunk Group Type Display Start Outgoing Trunk Display Copy Mode Extension VDN or Trunk Group to Copy or Share 2 43 no BRUNE DISPLAY ONLY Ta Characters In Name B 8 Shared Primary Extensions or Trunk Groups E3 Fa Associated Extension Name Assigned E Connected to CC0 ON LINE MAJOR MINOR RUN TAPE Busy out IN USE WAIT enter command C JE bata Sd HELP Fe FIELD F7_inpot Fa cups Figure 7 16 Procedure 012 Word 1 Name Database Establish Key System 85 R2V4 Field 1 Assigns either an extension number vector directory number or trunk group Field encodes and their descriptions are e 000 through 99999 for extension and directory numbers NOTE Whether the number is three four or five digits depends on the numbering plan e 18 through 999 for trunk group numbers Field 2 Assigns whether the encode for field 1 is a trunk group or extension vector directory number Field encodes and their descriptions are 0 For trunk groups 1 For extension numbers and vector directory numbers Field 3 This
369. ure 321 word 5 the fields in this procedure define for AAR patterns and preferences what procedure 309 word 5 define for ARS plans patterns and preferences Administer trunk groups in procedure 100 words 1 3 For procedure 100 word 1 Field 6 defines the trunk type of a specific trunk group For ISDN trunk groups as well as other types of trunk groups the entered type defines feature operation for the trunk group For example if a trunk group is assigned the type of 19 incoming calls over this trunk group are routed to the attendant console On Direct Inward Dial DID trunk type groups the switch expects station number digits on all incoming trunks on tie trunk type groups the switch can handle either station number digits or network numbers For an ISDN trunk group a dynamic trunk type 120 can be assigned to the group This trunk type allows the group to process calls with a different trunk type on a call by call CBC basis For example one incoming call over the group may expect station number digits such as a MEGACOM call while the next call over the group may expect a network number such as a Software Defined Network call also called a SDN call The ISDN Dynamic trunk type allows administration of both an AAR ARS prefix digit procedure 103 and a DID additional digit procedure 101 This cannot be done for any other type of trunk group ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 INTRODUCTION 1 27
370. use the switch s DS1 to provide a high speed multiplexed data interface for connecting to compatible computers The computers may be located on the same customer premises as the switch or many miles away The DS1 T1 carrier facilities are used between the switch and remote computers The DMI BOS application provides 23 data channels plus signaling channel Each data channel can be considered a 64K bps clear channel However permissible data rates depend on the trunk group translations selected in procedure 100 word 2 24th channel signaling is the only required service facility option All others framing format and line coding format are DMI application independent However the distant computer and all intermediate T1 transmission equipment must be compatible refer to the caution regarding B8ZS line format and data communication protocols The ACCUNET switched digital service can be provided by setting up a trunk group with encode 109 However a DS1 must be optioned for RBS procedure 260 field 8 The only other administration requirement is that the trunk groups translation field 3 of procedure 100 word 2 be enabled for 56K bps encode one The trunk group used to provide ACCUNET switched digital service may contain as few as 1 or as many as 24 members Therefore the same DS may also be used to provide CO FX WATS DID and Remote Access trunks N Assigns that the DS1 provides 24 lines These are generally called of
371. uses mode 2 handshake unless using MPDM M1 NOTE The appropriate data module must be installed and optioned for 56K bps operation This arrangement can be used to support the special format required to support ACCUNET switched digital service or 56K bps basic service if using MPDM M1 Mode 2 data for data modules and EJA data terminations that do not operate as packet mode data and are optioned for the following data rates low 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K bps When appropriate end points that route to DSI DMI ISDN PRI preferences should be administered for mode 2 data Data modules invert the data and uses mode 2 handshaking N W Mode 3 data end points should be administered for preferences that are used for packet mode data DCP inverts the data and uses mode 3 2 handshaking This is used for patterns associated with ISDN BRI or PC PBX Dd Mode 0 data end points should be administered for digital endpoints that are used to transmit 64K bps data Depending on the administered value an originated call will either require an ISDN channel have an administered preference that an ISDN channel be used or have no requirement for what type of facility is used to complete the call For terminated calls and tandem connections the BC class BCC for both links must be compatible For example voice and voice grade data are equivalent to the no requirement case since the call characteristics for all other types of faciliti
372. ustomer interfaces each interface being CCITT approved The goal is to provide the full set of ISDN services and features on digital customer premises switches digital COs and to provide these services end to end through the public digital network The CCITT ISDN recommendations define two functionally different types of communication interfaces known as the ISDN primary rate interface ISDN PRI and the ISDN basic rate interface ISDN BRI ISDN PRI 23B 1d recommendations like DS1 are associated with trunk access while ISDN BRI 2B 1D recommendations are associated with line or user terminal access Initially the CCITT recommendations were identified by their standardization committee as the I series documents 1 412 1 431 1 441 and 1 451 Later another CCITT development committee used the I series documents to develop another series of documents called the Q series Q 921 or Q 931 Recommendations are designed to be compatible with the Open Systems Interconnection OSI 7 layer model Both ISDN PRI and ISDN BRI include recommendations for layers 1 2 and 3 Recommendations for the PRI are similar in function but not identical to those for the BRI The BRI and the PRI are compared as follows Layer 1 PRI defines functions provided by the physical layer It requires use of a DS1 and is based on recommendations I 211 1 412 and 1 431 These layer 1 functions include the physical connector the creation of the bit
373. ute Tables This procedure is used for translating controlling the Automatic Route Selection feature Figure 7 50 Procedure 309 Word 1 ARS Route Tables depicts this procedure ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 ADMINISTRATION OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS GENERIC 2 7 105 ENHANCED MODE PROCEDURE 309 WORD 1 ARS ROUTE TABLES ARS Plan Pattern Number Preference Number Trunk Group Facility Restriction Level Warning Tone Distant Area Code NPA Send 1 For Toll Toll Table Index Number of Digits Deleted ODI HOB wWNH HE RoR e o Digit Collect DC Signal Ignore IXC ISDN Network Identifier m N E E3 E E 2 El B Eel al E E Connectedd to CCO ON LINE MAJOR MINOR RUN TAPE BUSY OUT IN USE WAIT enter command CL JFE JO JF F6 FIELD F7 INPUT Figure 7 50 Procedure 309 Word 1 ARS Route Tables Generic 2 Fields 1 11 The ISDN PRI does not place any new or additional considerations on translating these fields The codes digits translated are generally dependent on each ARS plan and other switch and network considerations Field 11 is not applicable to ISDN Field 12 Specifies the number designation of the interexchange carrier IXC ISDN Network Identifier for this trunk group Permitted field entries may be any number within the range of 0 through 999 NOTE The IXC ISDN network identifier enables the switch to provide equal access capabil
374. utgoing calls as well as call transfers and conferences Figure 2 1 shows an example of an ITGI configuration The ITG is a 2 way gateway where information travels through the ITG from the switch to the call center software and from the call center software to the switch Each answering position typically an ACD agent has a voice terminal and a data terminal or a work station with voice and data capabilities Call Management Services ITGI provides the following call management services e Incoming call management e Outgoing call management e Transfer and conference management These call management services enhance agent call handling capabilities and increase agent productivity in a call center environment For incoming calls the switch sends call information through the ITG to the call center software From this information this software determines how to handle the call and what database information to retrieve for this particular caller Call handling information is sent through the ITG to the switch which uses this information to route the incoming call to an available agent Database information such as a customer account record or a catalog order form is automatically routed to this same agent so that it is instantly displayed as the agent takes the call Outgoing calls are handled in a similar way By way of the ITG the call center software sends the switch instructions for placing a call and the switch sends the call center
375. ver all System 75 System 85 Generic 1 and Generic 2 special access applications should use the ARS feature to screen outgoing calls By using the ARS feature only inter LATA calls are routed to a 4ESS NFAS Nonfacility associated signaling is supported by a 4ESS From a Generic 1 R1V5 and Generic 2 perspective there are no restrictions with this capability Backup D Channel The D channel backup is supported by the 4ESS From a Generic 1 R1V5 and Generic 2 perspective there are no restrictions with this capability Codeset Both 4E11 and 4E12 receive and transmit UUI data in codeset 7 4E13 receives and transmits UUI data in codeset 6 However it will still tandem codeset 7 information User to User Information transfer To pass user to user information UUI through the ISDN public network all 4ESS to 4ESS links must be implemented with CCS7 If as many as one link is implemented with CCS6 then UUI will not be passed ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 NETWORK CONNECTIONS AND CONFIGURATIONS 2 15 Network Specific Facility A network specific facility NSF is an ISDN IE sent in the setup message that identifies the network or feature associated with the call For outgoing calls from the customer premises side the 4E11 and 4E12 will accept a NSF but do not require that one be present for static calls When connected to a 4ESS a System 85 R2V4 Generic 1 Generic 2 must send the appropriate NSF for MEGA
376. ver the span with D4 framing to the switch see Configurations B and E in 3 D4 means D4 framing from end to end see Configurations C and F in figure 3 1 4 the span uses ZCS AMI line coding then SW5 2 C and SW6 3 O f the span uses B8ZS line coding then SW5 2 O and SW6 3 C n f the switch uses ZCS AMI line coding then SW5 3 C and SW6 2 O f the switch uses B8ZS line coding then SW5 3 O and SW6 2 C a moe the span uses ZCS AMI line coding then SW1 7 C and SW7 3 O the span uses B8ZS line coding then SW1 7 O and SW7 3 C x the far end of the span is a 4ESS then SW6 1 C and SW6 8 O far end of the span is a switch then SW6 1 O and SW6 8 C oo the far end of of the span is a 4ESS then SW7 1 C and SW7 8 C f far end of the span is a switch then SW7 1 O and SW7 8 O TABLE 3 4 Equalizer Switch Settings ESF T1 NCTE ESF T1 NCTE DIP Standalone Multiline Switch Switch Number Name SW7 1 C C oO 0 SW6 1 0 NA NA NA SW7 2 O 0 C 0 SW6 2 Oo 0 Oo 0 SW7 3 oO 0 oO oO SW6 3 o o Oo 0 Equa SW7 4 0 0 C 0 SW6 4 0 C 0 0 lizer Sw7 5 oO 0 oO C SW6 5 0 C 0 oO SW7 6 O O C oO SW6 6 C C C C SW7 7 oO O oO C SW6 7 Cc C C C SW7 8 oO 0 O NA SW6 8 C 0 C C NOTE The distance should be measured when the NCTE is not adjacent to the switch ADDENDUM 1 December 1990 to 555 025 101 Issue 4 3 6 DS1 TRANSMISSION AND C
377. y in a general sense to the RGI Specific information on the RGI is provided in documents on that subject xxiv ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT HOW TO USE THIS DOCUMENT How you will use this document will depend on several factors such as the amount of training you have received or your personal preferences for working with something new You may want to read this document from cover to cover use it merely as a reference when questions arise or find that something in between these two extremes will best suit your needs At the very least you should make sure that you are familiar with how the document is organized and what it contains This can be accomplished by reading this preface About this Document and then carefully scanning the document taking special note of all headings The Table _of_Contents and the Index are provided for those times when you have problems finding information about a specific topic TRADEMARKS AND SERVICE MARKS e SESS ACCUNET Callmaster DATAPHONE DEFINITY DIMENSION and MEGACOM are registered trademarks of AT amp T e ESS is a trademark of AT amp T e IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation e MS DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation e UNIX is a registered trademark of UNIX System Laboratories Inc RELATED SOURCES The following documents may be referenced to obtain additional information on specific subjects DP2 Channel
378. ynchronization source the clock stratum and compatibility of every T1 span The best guarantee is written confirmation that the local exchange carrier AT amp T Communications or other vendor will either synchronize to a System 75 System 85 Generic 1 Generic 2 or provide an appropriate synchronization reference Develop a diagram showing the network synchronization plan Make multiple copies of this diagram and keep a copy at each switch site This diagram is essential for installing administering and tuning up a DS1 network Such a diagram can also be used by maintenance personnel to troubleshoot network problems associated with synchronization A properly designed synchronization plan will improve the quality and reliability of a digital private network If designing a synchronization plan becomes too complex or if many applications have a crucial dependency on the digital facilities then the AT amp T Synchronization Design Service should be consulted USE OF GENERIC 2 AS A SYSTEM CLOCK REFERENCE To provide increased reliability it is recommended that for all cases the primary and secondary system clock references be placed in different modules Tips on how best to use a DS1 as a clock reference are provided next ISDN PRI Trunk Facilities ISDN PRI trunks may terminate on a 4ESS toll office SESS digital CO System 85 R2V4 Generic 1 Generic 2 or compatible vendor s switch Depending on other considerations any of these

Definity Addendum 1 for DS1-DMI-ISDN-PRI Reference

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents